Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
B156/B220
SERVICE MANUAL
002350MIU
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
SERVICE MANUAL
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
SERVICE MANUAL
002350MIU
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing
information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Corporation
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE
B156
B220
GESTETNER
DSc424
DSc432
COMPANY
LANIER
RICOH
LD124c
Aficio 3224C
LD132c
Aficio 3232C
SAVIN
C2410
C3210e
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO.
*
DATE
05/2005
COMMENTS
Original Printing
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and /or other countries.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved
with those marks.
What it means
Refer to section number
See Core Tech Manual for details
Screw
Connector
E-ring
Clip ring
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION............................................................................ 1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................1-1
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...............................................................................1-1
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL .............................................................................1-1
1.1.3 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................1-2
1.1.4 SPACE REQUIREMENTS................................................................1-2
1.2 COPIER (B156/B220)................................................................................1-3
1.2.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS .......................................1-3
1.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART .......................................................1-4
1.2.3 ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-5
1.2.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........................................................1-6
1.3 PAPER TRAY UNIT (B456).....................................................................1-13
1.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-13
1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-13
1.4 LCT (B457) ..............................................................................................1-17
1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-17
1.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-17
1.5 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER (B810)....................................1-21
1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-21
1.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-21
1.6 INTERCHANGE UNIT (B481) .................................................................1-24
1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-24
1.6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-25
1.7 1 BIN TRAY UNIT (B480) ........................................................................1-26
1.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-26
1.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-27
1.8 SHIFT TRAY (B510)................................................................................1-30
1.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-30
1.8.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-30
1.9 BY-PASS FEED UNIT (B490) .................................................................1-33
1.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-33
1.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-33
1.10 DUPLEX UNIT (B509) ...........................................................................1-35
1.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-35
1.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................1-36
1.11 BRIDGE UNIT (B482)............................................................................1-38
1.11.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-38
1.11.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................1-38
1.12 1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408) ............................................................1-42
1.12.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-42
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 06/2006
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................... 2-1
2.1 MAIN UNIT ................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................2-1
2.1.2 WASTE TONER BOTTLES ..............................................................2-2
2.1.3 PM TABLE........................................................................................2-3
2.2 OPTIONAL UNIT PM TABLE ....................................................................2-6
ii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.3.5 SCANNER LAMP .............................................................................3-5
3.3.6 SCANNER I/O BOARD.....................................................................3-8
3.3.7 SCANNER MOTOR..........................................................................3-8
3.3.8 FRONT SCANNER WIRE ................................................................3-8
3.3.9 REAR SCANNER WIRE.................................................................3-11
3.4 LASER UNIT ...........................................................................................3-13
3.4.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION .......................................................3-13
3.4.2 LASER UNIT ..................................................................................3-14
Adjusting for Image Skew ...................................................................3-16
D-Phase Adjustment ...........................................................................3-17
Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment.............................................................3-18
3.4.3 POLYGONAL MIRROR MOTOR AND LSD ...................................3-19
3.5 DEVELOPMENT UNIT ............................................................................3-20
3.6 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) ........................................................3-21
3.6.1 PCU ASSEMBLY............................................................................3-21
3.6.2 WASTE TONER BOTTLES ............................................................3-24
3.6.3 CHARGE CORONA UNIT, GRID, WIRE, AND CLEANER.............3-25
3.6.4 CHARGE CORONA WIRE CLEANER MOTOR .............................3-27
3.6.5 OPC BELT CLEANING UNIT .........................................................3-27
3.6.6 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT .................................3-27
3.7 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT.......................................................................3-28
3.7.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT UNIT......................................................3-28
3.7.2 TRANSFER ROLLER .....................................................................3-28
3.8 FUSING/PAPER EXIT.............................................................................3-29
3.8.1 FUSING UNIT.................................................................................3-29
3.8.2 OIL SUPPLY UNIT .........................................................................3-29
3.8.3 OIL SUPPLY PAD ..........................................................................3-30
3.8.4 CLEANING ROLLER AND FUSING SPONGE ROLLER ...............3-30
3.8.5 OILING ROLLER AND OIL SUPPLY ROLLER ..............................3-31
3.8.6 FUSING LAMPS .............................................................................3-32
When installing the fusing lamps ........................................................3-32
3.8.7 FUSING INNER UNIT.....................................................................3-33
3.8.8 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOFUSE...........................................3-33
3.8.9 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS ...........................................................3-34
3.8.10 FUSING BELT UNIT AND PRESSURE ROLLER UNIT ...............3-34
3.8.11 PRESSURE ROLLER, PRESSURE ROLLER GEAR,
AND CLEANING ROLLER ..........................................................3-35
3.8.12 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR ..........................................3-36
3.8.13 OIL ABSORBERS.........................................................................3-37
3.8.14 FUSING ENTRANCE AND TRANSFER BELT SENSORS ..........3-38
3.8.15 PAPER EXIT/OVERFLOW SENSORS.........................................3-39
3.9 PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT ..........................................................3-41
3.9.1 FEED ROLLER AND FRICTION PAD ............................................3-41
3.9.2 REGISTRATION SENSOR.............................................................3-42
3.9.3 PAPER FEED SENSOR 1..............................................................3-45
3.9.4 PAPER NEAR-END SENSORS .....................................................3-45
3.9.5 PAPER FEED SENSOR 2..............................................................3-46
3.9.6 PAPER END SENSOR 1................................................................3-47
3.9.7 PAPER END SENSOR 2................................................................3-47
SM
iii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.10 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS..............................................................3-48
3.10.1 EXHAUST FAN AND I/O BOARD.................................................3-48
3.10.2 BICU BOARD AND CONTROLLER BOARD................................3-49
3.10.3 HDD..............................................................................................3-50
3.10.4 HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD ..............................................3-51
3.10.5 POWER SUPPLY UNIT................................................................3-52
3.11 DRIVE UNITS........................................................................................3-53
3.11.1 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES ......................................................3-53
K Development Units ..........................................................................3-53
C, Y and M Development Units...........................................................3-53
3.11.2 DEVELOPMENT MOTORS..........................................................3-54
3.11.3 MAIN MOTOR ..............................................................................3-54
3.11.4 PCU GEAR BOX ..........................................................................3-55
3.11.5 FUSING UNIT MOTOR ................................................................3-55
3.11.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 1 ............................................................3-56
3.11.7 PAPER FEED MOTOR.................................................................3-56
3.11.8 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 2 ............................................................3-57
3.11.9 REGISTRATION CLUTCH ...........................................................3-57
3.11.10 OIL PUMP ..................................................................................3-58
3.12 COPY ADJUSTMENT ...........................................................................3-59
3.12.1 PRINTING ....................................................................................3-59
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side...........................................3-59
Blank Margin.......................................................................................3-60
Main Scan Magnification.....................................................................3-60
3.12.2 SCANNING...................................................................................3-61
Scanner Sub-Scan Magnification........................................................3-61
Scanner Leading Edge and Side-to-Side Registration........................3-61
Main Scan Dot Position Correction .....................................................3-62
3.12.3 ARDF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ......................................................3-63
ARDF Side-to-Side and Leading Edge Registration ...........................3-63
ARDF Skew Adjustment .....................................................................3-64
3.13 COLOR ADJUSTMENT.........................................................................3-65
3.13.1 AUTO COLOR CALIBRATION (ACC) ..........................................3-65
3.13.2 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION ..............................................3-66
Copy Mode .........................................................................................3-66
Printer Mode .......................................................................................3-70
3.14 SCANNER WHITE LEVEL ADJUSTMENT ...........................................3-72
White Level Check ..............................................................................3-72
White Level Adjustment ......................................................................3-72
3.15 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION .........................................................3-75
3.16 CHECKING THE BREAKER SWITCH ..................................................3-76
3.16.1 BREAKER ....................................................................................3-76
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 4-1
4.1 SERVICE CALL.........................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ........................................................4-1
B156/B220
iv
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 05/2006
SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 5-1
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................5-1
5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION.....................................5-1
Starting the SP mode............................................................................5-1
Quitting the SP mode............................................................................5-1
SP Mode Touch Screen........................................................................5-2
Copy Window for Test Printing .............................................................5-3
Working on SP Mode Menus ................................................................5-3
Service Mode Lock/Unlock ...................................................................5-4
5.1.2 SP MODE TABLE.............................................................................5-5
SP1-XXX: (Feed) ..................................................................................5-5
SP2-XXX: (Drum)..................................................................................5-9
SP3-XXX: (Process) ...........................................................................5-17
SP4-XXX: (Scanner) ...........................................................................5-20
SP5-XXX: (Mode) ...............................................................................5-28
SP6-XXX: (Peripherals) ......................................................................5-53
SP7-XXX: (Data Log)..........................................................................5-56
SP8-XXX: (Data Log2)........................................................................5-66
5.1.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING (SP5-955-1) ....................................5-100
5.1.4 INPUT CHECK .............................................................................5-101
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Main Machine Input Check (SP5-803) ..............................................5-101
Table 1: Tray 1 and 2 Paper Size .....................................................5-104
Table 2: By-pass Tray Paper Size ....................................................5-104
Table 3: Optional Paper Tray Unit Paper Size ..................................5-104
Table 4: Optional Paper Tray Unit Paper Near End ..........................5-104
ARDF Input Check (SP6-007)...........................................................5-105
Finisher Input Check (SP6-117)........................................................5-106
5.1.5 OUTPUT CHECK .........................................................................5-107
Main Machine Output Check (SP5-804) ...........................................5-107
ARDF Output Check (SP6-008) ........................................................5-110
Finisher Output Check (SP6-118) .....................................................5-110
5.1.6 SMC DATA LISTS (SP5-990).......................................................5-111
5.1.7 ORIGINAL JAM HISTORY DISPLAY ...........................................5-111
Total Count .......................................................................................5-111
Details on the Most Recent Jams .....................................................5-111
5.1.8 COPY JAM HISTORY DISPLAY ..................................................5-112
Total Count .......................................................................................5-112
Details on the Most Recent Jams .....................................................5-112
5.1.9 MEMORY ALL CLEAR (SP5-801) ................................................5-113
Using an SD card..............................................................................5-113
Without Using a Flash Memory Card ................................................5-114
5.2 PRINTER SERVICE MODE ..................................................................5-115
5.2.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE..............................................................5-115
Service Table Key.............................................................................5-115
5.2.2 SP MODES RELATED TO THE PRINTER CONTROLLER .........5-117
5.3 SCANNER SERVICE MODE.................................................................5-118
5.3.1 SCANNER PROGRAM MODE TABLE.........................................5-118
SP1-XXX (System and Others).........................................................5-118
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality) ..................................................5-118
5.3.2 APS OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP4-301) .............................................5-119
5.4 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD ......................................................................5-120
5.4.1 FIRMWARE ..................................................................................5-120
5.4.2 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ........................................5-122
Uploading NVRAM Data (SP5-824) ..................................................5-122
Downloading NVRAM Data (SP5-825) .............................................5-123
5.5 SOFTWARE RESET .............................................................................5-124
5.6 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET............................5-124
5.6.1 SYSTEM SETTING RESET .........................................................5-124
5.6.2 COPIER SETTING RESET ..........................................................5-125
5.7 USER TOOLS .......................................................................................5-126
5.7.1 HOW TO ENTER USER TOOLS..................................................5-126
UP Mode Initial Screen: User Tools/Counter Display........................5-126
System Settings ................................................................................5-126
Copier/Document Server Features ...................................................5-126
Printer, Facsimile, Scanner Settings .................................................5-126
Inquiry ...............................................................................................5-126
Counter .............................................................................................5-127
5.8 DIP SWITCHES.....................................................................................5-127
5.9 SD CARD APPLICATION MOVE ..........................................................5-128
B156/B220
vi
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Overview...........................................................................................5-129
Move Exec ........................................................................................5-129
Undo Exec ........................................................................................5-129
5.10 USING THE DEBUG LOG...................................................................5-130
5.10.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG .........5-130
5.10.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD ...................5-133
5.10.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY .........................................5-134
5.10.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES .......................................................5-135
SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key .............5-135
SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log ..........................5-135
SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log ....................5-135
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS........................................................6-1
6.1.2 PAPER PATH ...................................................................................6-2
6.1.3 DRIVE COMPONENTS ....................................................................6-3
Layout ...................................................................................................6-3
Drive Power Path ..................................................................................6-4
6.1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS .........................................................6-5
Scanner Unit .........................................................................................6-5
Image Transfer .....................................................................................6-6
Paper Path............................................................................................6-7
Development Units................................................................................6-8
Boards ..................................................................................................6-9
6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE.............................................................................6-10
6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM..........................................................................6-10
6.2.2 CONTROLLER ...............................................................................6-12
6.3 COPY PROCESS....................................................................................6-14
6.4 PROCESS CONTROL ............................................................................6-16
6.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-16
6.4.2 PROCESS CONTROL STEPS .......................................................6-16
Six Steps.............................................................................................6-16
When is Process Control Done? .........................................................6-16
Supplementary Information on Process Control .................................6-17
6.5 SCANNING..............................................................................................6-19
6.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-19
6.5.2 SCANNER DRIVE ..........................................................................6-20
Book Mode..........................................................................................6-20
ARDF Mode ........................................................................................6-20
6.5.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION........................................................6-21
6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................................................6-23
6.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-23
6.6.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM .................................................................6-24
Signal Processing ...............................................................................6-24
A/D Conversion...................................................................................6-24
SM
vii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
White Level Correction........................................................................6-24
Others .................................................................................................6-24
Black Level Correction ........................................................................6-25
VPU Test Mode ..................................................................................6-25
6.6.3 IMAGE PROCESSING ...................................................................6-26
Shading Correction .............................................................................6-26
Picture Element (Dot Position) Correction ..........................................6-26
Scan Line Correction ..........................................................................6-26
Scanner Gamma Correction (RGB Gamma Correction) .....................6-27
Filtering ...............................................................................................6-27
ADS (Auto Image Density Selection) ..................................................6-27
Image Separation................................................................................6-28
ACS (Auto Color Selection) ................................................................6-28
Color Conversion ................................................................................6-29
Main Scan Magnification.....................................................................6-29
Printer Gamma Correction ..................................................................6-30
Error Diffusion .....................................................................................6-32
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) ........................................................6-33
6.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-33
6.7.2 CHARGE CORONA UNIT ..............................................................6-34
Power Supply......................................................................................6-34
Grid and Wire Cleaning.......................................................................6-34
Quenching ..........................................................................................6-35
6.7.3 OPC BELT DRIVE ..........................................................................6-36
6.7.4 OPC BELT CLEANING UNIT .........................................................6-36
Bottle Detection ..................................................................................6-36
Waste Toner Collection.......................................................................6-37
Drive ...................................................................................................6-37
6.7.5 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT UNIT ....................................................6-38
Drive ...................................................................................................6-38
Belt Mark Detection.............................................................................6-38
Transfer Roller ....................................................................................6-39
6.7.6 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT .................................6-40
Image Transfer Belt Cleaning .............................................................6-40
Waste Toner Collection.......................................................................6-40
Set Switch and Full Sensor.................................................................6-40
Contact Mechanism ............................................................................6-41
Power Supply......................................................................................6-42
Drive ...................................................................................................6-42
6.8 LASER EXPOSURE................................................................................6-43
6.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-43
6.8.2 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR UNIT...............................................6-44
Speed .................................................................................................6-44
6.8.3 SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR ................................................6-44
6.8.4 LD UNIT..........................................................................................6-44
6.8.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH .....................................................................6-45
Front Door...........................................................................................6-45
Circuit..................................................................................................6-45
Operation Panel Display and Switch Mechanism ...............................6-46
B156/B220
viii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.9 DEVELOPMENT .....................................................................................6-47
6.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-47
6.9.2 DEVELOPMENT UNIT ...................................................................6-48
Replacing Units...................................................................................6-48
Distinguishing the development unit with the one for the B051 series ....6-48
Memory chip .......................................................................................6-48
6.9.3 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM .....................................................6-49
Drive ...................................................................................................6-49
Rollers and Agitators...........................................................................6-50
Shutter ................................................................................................6-50
6.9.4 TONER END DETECTION.............................................................6-51
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-51
Toner Near-End Detection ..................................................................6-51
Toner End Detection ...........................................................................6-52
Toner End Recovery ...........................................................................6-52
6.9.5 DEVELOPMENT UNIT CONTACT MECHANISM ..........................6-54
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-54
Reverse Rotation ................................................................................6-55
6.9.6 POWER SOURCE..........................................................................6-56
Development, Toner Supply, and Doctor Rollers ................................6-56
Doctor Roller.......................................................................................6-56
6.10 PAPER FEED........................................................................................6-57
6.10.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-57
Transport Speed .................................................................................6-58
Friction Pad.........................................................................................6-58
6.10.2 DRIVE MECHANISM....................................................................6-58
Feed and Vertical Transport ...............................................................6-58
Registration.........................................................................................6-58
6.10.3 PAPER LIFT .................................................................................6-59
Lift Mechanism....................................................................................6-59
Paper End/Near-End Detection ..........................................................6-59
6.10.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION...........................................................6-60
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-60
Switch Pattern.....................................................................................6-60
6.11 PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION..............................................6-61
6.11.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-61
Jammed Paper Release .....................................................................6-61
Image Transfer and Paper Separation................................................6-61
6.11.2 CONTACT/SEPARATION MECHANISM .....................................6-62
Timing .................................................................................................6-62
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-62
6.11.3 POWER SUPPLY .........................................................................6-63
Circuit..................................................................................................6-63
Paper Transfer Roller Bias..................................................................6-63
Discharge Plate ..................................................................................6-63
Temperature/Humidity Control............................................................6-63
Roller Cleaning ...................................................................................6-64
6.12 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT......................................................6-65
6.12.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-65
SM
ix
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.12.2 DRIVE...........................................................................................6-66
6.12.3 FUSING UNIT COMPONENTS ....................................................6-67
Fusing Belt..........................................................................................6-67
Heating Roller Lamp and Pressure Roller Lamp.................................6-67
Fusing Bias .........................................................................................6-68
Fusing Unit SCs ..................................................................................6-68
6.12.4 OIL SUPPLY.................................................................................6-69
Oil Supply ...........................................................................................6-69
Oil Supply ...........................................................................................6-70
Oil End Detection and Recovery .........................................................6-71
6.12.5 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ........................................................6-72
6.12.6 ENERGY SAVER MODES ...........................................................6-73
Overview.............................................................................................6-73
Panel Off Mode ...................................................................................6-74
Low Power Mode ................................................................................6-75
Auto Off Mode.....................................................................................6-76
6.12.7 PAPER EXIT ................................................................................6-77
Drive ...................................................................................................6-77
Paper Jam Detection ..........................................................................6-77
6.12.8 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION ..............................................6-77
6.13 PRINT DATA PROCESSING ................................................................6-78
6.13.1 RPCS DRIVER .............................................................................6-78
6.13.2 PCL5C DRIVER............................................................................6-78
6.13.3 PS3 DRIVER ................................................................................6-79
CMS (Color Management System) .....................................................6-79
Gray Correction ..................................................................................6-79
BG/UCR (Black Generation/Under Color Removal)............................6-79
Gamma Correction..............................................................................6-79
Toner Limitation ..................................................................................6-80
Dither Processing and ROP/RIP .........................................................6-80
6.14 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB).....................................................6-81
6.15 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735) ......................................6-82
6.15.1 AUTO ERASE MEMORY .............................................................6-82
Types of Data Overwritten and Not Overwritten .................................6-82
Overwrite timing ..................................................................................6-82
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (MAIN UNIT) ...............................................7-1
2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS ...................................................................7-3
2.2 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ....................................................................7-6
ARDF ....................................................................................................7-6
Bridge Unit ............................................................................................7-6
By-pass Tray Unit .................................................................................7-7
Duplex Unit ...........................................................................................7-7
Interchange Unit ...................................................................................7-7
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LCT .......................................................................................................7-8
Paper Tray Unit.....................................................................................7-8
Shift Tray Unit .......................................................................................7-8
1-Bin Tray Unit ......................................................................................7-9
500-Sheet Finisher................................................................................7-9
1000-sheet Finisher ............................................................................7-10
Upper Tray..........................................................................................7-10
Lower Tray..........................................................................................7-10
xi
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
xii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
TROUBLESHOOTING
1000-SHEET FINISHER B408
500-SHEET FINISHER B458
SERVICE TABLES
INTERCHANGE UNIT B481
DUPLEX UNIT B509
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
BYPASS TRAY UNIT B490
TAB
POSITION 7
TAB
POSITION 8
SPECIFICATIONS
TAB
POSITION 2
TAB
POSITION 3
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
TAB
POSITION 4
TAB
POSITION 5
TAB
POSITION 6
INSTALLATION
TAB
POSITION 1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Installation
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range:
2. Humidity Range:
3. Ambient Illumination:
4. Ventilation:
5. Ambient Dust:
Right to left:
SM
1-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
1. Insert the plug firmly in the outlet.
2. Avoid using an outlet extension plug or cord.
3. Ground the machine.
1. Input voltage level: 120 V, 60 Hz, More than 12 A
220 240 V, 50/60 Hz, More than 8 A
110 V, 50/60 Hz, More than 13A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: 10%
3. Do not put or place anything on the power cord.
D
B156I501.WMF
B156/B220
1-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER (B156/B220)
Installation
CAUTION
Rating voltage for peripherals.
Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.
1. ADF
1. Rating voltage output connector
for accessory Max. DC24 V
2. Finisher
1. Rating voltage output connector
for accessory Max. DC24 V
4. Duplex Unit
1. Rating voltage output connector
for accessory Max. DC24 V
B156I502.WMF
3. By-pass Tray
1. Rating voltage output connector
for accessory Max. DC24 V
SM
1-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER (B156/B220)
No
Yes
Does the user require the By-pass Tray?
Yes
No
No
No
Does the user require the Duplex Unit and/or 1-bin Tray Unit ?
Yes
No
B156/B220
1-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
Description
Paper Tray Decal
Model Name Decal
NECR
Factory Data Sheet
Filter Duct
Filter
Caution Decal Power/Paper
Decal Copy prohibition
Manual Holder
Operating Instructions System Setting
Operating Instructions Copy Reference
Operating Instructions Printer
Operating Instructions Security
Instruction Procedure Sheet
Sheet Notes for User
Screw for Manual Holder
Stamp
Cloth (ADF Standard version only)
Cloth Holder (ADF Standard version only)
1-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Qty
1
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
B156/B220
Installation
COPIER (B156/B220)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER (B156/B220)
B156I504.WMF
B156I505.WMF
[B]
[A]
B156I506.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
If the optional paper tray or the optional LCT will be installed at the same time,
place the copier on the paper tray unit or the LCT first, then install the copier and
the other options.
NOTE: Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine. They will be
reused when the machine is moved to another location in the future.
1. Remove the tapes.
2. Open the front cover [A] and remove the shipping retainer [B].
B156/B220
1-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
COPIER (B156/B220)
[B]
[D]
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
B156I508.WMF
B156I507.WMF
[E]
B156I509.WMF
3. Open the right cover [A], and remove the red tags [B].
4. Open the left cover [C] ( x 2), and remove the red tags [D].
5. Pull out all development units [E] ( x 1 each).
SM
1-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER (B156/B220)
B156I511.WMF
6. Keep the development unit level and shake the development unit about 10
times from side to side.
NOTE: 1) Do not touch the development roller or the development roller gear.
2) Use caution not to drop the cartridge or to damage it.
3) If the cartridge has not been shaken well, the machine takes a
longer time to initialize the development unit, or an error message or
SC350 is displayed. When either of them is displayed, turn the main
switch off and on.
B156/B220
1-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
COPIER (B156/B220)
[B]
[A]
B156I513.WMF
SM
1-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER (B156/B220)
[A]
[A]
[B]
[A]
B156I514.WMF
[F]
[J]
B156I515.WMF
[E]
[D]
[C]
B156I516.WMF
B156/B220
1-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
COPIER (B156/B220)
[A]
B156I517.WMF
14. If the optional bridge unit will not be installed: Swing the sensor feeler [A]
out.
15. Install the optional ARDF (EU model only) or the optional platen cover (see
ARDF Installation or Platen Cover Installation).
[C]
[E]
[B]
B810I504.WMF
[D]
B502I006.WMF
16. Install the stamp cartridge [B] if the ARDF [C] was installed.
17. Attach the cloth holder [D] to the left side of the scanner as shown. Then put
the cloth [E] in the cloth holder if the ARDF was installed.
SM
1-11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER (B156/B220)
18. Plug in the machine and turn the main power switch on. The machine
automatically performs the initialization procedure. After this has finished, the
Start button LED turns green.
19. Make copies of image samples (text, photo, and text/photo modes).
20. Perform Automatic Color Calibration (ACC).
NOTE: Since this machine has been subject to color adjustment using
Automatic Color Calibration (ACC) at the factory, there is no need to
make automatic color calibration again if the customer is satisfied with
the image sample. If the customer is not satisfied, do the following.
1) Print the ACC test pattern (UP mode Maintenance ACC Start).
2) Place the printout on the exposure glass.
3) Place 10 sheets of white paper on top of the test chart. Then, close
the ADF or platen cover.
4) Press Start Scanning on the LCD panel. The machine performs the
ACC.
21. If you want to enable the Ethernet NIB function, set SP5-985-001 to 1: enable.
If you want to enable the USB function, set SP5-985-002 to 1: enable.
NOTE: The defaults are 0: disabled.
22. Make sure that the sample image has been copied normally.
23. Remove the double-sided tape from
the manual holder. Then attach it [A]
to the left side of the copier ( x 2).
NOTE: When you install the 1,000-Sheet
Finisher (B408), attach the
manual holder a different location.
[A]
B156/B220
1-12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156I532.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Description
Right Stand Bracket
Left Stand Bracket
Securing Bracket
Front Stand
Rear Stand
Screw M4x10
Knob Screw
Stepped Screw
Qty
1
1
2
1
1
4
2
2
B456I001.WMF
B456I002.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the strips of tape.
SM
1-13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Installation
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER TRAY UNIT (B456)
[A]
B456I103.WMF
[B]
[D]
[D]
[C]
B456I104.WMF
2. Remove the paper trays [A] from the paper tray unit and remove the shipping
retainers.
3. Install the front stand [B] ( x2).
4. Install the rear stand [C].
5. Attach the two stand brackets [D] ( x1 each).
B156/B220
1-14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
[C]
[D]
[B]
B456I215.WMF
[A]
[E]
B456I212.WMF
[E]
B456I106.WMF
6. Attach the cardboard guides [A] to each side of the paper tray unit [B].
7. Set the copier [C] on the paper tray unit [B]. Use the cardboard guides.
8. Remove the cardboard guides from the paper tray unit.
9. Remove the paper trays [D] from the copier and secure the paper tray unit
( x2).
10. Attach a securing bracket [E] to each side of the paper tray unit, as shown
( x1 each).
SM
1-15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
B456I004.WMF
11. Reinstall the paper trays and attach the appropriate paper tray number decal
[A] to the paper tray.
NOTE: The paper tray number decal is in the accessory box for the main
copier.
12. Load paper into the paper trays.
13. Turn on the main switch.
14. Check the machines operation and copy quality.
B156/B220
1-16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Description
Right Stand Bracket
Left Stand Bracket
Securing Bracket
Front Stand
Rear Stand
Screw M4x10
Knob Screw
Stepped Screw
Qty
1
1
2
1
1
4
2
2
5
4
B457I007.WMF
B457I001.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the strips of tape.
SM
1-17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Installation
LCT (B457)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LCT (B457)
[A]
[B]
[C]
B457I003.WMF
[E]
[D]
[E]
B457I104.WMF
2. While pressing the stopper [A] attached to the guide rail, pull out the large
capacity tray [B].
3. Install the front stand [C] ( x2).
4. Install the rear stand [D].
5. Attach the two stand brackets [E] ( x1 each).
B156/B220
1-18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
LCT (B457)
[C]
[D]
[B]
B456I215.WMF
[A]
B457I152.WMF
[E]
[E]
B457I156.WMF
6. Attach the cardboard guides [A] to each side of the LCT [B].
7. Set the copier [C] on the LCT [B]. Use the cardboard guides.
8. Remove the cardboard guides from the LCT.
9. Remove the paper trays [D] from the copier and secure the LCT ( x2).
10. Attach a securing bracket [E] to each side of the LCT, as shown ( x1 each).
SM
1-19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LCT (B457)
[A]
B457I005.WMF
11. Reinstall the paper trays and attach the appropriate paper tray number decal
[A] to the LCT.
NOTE: The paper tray number decal is in the accessory box for the main
copier.
12. Load paper into the LCT.
13. Turn on the main switch.
14. Check the machines operation and copy quality.
B156/B220
1-20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Description
Scale Guide
DF Exposure Glass
Stud Screw
Knob Screw
Original Size Decal
Screwdriver Tool
Cloth
Holder
Qty
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
8
B386I500.WMF
B386I101.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the strips of tape.
SM
1-21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Installation
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER (B810)
[E]
[C]
[F]
[D]
[G]
[A]
[G]
[B]
[H]
B386I107.WMF
[H]
[I]
B386I108.WMF
B156/B220
1-22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
[B]
[A]
B386I110.WMF
B386I111.WMF
[C]
B386I501.WMF
10. Peel off the platen sheet [A] and place it on the exposure glass.
11. Line up the rear left corner of the platen sheet flush against corner [B] on the
exposure glass.
12. Close the ARDF.
13. Attach the appropriate scale decal [C] as shown.
14. Turn the main power switch on. Then check if the document feeder works
properly.
15. Make a full size copy. Check that the registrations (side-to-side and leading
edge) and image skew are correct. If they are not, adjust the registrations and
image skew (refer to Replacements and Adjustments Copy Adjustments).
SM
1-23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INTERCHANGE UNIT (B481)
Description
Interchange Unit
Qty
1
B481I101.WMF
B156/B220
1-24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INTERCHANGE UNIT (B481)
Rev. 06/2005
Installation
[C]
[B]
[G]
[A]
B481I102.WMF
[F]
[E]
[D]
[F]
B481I103.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove all tapes.
2. Open the right cover [A] of the copier.
3. Open cover [B] and remove it.
4. Remove the connector cover [C] ( x1).
5. Open the cover [D] of the interchange unit.
6. Install the interchange unit [E] (
x1).
NOTE: Take care not to pinch the harness at the front side.
7. Secure the interchange unit with the knob screws [F].
8. Reinstall the connector cover [G] which was removed in step 4 ( x 1).
SM
1-25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1 BIN TRAY UNIT (B480)
Description
1-Bin Tray Unit
Tray
Sub-Tray
Tray Guide
Shield Mylar
Sub Paper Guide
Paper Guide
Tapping Screw M3x8
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
B156/B220
B480I101.WMF
1-26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1 BIN TRAY UNIT (B480)
Installation
[A]
B480I107.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
NOTE: Before installing this 1-bin tray unit, the optional interchange unit
(B481) must be installed.
1. Remove all tapes.
2. If the optional bridge unit has been installed, open the right jam removal cover
[A] of the bridge unit.
If the optional bridge unit is not installed, skip this step.
SM
1-27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1 BIN TRAY UNIT (B480)
[A]
[B]
B480I108.WMF
[E]
[C]
B480I102.WMF
[F]
[D]
B480I103.WMF
3. Peel off the backing of the double-sided tape attached to the shield mylar [A].
Then attach the shield mylar to the 1-bin unit, as shown.
4. If the front right cover [B] is installed, remove it ( x1).
5. Remove the cover [C].
6. Install the 1-bin tray unit [D] ( x1).
7. Disconnect the connector [E] and remove the LED board [F].
B156/B220
1-28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
[A]
[B]
[C]
B480I104.WMF
[D]
B480I109.WMF
[E]
[G]
[F]
B480I106.WMF
8. Install the LED board [A] on the front right cover ( x1).
9. Reinstall the front right cover [B] ( x2, x1).
10. Peel off the backing of the double-sided tape attached to the paper guide [C].
Then attach the paper guide to the underside of the scanner unit as shown.
11. Peel off the backing of the double-sided tape attached to the sub paper guide
[D]. Then attach the sub paper guide to the underside of the scanner unit as
shown.
12. Install the tray guide [E].
13. Install the tray [F].
14. Install the sub-tray [G].
15. Turn on the main power switch and check the 1-bin tray unit operation.
SM
1-29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SHIFT TRAY (B510)
Description
Shift Tray Unit
Paper Guide - Large
Paper Guide - Small
Stepped Screw
Core
Qty
1
1
2
1
1
5
1
B510I111.WMF
[A]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[C]
[E]
B510I102.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove all tapes (see the diagram at the top of the page).
2. Remove the cover [A] ( x1).
3. Replace screw [B] with a stepped screw [C].
4. Install the large paper guide [D] and two small paper guides [E], as shown.
B156/B220
1-30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
[F]
B510I211.WMF
[E]
B510I103.WMF
SM
1-31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SHIFT TRAY (B510)
[A]
B510I201.WMF
[B]
[A]
[C]
B510I202.WMF
[F]
[E]
B510I203.WMF
B156/B220
1-32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Description
By-pass Tray Unit
Tapping Screw
Decal
Qty
1
3
1
2
3
B490I001.WMF
[A]
B490I113.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove all tapes (see the diagram at the top of the page).
2. Remove the entrance cover [A] (x 2).
SM
1-33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Installation
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BY-PASS FEED UNIT (B490)
[A]
[B]
B490I114.WMF
B490I002.WMF
Default
(No By-pass tray)
0
2
2
0
By-pass tray
installed
2
0
0
2
Make a copy from the by-pass tray. Then check the registration.
B156/B220
1-34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Description
Duplex Unit
Upper Bracket
Rear Holder Bracket
Front Holder Bracket
Clip
Tapping Screw M4x6
Tapping Screw M3x6
Qty
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
6
7
B509I101.WMF
SM
1-35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Installation
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT (B509)
[A]
[A]
[B]
[A]
B509I102.WMF
[B]
B509I103.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
NOTE: Before installing the duplex unit, the optional interchange unit (B481)
must be installed.
1. Remove all tapes (see the previous page).
2. Remove five covers [A] ( x1).
3. Install three brackets [B] ( x1 each M4x6).
B156/B220
1-36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
[D]
[B]
[B]
[C]
[A]
B509I104.WMF
[G]
[F]
B509I105.WMF
[E]
SM
1-37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BRIDGE UNIT (B482)
Description
Bridge Unit
Rear Joint Bracket
Front Joint Bracket
Knob Screw
Screw M3x6
Screw M4x14
Core
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
B482I151.WMF
[A]
B482I500.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove all tapes.
2. If the sensor feeler [A] is out, fold it away into the machine.
B156/B220
1-38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
[A]
[B]
[B]
B482I102.WMF
[F]
[D]
[C]
B482I209.WMF
[E]
[G]
B482I103.WMF
SM
1-39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BRIDGE UNIT (B482)
[A]
[A]
B482I207.WMF
[B]
[C]
B482I208.WMF
B156/B220
1-40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
[C]
[A]
[B]
B482I206.WMF
[E]
B482I105.WMF
[D]
SM
1-41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408)
10
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Description
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
For
B022/B027/B031/
B089/B093/B097
--
(Use 3)
B408I502.WMF
For
B051/B052/
B156/B220
--------
--
--
For
B079/B082/
B135/B138
--
(Use 4)
B156/B220
1-42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408)
Installation
[A]
B408I102.WMF
B408I103.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
NOTE: The following options must be installed before installing this finisher.
- Bridge Unit (B482)
- Paper Tray Unit (B456) or LCT (B457)
Also, the optional adjustment table (B488) is required.
1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes.
SM
1-43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408)
[A]
[E]
[D]
[H]
[B]
[C]
B408I152.WMF
[G]
[I]
[F]
B408I114.WMF
B156/B220
1-44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408)
Installation
[A]
B408I501.WMF
11. Attach the staple position decal [A] to the ARDF as shown.
12. Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation.
SM
1-45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
500-SHEET FINISHER (B458)
Description
Unit Holder
Entrance Guide
Shift Tray
Snap Ring
Knob Screw
Qty
1
1
1
2
2
B458I102.WMF
B156/B220
1-46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
500-SHEET FINISHER (B458)
Installation
[A]
B458I101.WMF
[C]
[B]
B458I103.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
NOTE: Before installing the 500-sheet finisher, the optional bridge unit (B482)
must be installed.
1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes.
2. Install the entrance guide [A].
3. Remove the holder cover [B]. Then install the unit holder [C] (2 screws).
4. Re-install the holder cover [B].
SM
1-47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
500-SHEET FINISHER (B458)
[A]
B458I104.WMF
[B]
B458I105.WMF
B156/B220
1-48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION
Installation
[A]
B156I518.WMF
[C]
[B]
B156I519.WMF
SM
1-49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
CAUTION
Unplug the main machines power cord before starting the following
procedure.
[Slot 1]
[Slot 2]
[B]
[Slot 3]
[A]
B769I001.WMF
B156/B220
1-50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CAUTION
Disconnect the main machines power cord before you start this procedure.
[A]
[B]
B609I001.WMF
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from I/F Card Slot A ( x 2).
2. Install the file-format-converter board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
NOTE: Use a screwdriver when you tighten the knob-screws. Do not tighten
them manually. It can cause this board to disconnect from the machine.
SM
1-51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Installation
PRINTER OPTIONS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
NOTE: You can only install one of these network interfaces at the same time: IEEE
802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284 (Parallel/Centronics), IEEE1394
(FireWire), or Bluetooth.
[A]
[B]
B581I001.WMF
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from I/F Card Slot B ( x 2).
2. Install the FireWire board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
NOTE: Use a screwdriver when you tighten the knob-screws. Do not tighten
them manually. It can cause this board to disconnect from the machine.
B156/B220
1-52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
SP No.
5839 004
Name
Host Name
5839 007
Cycle Master
5839 008
BCR Mode
5839 009
5839 010
IRM 1394a
Check
Unique ID
5839 011
Logout
5839 012
5839 013
Login
Login MAX
Function
Sets the name of the device used on the network.
Example: RNPXXXXXXXXXX
Enables or disables cycle master function of the IEEE
1394 standard bus.
Sets the BCR (Broadcast Channel Register) setting for
the Auto Node operation for the standard IEEE1394 bus
for when IRM is not in use. The following three settings
are available: Standard, IRM Color Copy, and
Always Effective.
Determines whether an IRM check for IEEE 1394a is
conducted for the Auto Node when IRM is not used.
Enables the Node_Unique_Id setting for enumeration
on the standard IEEE 1394 bus.
Determines how successive initiator login requests are
handled during login in for SBP-2.
Enables or disables exclusive login for SBP-2.
Sets the limit for the number of logins for SBP-2. Range:
1 ~ 62.
1-53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Installation
PRINTER OPTIONS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
CAUTION
Disconnect the main machines power cord before you start this procedure.
NOTE: You can only install one of these network interfaces at the same time: IEEE
802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284 (Parallel/Centronics), IEEE1394
(FireWire), Bluetooth.
[A]
[B]
B679I001.WMF
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from I/F Card Slot B ( x 2).
2. Install the interface board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
NOTE: Use a screwdriver when you tighten the knob-screws. Do not tighten
them manually. It can cause this board to disconnect from the machine.
B156/B220
1-54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
Installation
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
NOTE: You can only install one of the following network interfaces at the same
time: IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284 (Parallel/Centronics),
IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth.
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
G813I001.WMF
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from I/F Card Slot B ( x 2).
2. Attach the wireless LAN board [B] to the controller board (Knob-screw x 2).
NOTE: Use a screwdriver when you tighten the knob-screws. Do not tighten
them manually. It can cause this board to disconnect from the machine.
3. Install the wireless LAN card [C]. The printed side must point to the front of the
machine.
4. Attach the antenna cap [D].
SM
1-55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
[C]
[B]
[A]
B529I008.WMF
If wireless LAN reception is not very good, install the extended antenna.
5. Remove the wireless LAN card [A] from the machine.
6. Remove the standard antenna [B] from the wireless LAN card.
7. Install the extended antenna [C] on the LAN card, as shown.
NOTE: The antenna jack must be at the bottom end.
8. Twine the extended-antenna wires seven or eight times.
9. Peel off the backing of the double-sided tape attached to the antennas, and
stick the antennas on the machine.
B156/B220
1-56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
1-57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Installation
PRINTER OPTIONS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
Name
Channel MAX
5840 007
Channel MIN
5840 011
UP mode
B156/B220
Function
Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the
country.
Sets the minimum range of the channels settings
allowed for your country.
Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
Function
Used to confirm the current SSID setting.
Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.
Used to show the maximum length of the string that can
be used for the WEP Key entry.
1-58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.15.6
BLUETOOTH (B736)
CAUTION
Disconnect the main machines power cord before you start this procedure.
NOTE: You can only install one of these network interfaces at the same time: IEEE
802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284 (Parallel/Centronics), IEEE1394
(FireWire), Bluetooth.
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from I/F
Card Slot B ( x 2).
2. Install the Bluetooth board [B]
(Knob-screw x 2).
NOTE: Use a screwdriver when
you tighten the knobscrews. Do not tighten
them manually. It can
cause this board to
disconnect from the
machine.
[A]
[B]
[C]
B736I001.WMF
SM
1-59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Installation
PRINTER OPTIONS
Rev. 06/2006
Rev. 06/2006
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)
IMPORTANT NOTE
If the Customer forgets the Supervisor login password after changing it
from the default setting, a service call is required and the NVRAM must be
replaced to reset the Supervisor login and password.
2. Make sure that Admin. Authentication Machine Management is ON.
[System Settings] [Administrator Tools] [Administrator Authentication
Management] - [Machine Management]
If this setting is OFF, tell the customer this setting must be ON before you do the
installation procedure.
3. Make sure that under Machine Management Administrator Tools is enabled
(selected).
[System Settings] [Administrator Tools] [Administrator Authentication
Management] [Machine Management] - [Available Settings]
If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be
enabled (selected) before you do the installation procedure.
ACCESSORY CHECK
The B156/B220 uses a Type D Data Overwrite Security Unit. Check the
accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description
Qty
1. SD Card ............................................................................... 1
B156/B220
1-60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)
Rev. 06/2006
Installation
[A]
B735I901.WMF
[B]
B735I903.WMF
CAUTION
Before you begin any procedure, always turn OFF the machine main power
switch and unplug the power cord.
SM
1-61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)
1.16.2
Rev. 06/2006
INSTALLATION
NOTE: You must install the data overwrite protection unit in SD Card slot 2. But,
the postscript option for this machine is also installed in SD Card slot 2.
Because of this, you must do the SD Card Appli move procedure first (
5.9) if the postscript option is installed and you want to install the Data
Overwrite Security unit. Move the Data Overwrite Security application (slot
3) to the SD Card that contains the Printer/Scanner application (slot 1).
1. If the machine is ON, turn the
operation switch and the main
power switch OFF.
2. If the NIB is installed, disconnect
the network cable.
3. Remove the SD card slot cover [A]
(x1).
4. With the printed side of the SD
card [B] facing the rear of the
machine, install the DOS SD card
in SD card slot C2.
[A]
[B]
B735I001.WMF
9. Turn the operation switch OFF, and then turn the main power switch OFF.
10. Turn the main power switch ON.
11. Do SP5990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).
12. Make sure the ROM number and firmware version on the diagnostic report are
the same as those in the chart below .
z
Diagnostic Report:
GW1a_zoffy:
B7355050 / 0.04
B7355050 / 0.04
GW2a_zoffy:
B7355060 / 0.03
B7355060 / 0.03
B156/B220
1-62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Important: The ROM number and firmware version number change when the
firmware is upgraded.
If the ROM numbers are not the same, or the version numbers are not the same,
this means the unit was not installed correctly.
If this happens:
Make sure the MFP model and unit type match (Type C or D).
The B156/B220 uses a Data Overwrite Security Unit Type D.
If they do not match:
1) Do the installation procedure again, from Step 1.
2) Replace the Data Overwrite Security Unit (SD card) with the correct
type. Redo installation procedure.
3) Replace the NV-RAM. Redo installation procedure.
[B]
09/09/2003
Origi.
Total
[C]
14:13
Copies
16. Make sure the overwrite erase icon [A] is displayed on the operation panel.
If it is not displayed, do Step 7 again.
17. Make a sample copy.
18. Make sure the overwrite icon changes as follows:
The bottom of the icon (white part) becomes thicker [B].
Next Copy is displayed for a short time under the icon.
The icon returns to its usual shape [C].
SM
1-63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Installation
Rev. 06/2006
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
[B]
[C]
[A]
[E]
B156I520.WMF
[D]
B156I524.WMF
[G]
[F]
B156I552.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
1. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x 1).
2. Remove the rear cover [B] ( x 2).
3. Remove the upper right cover [C] ( x 2).
4. Remove the cap [D].
5. Install the bracket [E] ( x 2).
6. Connect the cable [F] to the I/O board and route it as shown.
NOTE: If the cable is installed correctly, the length [G] is about 140 mm.
B156/B220
1-64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
Installation
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
[F]
B156I526.WMF
[E]
[G]
B156I527.WMF
7. Hold the key counter plate nuts [A] on the inside of the key counter bracket [B]
and insert the key counter holder [C].
8. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket ( x 2).
9. Install the key counter cover [D] ( x 2).
10. Install the stepped screw [E].
11. Connect the cable [F].
12. Hook the key counter holder assembly [G] onto the stepped screw and secure
it ( x 1).
13. The restricted access control for the key counter is enabled by the Copier UP
mode.
SM
1-65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
[G]
[B]
[F]
[C]
[A]
[D]
B156I620.WMF
[E]
[H]
B156I531.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
B156/B220
1-66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[D]
[E]
[B]
[A]
[C]
B156I529.WMF
B156I528.WMF
7. Remove the rear scale [A] ( x 3), left scale [B] ( x 2), and exposure glass
[C].
NOTE: When installing the exposure glass, make sure that the mark [D] is
positioned at the rear left corner, as shown.
8. Install the anti-condensation heater [E] ( x 2, x 1).
9. Reinstall the exposure glass and the scales.
SM
1-67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Installation
ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY HEATER
[B]
[F]
[C]
[D]
[A]
B156I530.WMF
B156I620.WMF
[E]
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
1. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x 1).
2. Remove the rear cover [B] ( x 2).
3. Remove the lower rear cover [C] ( x 2).
4. Slide out the 1st and 2nd paper trays.
5. Pass the connector [D] through the opening [E].
6. Install the tray heater assembly [F]( x 1).
B156/B220
1-68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
TRAY HEATER
[D]
[C]
[A]
[E]
B156I531.WMF
[B]
B156I551.WMF
[F]
7. Remove the oil tank [A].
NOTE: Hang the left oil pipe [B] in the notch [C] in the controller box. Then, oil
does not fall from the pipe to the floor.
8. Connect the two connectors [D].
9. Install the oil tank at its initial position.
NOTE: When you install the oil tank, make sure that the position of the mark
[E] on the oil pipe is as shown in the diagram above. If you do not do
this, the oil is not correctly supplied to the fusing unit.
10. Connect the heater cable to the ac cable [F].
11. Reassemble the machine.
SM
1-69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)
[B]
[D]
[C]
[E]
[A]
[D]
B456I502.WMF
B456I620.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
B156/B220
1-70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
[A]
[C]
[B]
[J]
B456I201.WMF
[H]
[F]
[D]
[E]
[L]
[G]
[K]
[I]
B456I292.WMF
SM
1-71
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL LCT)
[B]
[D]
[E]
[D]
B457I502.WMF
[C]
[A]
B457I620.WMF
[F]
[G]
B457I501.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
1. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x 1).
2. Remove the rear cover for the main machine [B] ( x 2).
3. Remove the lower rear cover [C] ( x 2).
4. Remove the joint brackets [D] ( x 1 each).
5. Remove the rear cover for the optional LCT [E] ( x 2).
6. Slide out the paper tray [F] from the optional LCT.
7. Push stopper [G] on the right slide rail and remove the paper tray.
B156/B220
1-72
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
Installation
[B]
[C]
[L]
B457I251.WMF
[K]
[H]
[J]
[E]
[D]
[F]
[G]
[I]
B457I291.WMF
SM
1-73
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MAIN UNIT
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1 MAIN UNIT
Preventive
Maintenance
2.1.1 OVERVIEW
Fusing subunit
PCU
B156P501.WMF
SM
2-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MAIN UNIT
B156P502.BMP
T/B waste
toner bottle
B156P503.BMP
O/B waste
toner bottle
B156/B220
2-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MAIN UNIT
PM Table
After replacing a part, reset the PM counter for that part (SP 7-804).
Abbreviations: Clean, Inspect, Oil replenishment, Replace, Emergency Maintenance
70K
White plate
1st mirror
2nd mirror
3rd mirror
Front/rear rails
Exposure glass
Dust shield glass
(laser optics unit)
APS sensors
Prints
80K 120K
C
C
C
C
C
C
Developments
70K 120K 240K
EM
Remarks
Optical cloth
Optical cloth
Optical cloth
Optical cloth
Damp/dry cloth
Glass cleaner
Optical cloth and dry
cloth
Dry cloth
Prints
80K 120K
Developments
50K 120K 240K
EM
R
PCU
T/B waste toner bottle
ID sensor
O/B waste toner bottle
R
R
C
Remarks
C
C
C
Prints
80K 120K
Developments
50K 120K 240K
R
R
R
70K
Prints
80K 120K
Developments
60K 120K 240K
R
R
R
EM
Remarks
EM
Remarks
Development Unit
Development unit-C
Development unit-M
Development unit-Y
Development unit-K
SM
2-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Refer to the PM
counter for each unit.
Do SP 3-929 after you
replace a development
unit (see section 3.5
for details).
(Not reclaimed at the
reclamation center)
B156/B220
Preventive
Maintenance
Optical System
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MAIN UNIT
Developments
75K 120K 240K
Prints
60K 80K 120K
R
Developments
75K 120K 240K
70K
Idle roller (registration)
Registration sensor
Transport guide
Feed roller (main unit)
Vertical transport roller
Friction pad (main unit)
EM
Remarks
Damp/dry cloth
Damp/dry cloth
Damp/dry cloth
Damp/dry cloth
Fusing Unit
Fusing subunit
Oil supply unit
EM
Thermistor
Fusing oil
Remarks
I
O
.Components Parts of the Fusing Sub Unit and Oil Supply Unit
60K
R
Prints
80K 120K
Developments
75K 120K 240K
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
EM
Remarks
I, C
I, C
See Note 1
See Note 1
I, C
I, C
See Note 1
See Note 1
I, C
See Note 1
Note 1: Carefully remove paper dust and toner (for example, with a dry cloth).
B156/B220
2-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MAIN UNIT
70K
Prints
80K 120K
Developments
75K 120K 240K
R
R
70K
Prints
80K 120K
Developments
75K 120K 240K
Exhaust filters
Ozone filter
EM
Remarks
EM
Remarks
Others
Breaker
SM
Prints
80K 120K
R
R
R
Developments
75K 120K 240K
EM
2-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Remarks
Damp cloth
B156/B220
Preventive
Maintenance
Filters
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT PM TABLE
Duplex Unit
Idle roller (inverter)
Idle roller
(vertical transport)
Prints
70K 80K 120K
C
Developments
75K 120K 240K
EM
Remarks
Damp/dry cloth
Damp/dry cloth
Prints
80K 120K
R
R
R
I
C
C
Developments
75K 120K 240K
Prints
80K 120K
R
R
R
Developments
75K 120K 240K
EM
Remarks
Prints
80K 120K
R
R
R
Developments
75K 120K 240K
EM
Remarks
EM
C
C
Remarks
Damp/dry cloth
Damp/dry cloth
B156/B220
2-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIAL TOOLS
: Clip ring
Replacement
and
Adjustment
Description
Scanner Positioning Pin (4 pcs/set)
SD Card
USB SD Card Adapter
C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set)
20X Magnification Scope
3.2 FILTERS
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[I]
[F]
B156R819.WMF
[H]
SM
3-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[G]
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
[D]
[C]
B156R222.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
B156R223.WMF
B156/B220
3-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
[B]
[A]
B156R004.WMF
[C]
5. Lens block assembly [C]
( x 4, x 4)
NOTE: Do not remove the paintlocked screws.
6. After reassembling, input the data
in accordance with the data sheet
included in the spare SBU unit (
SP4-540).
Refer to the diagram on the next
page.
Row No. 1: Numbers 1 to 6
please ignore
Row No. 2: Numbers 7 to 10
B156R224.WMF
please store in the following SP
modes
7: SP 4-540-001
8: SP 4-540-002
9: SP 4-540-003
10: SP 4-540-004
Row No. 3: Numbers 11 to 14 please store in the following SP modes
11: SP 4-540-021
12: SP 4-540-022
13: SP 4-540-023
14: SP 4-540-024
Before inputting the number, check whether it is + or (look at the data
sheet), then input a +ve or ve number accordingly.
7. Check the registrations (
SP4-010/011 Chapter 3, Copy adjustments)
NOTE: After replacing the left scale, adjust the scanner white level (
3.14).
SM
3-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
B156R999.JPG
B156/B220
3-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
[A]
[B]
B156R007.WMF
[D]
[C]
[A]
[E]
[F]
B156R225.WMF
SM
3-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
[A]
B156R103.WMF
[B]
[F]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B156R101.WMF
B156/B220
3-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
[A]
[D]
Reassembling
When you install the scanner lamp,
make sure that the binding [E] is set as
shown. Also, make sure that the cable
that has a black tube is installed on the
cable guide as shown [F].
[B]
[F]
[E]
B156R102.WMF
OK
NG
B156R104.WMF
[G]
SM
3-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[C]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
B156R006.WMF
[B]
[A]
B156R008.WMF
[A]
B156/B220
[B]
[C]
3-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156R226.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
[C]
[A]
[B]
B156R227.WMF
[H]
[G]
[E]
SM
3-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156R228.WMF
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[D]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
B156R229.WMF
[G]
[L]
[J]
[E]
[K]
[H]
[F]
[I]
B156R230.WMF
B156/B220
3-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
[C]
[B]
[D]
B156R231.WMF
[E]
SM
3-11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
B156R232.WMF
5. Stick the wire to the pulley with tape, so you can easily handle the pulley and
wire during installation.
6. Install the drive pulley on the shaft.
NOTE: Do not screw the pulley onto the shaft yet.
7. Install the wire.
NOTE: The winding pattern is a mirror image of that of the front scanner wire.
8. Perform steps 10 through 15 in Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire.
B156/B220
3-12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
Replacement
and
Adjustment
CAUTION
VORSICHT
>PS<
B156CAUTION.WMF
B156R233.WMF
DANGER
Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug from the power
outlet before beginning any disassembly or adjustment of the laser unit.
This printer uses a class-1 laser beam with a wavelength of 650 nm and an
output of 7 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury.
SM
3-13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
[F]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[C]
[A]
[E]
B156R924.WMF
B156I620.WMF
[G]
B156R151.WMF
B156/B220
3-14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
[A]
B156R234.WMF
[D]
[E]
B156R235.WMF
[F]
13. Dust shield glass cleaner lever [F]
NOTE: The dust shield glass cleaner
lever is the blue lever at the
left side of the charge corona
unit (
3.6.3).
B156R236.WMF
SM
3-15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
[A]
14. LD cover [A] ( x 2)
15. Laser unit [B] ( x 4, Flat cable x 1)
NOTE: When reassembling,
connect the flat cable with
the blue side down.
[B]
B156R237.WMF
[ NOTE]
[B]
B156R238.WMF
0.6mm
Paper feed
(A3 SEF)
B156R239.WMF
B156/B220
3-16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
D-Phase Adjustment
This adjustment corrects the difference in density on the left and right sides of the
paper. The data sheet (distributed with the laser unit) is necessary for this
adjustment. After replacing the laser unit, do the following adjustment.
NOTE: 1) If the D-phase adjustment is not made, a difference in the density may
be seen. This difference can be conspicuous when the gray scale in the
Color Chart C-4 is copied or when an original is repeatedly copied.
2) The D-phase adjustment is necessary whenever a difference in the
density is seen. Keep the data sheet inside the front cover for future
use.
1. Print out the test pattern with SP5955-1 and select pattern 50 (
5.1.3).
Replacement
and
Adjustment
Feed direction
B156R241.WMF
3. See the value of Mag. Shift Error: LD1-2 below the bar code on the data sheet,
and find the range in Table 1 which
Adjustment
Mag. Shift
includes the value.
Error: LD1-2
SP2-951-1 SP2-951-2
11.8
10.3
8.9
7.5
6.1
4.7
3.3
1.9
0.9
1.1
2.1
3.5
4.9
6.3
7.7
9.1
10.5
SM
10.4
9.0
7.6
6.2
4.8
3.4
2.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
3.4
4.8
6.2
7.6
9.0
10.4
11.8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Table 1
3-17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
Feed direction
B156R240.WMF
[A]
B156R242.WMF
B156/B220
3-18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
WARNING
Do not touch any edges of the polygon mirror, spring, or bracket. These
edges can cause serious injury.
1. Development units x 4 (
3.5), LD cover
(
3.4.2)
2. Cover [A] ( x 1)
NOTE: Before removing the cover, clean
the cover to prevent toner from
entering into the unit.
B156R243.WMF
[C]
[B]
SM
3-19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
WARNING
Turn off the main switch before you start the procedures in this section.
1. Open the left cover [A] ( x 2)
2. ID chip connector [B]
3. Lift up the development unit [C],
and pull it out of the machine.
[B]
[C]
[A]
B156R234.WMF
7. Turn on the main switch and start SP3-929 (Development Unit Replace).
1) Select the colors for the development units that you replaced.
2) Select 1.execute for the colors that you selected. Then, push OK.
3) Repeat 1) and 2) until all the colors of the replaced development units
are selected.
4) Go out from the SP mode.
Then, open and close the
front cover. The machine
does the development unit
set-up procedure.
NOTE: A white line or band may
appear on one end of the
paper if a development unit
is incorrectly installed. To
correct this, pull out the
development unit partially
(about 30 mm) [D] and
slowly reinstall it.
B156/B220
[D]
30mm
B156R246.WMF
3-20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
Replacement
and
Adjustment
NOTE: 1) Before replacing any of the parts or consumables in this section, cover
the floor with cloth or some sheets of paper.
2) Never tilt the unit. The toner may come out of the unit.
3) When handling the unit, grasp the brown (front) and metal (top) grips.
Never touch the OPC (left) or transfer (right) belts.
4) After removing the photoconductor unit, cover it with a light-proof sheet.
Keep it in a dark place.
[B]
[A]
B156R247.WMF
SM
3-21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
6. Before you install the new PCU, remove the cap [C].
[C]
Install the new PCU carefully. If you install it too quickly, this will cause damage to
the quenching lamp support.
Deformed
B156/B220
3-22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
Replacement
and
Adjustment
If you removed or installed the left inner cover, make sure that the projections
shown here are below the cover (they must not be seen).
SM
3-23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
[A]
B156R248.WMF
B156R249.WMF
Toner Disposal
1) Remove the cap [C].
2) Dispose of the toner according to local regulations.
[C]
O/B waste
toner bottle
B156R250.WMF
B156/B220
3-24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
[B]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
[C]
B156R251.WMF
[F]
[E]
4. Grid [E]
5. Rear bracket [F]
[D]
B156R252.WMF
[H]
[J]
[G]
[I]
B156R253.WMF
SM
3-25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
When you remove the charge corona unit, keep the unit level while you pull it out
carefully. Do not lower or turn the unit.
B156/B220
3-26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
[A]
B156R254.WMF
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
B156R255.WMF
[B]
2. Bracket [A] ( x 3)
3. Image transfer belt cleaning unit [B]
(spring x 2)
B156R919.WMF
SM
3-27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT
[B]
B156R256.WMF
[A]
[B]
[A]
B156R403.WMF
B156R404.WMF
B156/B220
3-28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
NOTE: 1) After removing the fusing unit, see if oil had dripped from the exit of the
oil pipe.
2) Do not turn the main power on with the fusing unit out of the machine if
an oil end condition exists. This will clear the oil end counter, and the
machine will incorrectly detect oil.
[B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
[A]
B156R257.WMF
[D]
3-29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156R258.WMF
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
[A]
[C]
2. Springs [B] x 2
3. Cleaning roller assembly [C]
( x 1, Shoulder screw x 1)
4. Stay [D] ( x 1)
5. Slide the pad [E] and pull it out.
NOTE: If you cannot put the springs in the
places, remove the cleaning roller
(
3.8.4).
[D]
[E]
[B]
B156R259.WMF
[A]
B156R260.WMF
B156/B220
3-30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
[A]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[D]
[B]
[C]
B156R261.WMF
SM
3-31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
[B]
[A]
B156R262.WMF
[D]
[C]
[F]
B156R263.WMF
Make sure that you install the lamp in the correct orientation. The beveled terminals
[E] must be at the front of the machine as
shown, and the square terminals [F]
must be at the rear. If not, paper
creasing and/or unsatisfactory fusing can
occur.
[E]
B156/B220
3-32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156R264.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
[B]
B156R265.WMF
B156R266.WMF
SM
3-33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
[F]
[C]
[B]
[D]
4. Gear [A]
[E]
NOTE: Remove the gear before
removing the stripper pawl
assembly; otherwise, the
gear may be damaged.
[A]
Reassembling
1. Put the spring [D] on the pawl.
2. Put the left end of the pawl in the square opening [E].
3. Put the front and rear ends of the pawl in the holder [F].
4. Confirm that the pawl moves correctly.
[C]
[B]
[D]
[A]
B156/B220
3-34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156R268.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
[A]
[G]
[C]
[F]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[E]
[D]
[B]
B156R269.WMF
SM
3-35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
[C]
[B]
[A]
B156R270.WMF
B156/B220
3-36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
B156R271.WMF
[D]
[F]
[G]
[B]
[L]
[K]
[J]
[I]
[E]
[H]
B156R825.WMF
SM
3-37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[C]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
B156R051.WMF
1. Right cover
2. Pull the PCU out of the machine. (
3.6.1)
3. Fusing entrance sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
4. Fusing entrance sensor [B] ( x 1)
5. Transfer belt sensor bracket [C] ( x 1, x 1)
6. Transfer belt sensor [D]
B156/B220
3-38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
CAUTION
Turn off the main switch and wait until the paper exit unit cools down
before beginning any of the procedures in this section. The paper exit unit
can cause serious burns.
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
[A]
B156R272.WMF
[C]
[E]
B156R273.WMF
SM
3-39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
[B]
[A]
B156R274.WMF
[E]
[C]
[D]
B156R275.WMF
B156/B220
3-40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
B156R276.WMF
[B]
[C]
B156R277.WMF
SM
3-41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT
[A]
B156R278.WMF
[D]
[B]
[E]
B156R279.WMF
B156/B220
3-42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
B156R604.WMF
[B]
[C]
B156R605.WMF
SM
3-43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT
[C]
[B]
[A]
B156R606.WMF
[D]
B156R280.WMF
[E]
[F]
B156R281.WMF
B156/B220
3-44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT
B156R282.WMF
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
B156R283.WMF
SM
3-45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[B]
[C]
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT
[B]
[C]
[A]
B156R612.WMF
[D]
B156R284.WMF
[F]
[E]
B156R285.WMF
B156/B220
3-46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT
[A]
[B]
B156R286.WMF
[A]
[B]
SM
3-47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156R287.WMF
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[C]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
[A]
[B]
B156R605.WMF
[E]
[D]
[C]
B156/B220
3-48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156R801.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
[A]
[C]
[B]
B156R924.WMF
[B]
[B]
[C]
B156R817.WMF
SM
3-49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
3.10.3 HDD
[A]
[B]
B156R823.WMF
[D]
[E]
B156R891.WMF
[C]
B156/B220
3-50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
B156R288.WMF
[B]
B156R824.WMF
SM
3-51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
[B]
[A]
[E]
7. Bracket [F] ( x 2)
[F]
[D]
[C]
B156R814.WMF
[G]
B156R815.WMF
B156/B220
3-52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNITS
[B]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
B156R803.WMF
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
B156R804.WMF
SM
3-53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNITS
[A]
[B]
B156R805.WMF
[A]
2. Flywheel [A] ( x 3)
3. Main motor [B] ( x 1, x 3)
[B]
B156/B220
3-54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156R806.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNITS
[C]
[A]
[A]
B156R289.WMF
SM
3-55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNITS
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
B156R810.WMF
B156/B220
3-56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNITS
[A]
2. Flywheel (
3.10.5)
3. Duct [A] with bracket [B]
( x 1, x 1)
4. Pull out the lower tray.
5. Connector bracket (
3.11.6)
6. Paper feed clutch assembly [C]
( x 1, x 3)
[C]
B156R812.WMF
[B]
SM
3-57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156R290.WMF
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNITS
[C]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[B]
B156R822.WMF
1. Move the controller box, on it hinge, away from the machine (
3.10.1)
2. Pipes [A, B]
NOTE: 1) Keep a piece of waste cloth at hand. Oil may drip from the pipe.
2) When reinstalling the pump, make sure to attach the upper tube
correctly to the oil exit [C]. If not, oil may leak inside the machine.
3. I/O board cover (
3.10.1)
4. Oil pump bracket [D] ( x 3, x 1)
5. Oil pump [E] ( x 2)
Install the correct way up. There are two tabs at the top of the pump.
B156/B220
3-58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY ADJUSTMENT
1. Check the leading edge registration for each paper feed station, and adjust
them using SP1-001.
2. Check the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station, and adjust them
using SP1-002.
Tray
Any paper tray
By-pass feed
Duplex
1st paper tray
2nd paper tray
3rd paper tray (optional
paper tray 1), or LCT
4th paper tray (optional
paper tray 2)
By-pass feed
Duplex, side 2
SP mode
SP1-001-1
SP1-001-9
SP1-001-12
SP1-002-2
SP1-002-3
Specification
SP1-002-4
2 1.5 mm
3 2 mm
B
A
SP1-002-5
SP1-002-1
SP1-002-6
B156R291.WMF
SM
3-59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY ADJUSTMENT
Blank Margin
NOTE: If the leading edge/side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted within the
specifications, adjust the leading/back side edge trim margin.
1. Check the trailing edge and front side edge blank margins, and adjust them
using the following SP modes.
SP mode
SP2-101-4
SP2-101-1
SP2-101-3
SP2-101-2
Trailing edge
Front edge
Leading edge
Back edge
Specification
3 2 mm
2 +2.5/-1.5 mm
3 2 mm
2 1.5 mm
A
B
B156R292.WMF
B156/B220
3-60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY ADJUSTMENT
3.12.2 SCANNING
Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing
registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment.
NOTE: Use a C4 test chart to perform the following adjustments.
A
A: Sub-scan magnification
B156R293.WMF
SP mode
SP4-010
SP4-011
B156R294.WMF
SM
3-61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY ADJUSTMENT
B156/B220
3-62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY ADJUSTMENT
B
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A: Sub-registration
B: Main registration
B156R295.WMF
B156R294.WMF
SM
What It Does
Main Scan Registration
Sub-Scan Registration (Simplex)
Main Scan Registration (Duplex)
3-63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Adjustment Range
10 mm
10 mm
10 mm
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY ADJUSTMENT
1
3
2
B156R297.WMF
When making a copy using the ADF and the image is skewed, do the following to
fix the skewed image.
NOTE: Before doing the following steps, make sure to confirm whether or not the
copy images made in platen mode and test patterns are not skewed.
1. Peel off the black tape on the right hinge of the ADF.
2. Loosen the screw that secures the left hinge.
3. Change the position of the screw that secures the right hinge to the long hole.
NOTE: Do not tighten the screw at this moment.
4. Move the right hinge position to correct the skewed image.
5. Tighten both screws and check the copy image.
6. If it is not fixed, repeat steps 2 to 5.
B156/B220
3-64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Replacement
and
Adjustment
SM
3-65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Copy Mode
KCMY Color Balance Adjustment
Adjust only the Offset values.
NOTE: Never change the Option values (default values are 0).
Highlight (Low ID)
Middle (Middle ID)
Shadow (High ID)
ID max
Offset
B502R500.WMF
B156/B220
3-66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment Procedure
1. Copy the C-4 chart in mode that you are going to adjust.
2. Enter the SP mode.
3. Select Copy SP.
4. Enter SP4-918 and select the screen that you are going to adjust.
5. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard (
the
tables below).
Item to Adjust
ID max:
(K, C, M, and Y)
SM
Adjustment Standard
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 10 matches
that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 6 matches
that of level 6 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 8 matches
that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
dirty background is not visible on
the copy and the density of level
3 is slightly lighter that of level 3
on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
the color balance of black scale
levels 3 through 5 in the copy is
seen as gray (no C, M, or Y
should be visible). If the black
scale contains C, M, or Y, redo
step 1 to 4.
3-67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Item to Adjust
ID max:
(K)
Adjustment Standard
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 10 matches
that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 6 matches
that of level 6 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 8 matches
that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
dirty background is not visible on
the copy and the density of level
3 is slightly lighter that of level 3
on the C-4 chart.
Item to Adjust
ID max:
(K, C, M, and Y)
B156/B220
Adjustment Standard
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 10 matches
that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 6 matches
that of level 6 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 8 matches
that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
dirty background is not visible on
the copy and the density of level
3 is slightly lighter that of level 3
on the C-4 chart.
3-68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Step
1
Item to Adjust
ID max:
(K)
Adjustment Standard
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 10 matches
that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 6 matches
that of level 6 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 8 matches
that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
dirty background is not visible on
the copy and the density of level
3 is slightly lighter that of level 3
on the C-4 chart.
NOTE: After adjusting shadow as explained above, text parts of the test pattern
may not be printed clearly. If this happens, check whether the 5 line/mm
pattern at each corner is printed clearly. If it is not, adjust the offset value of
shadow again until it is.
SM
3-69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Printer Mode
There are five adjustable modes selected by printer SP1-102:
1800 x 1200 photo mode
1800 x 600 text mode
1800 x 600 graph mode
600 x 600 photo mode
600 x 600 text mode
Highlight
Shadow
Middle
IDmax
K
SP1-104-1
SP1-104-2
SP1-104-3
SP1-104-4
C
SP1-104-21
SP1-104-22
SP1-104-23
SP1-104-24
M
SP1-104-41
SP1-104-42
SP1-104-43
SP1-104-44
Y
SP1-104-61
SP1-104-62
SP1-104-63
SP1-104-64
Adjustment Procedure
1. Do ACC for the printer mode.
2. Turn the main power off and on.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select Printer SP.
5. Select SP1-102 and select the print mode that you are going to adjust.
6. To review the image quality for these settings, choose SP1-103-1 to print out a
tone control test sheet.
7. Adjust the color density with SP1-104 as shown below comparing the tone
control test sheet with the C4 test chart.
NOTE: Adjust the density in order from ID Max, Shadow, Middle, and then
Highlight.
8. Save the adjusted settings with SP1-105.
B156/B220
3-70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COLOR ADJUSTMENT
C4 test chart
Text
Photo/Graph
1
-
2
1
1
3
2
2
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
9
9
7
12
11
8
13
13
9
16
16
10
-
C4 test chart
10
Text
10
Photo/Graph
11
9
12/
13
12
14
C4 test chart
Test Text
sheet Photo/Graph
1
-
2
1
1
3
2
2
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
7
9
7
10
11
8
12
13
9
16
16
10
-
10
Text
10
16
Photo/Graph
10
7
12/
13
13
16
Test
sheet
Test
sheet
C4 test chart
Y
SM
Test
sheet
3-71
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
15
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
Normally, it is not necessary to adjust the gamma data as shown in the table since
ACC adjusts the gamma curve automatically. The fine-tuning of color balance by
gamma data adjustment will be required only when the result from ACC and Color
Calibration does not meet the customers requirements.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER WHITE LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
3-72
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER WHITE LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
255
254
253
252
251
250
249
248
247
:
:
237
236
235
234
233
232
231
230
229
228
227
226
225
224
223
222
221
220
219
218
217
216
215
SP4-885-001
(Reference
Adjustment: R)
+17
+15
+14
+13
+12
+10
+9
+8
SP4-886-001
(Reference
Adjustment: G)
+13
+12
+11
+10
+9
+8
+7
+6
SP4-887-001
(Reference
Adjustment: B)
+17
+16
+15
+13
+12
+11
+9
+8
No adjustment is
required.
-8
-10
-11
-13
-14
-15
-17
-18
-20
-21
-23
-24
-26
-28
-29
-31
-32
-34
-35
-37
-39
-40
-6
-7
-8
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
-16
-17
-19
-20
-21
-22
-23
-24
-26
-27
-28
-29
-30
-8
-10
-11
-13
-14
-16
-17
-19
-20
-22
-23
-25
-27
-28
-30
-31
-33
-35
-36
-38
-40
-41
Decrease the
values in SP4885-1, 886-1,
and 887-1.
Necessary
adjustment
Increase the
values in SP4885-1, 886-1,
and 887-1.
Example 1: When the value in SP4-902-2 is 255, add 17 to the value in SP4-885001, 13 to the value in SP4-886-001, and 17 to the value in SP4-887001.
Example 2: When the value in SP4-902-2 is 247, do not change any values in
SP4-885-001, SP4-886-001, and SP4-887-001.
Example 3: When the value in SP4-902-2 is 236, subtract 8 from the value in
SP4-885-001, 6 from the value in SP4-886-001, and 8 from the value
in SP4-887-001.
SM
3-73
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Replacement
and
Adjustment
SP4-902-2
(G_DATA1)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER WHITE LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
SP4-885-001
(Reference
Adjustment: R)
+23
+22
+21
+20
+19
+17
+16
+15
+13
+12
+11
+10
+8
SP4-886-001
(Reference
Adjustment: G)
+18
+17
+16
+15
+14
+13
+12
+11
+10
+9
+8
+7
+6
SP4-887-001
(Reference
Adjustment: B)
+23
+21
+20
+19
+18
+17
+15
+14
+13
+12
+11
+9
+8
No adjustment is
required.
-9
-10
-12
-13
-15
-16
-18
-19
-21
-22
-24
-25
-27
-29
-30
-32
-34
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-16
-17
-18
-19
-20
-22
-23
-24
-25
-8
-10
-11
-13
-14
-16
-17
-19
-20
-22
-23
-25
-26
-28
-30
-31
-33
Decrease the
values in SP4885-1, 886-1,
and 887-1.
Remarks
Increase the
values in SP4885-1, 886-1,
and 887-1.
Example 1: When the value in SP4-902-2 is 255, add 23 to the value in SP4-885001, 18 to the value in SP4-886-001, and 23 to the value in SP4-887001.
Example 2: When the value in SP4-902-2 is 242, do not change any values in
SP4-885-001, SP4-886-001, and SP4-887-001.
Example 3: When the value in SP4-902-2 is 231, subtract 9 from the value in
SP4-885-001, 7 from the value in SP4-886-001, and 8 from the value
in SP4-887-001.
B156/B220
3-74
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1. Press , press , and then press 5 times to open the SelfDiagnostics menu.
B156R298.WMF
B156R299.WMF
SM
3-75
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CHECKING THE BREAKER SWITCH
CAUTION
Before you test the breaker, always make sure that the main power switch
is off. Do not try to test the breaker switch with the copier power turned on.
[B]
IMPORTANT
If the breaker switch does not move to the center position:
Make sure that the power cord of the copier is securely connected to the
power supply.
Push the test button again. If the breaker switch does not move to the center
position, replace the breaker switch.
5. Check that the breaker switch is turned off and the mark on the switch is
shown.
6. Turn the breaker switch to the left position first. Then turn it to the On position
(right position).
B156/B220
3-76
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TROUBLESHOOTING
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 SERVICE CALL
4.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
Definition
Fusing unit SCs displayed on the operation
panel. The machine is disabled. The user
cannot reset the SC.
Reset Procedure
Turn the main power switch off
then on before entering SP mode.
Reset the SC (push "EXECUTE"
with SP5-810), then turn the main
switch off then on again.
Turn the main power switch off
and on.
Logging only
Turn the main power switch off
and on.
4-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Troubleshooting
Level
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
4.1.2 SC TABLE
No.
Definition
101
D
120
121
142
144
B156/B220
Symptom
Possible Cause
4-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
195
199
201
220
221
230
231
SM
Symptom
Possible Cause
IPU error
The self-diagnostic error for the IPU
occurs immediately after the main
power is turned on.
NVRAM defective
BICU replaced without original NVRAM
Troubleshooting
No.
Definition
161
D
FGATE on error
A transfer belt mark is detected.
No FGATE on signal is detected
within 1 second.
Defective BICU
Defective BICU
4-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
241
D
280
282
300
302
305
350
B156/B220
Symptom
Possible Cause
LD error
An LD error continues for 0.5
seconds. (After an LD error is
detected, an LD error release is
written to the GAVD chip during
monitoring.)
Image transfer belt mark detection error
An imaging process starts. No
belt mark for the first color is
detected within 5 seconds.
A color imaging process starts.
A belt mark other than the one for
the first color is not detected within
8 seconds after a former belt mark
has been detected.
GAVD communication error
Data is transferred. The status
register in the BICU does not get to
the ready condition within 10
milliseconds.
Charge corona unit electrical leak
The supply to the charge corona unit
is continuously output, and the unit is
operating at the minimum PWM duty
value. 1 Volt (or more) returns for
300 milliseconds.
Charge grid electrical leak
The returning voltage N from the OPC
unit is detected for 60 ms.
N 1/2 output value
Defective LD unit
Defective BICU
Poor electrical connection between
sensor and BICU
Defective BICU
4-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
353
401
Symptom
Possible Cause
seconds.
2) Motor 1 does not detect the
lock signal for 0.3 seconds
after it detected a 0.3-second
lock signal before.
The development motor starts
3) Motor 1 does not detect a 1second lock signal within 3
seconds.
4) Motor 1 does not detect the
lock signal for 0.3 seconds
after it detected a 1-second
lock signal before.
Development motor 2 error
Development motor 2 changes its
seconds.
4) Motor 2 does not detect the
lock signal for 0.3 seconds
after it detected a 0.3-second
lock signal before.
The development motor starts
5) Motor 2 does not detect a 1second lock signal within 3
seconds.
6) Motor 2 does not detect the
lock signal for 0.3 seconds
after it detected a 1-second
lock signal before.
1st transfer (image transfer) circuit open
The returning voltage N from the
ms.
410
411
SM
4-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Troubleshooting
No.
Definition
352
D
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
412
D
420
421
430
440
460
461
480
Symptom
Possible Cause
B156/B220
4-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
503
504
515
520
521
SM
Symptom
Possible Cause
No.
Definition
481
D
4-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
530
D
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
551
B156/B220
Symptom
Possible Cause
10 seconds.
Fusing warm-up timeout (heating roller)
The main switch is turned on or a
Defective thermistor
Thermistor loose connection
Defective connector
Defective lamp (loose connection,
thermostat failure, PSU, thermostat)
Incorrect detection (loose thermistor
connection, fusing - drawer loose
connection)
Short circuit
Defective BICU board
Defective PSU
Short circuit
Defective BICU board
Defective PSU
4-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
553
554
555
556
557
570
571
572
SM
Symptom
Possible Cause
4-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Troubleshooting
No.
Definition
552
A
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
620
D
630
632
633
634
635
Symptom
Possible Cause
Loose connection
Defective ADF
Defective BICU board
Defective scanner I/O board
External noise
640
641
670
B156/B220
Defective BICU
Defective controller board
4-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
685
687
720
722
724
725
SM
Symptom
Possible Cause
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Troubleshooting
No.
Definition
672
D
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
726
D
Symptom
Possible Cause
727
728
730
731
B156/B220
4-12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
740
750
770
791
792
793
800
SM
Symptom
Possible Cause
Defective connector
Defective cable
Defective connector
Defective cable
Incorrect installation
Incorrect installation
Defective connector
Defective cable
4-13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Troubleshooting
No.
Definition
732
D
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
801
B
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
818
B156/B220
Symptom
Possible Cause
4-14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
820
821
822
823
824
826
827
828
829
835
836
SM
Symptom
Possible Cause
HDD error
Software application error
RAM shortage
HDD defective
HDD connector defective
Defective controller board
Network interface board defective
Defective controller board
NVRAM damaged or abnormal
Backup battery has discharged
NVRAM socket damaged
4-15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Troubleshooting
No.
Definition
819
B
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
837
B
838
850
851
853
854
855
856
860
861
B156/B220
Symptom
Possible Cause
Defective card
4-16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
Rev. 04/2006
863
864
865
870
872
B
B
B
D
Symptom
Possible Cause
SM
Data corruption
Defective hard disk
No.
Definition
862
D
Data corruption
Defective hard disk
Defective controller software
4-17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
873
B
Rev. 05/2006
Symptom
Possible Cause
874
875
880
900
901
902
B
B
B156/B220
MLB defective
Defective NVRAM
Defective connection
Defective counter
Defective connection
Defective counter
4-18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
Rev. 05/2006
No.
Definition
925
D
Symptom
Possible Cause
NOTE 1: The HDD can be damaged easily if the main switch is turned OFF during data
processing. Do not turn OFF the main power switch immediately after turning it ON.
Doing so may result in damage to the hard disk or memory, leading to malfunction.
Do not turn OFF the main power switch when the ON indicator is lit or blinking. Doing
so may result in damage to the hard disk or memory.
No.
Definition
990
B
991
SM
Symptom
Possible Cause
Software defective
Internal parameter incorrect
Insufficient working memory
Turn the main power off and on.
4-19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Troubleshooting
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
995
D
997
998
999
B156/B220
Rev. 05/2006
Symptom
Possible Cause
4-20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Rev. 05/2006
4.2
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
4.2.1 OVERVIEW
There are three types of self-diagnostics for the controller.
Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics
just after the power has been turned on.
Detailed self-diagnostics: The machine does the detailed self-diagnostics by
using a loop-back connector (P/N G0219350)
SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on or
during operation.
The following shows the workflow of the power-on and detailed self-diagnostics.
Power ON
NG
Not initialized
CPU Check
NG
SC820
ASIC Check
NG
SC821
Standard RAM
Conection Check
NG
SC827
Optional RAM
Connection Check
NG
SC829
Standard NVRAM
Check
SC838
NG
SC824
NG
Power-on or
Detailed
Detailed
NG
SC828
NG
SC829
NG
Not use optional RAM
Error Logged
Standard NVRAM
Detailed Check
NG
Error Logged
Power-on
Optional NVRAM
Detailed Check
NG
Error Logged
NG
Error Logged
NG
SC826
NG
NG
Error Logged
Error Logged
NG
IEEE1284 Loop-back
Check
Error Logged
NG
NG
Error Logged
Error Logged
SC826
NG
Troubleshooting
END
NG
Error Logged
Interrupt Check
NG
Error Logged
NG
Error Logged
A
B156T501.WMF
SM
4-21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE TEST MODE
4.2.2
Rev. 05/2006
DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS
B156/B220
4-22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
ID sensor
Image transfer
belt mark
sensor
O/B waste
toner bottle full
sensor
Oil end sensor
Oil overflow
sensor
Original length
sensor 1
Original length
sensor 2
Original width
sensor
Paper end
sensor 1
Paper end
sensor 2
Paper exit
sensor
Paper feed
sensor 1
CN
Condition
324
(I/O board)
Open
Shorted
Open
260
(BICU)
Shorted
Open
307
(I/O board)
Shorted
Open
307
(I/O board)
Shorted
Open
261
(BICU)
Shorted
261
(BICU)
Open
Shorted
Open
632
(SBU)
Shorted
Open
632
(SBU)
Shorted
Open
632
(SBU)
Shorted
Open
406 (High
voltage
supply)
Shorted
Open
308
(I/O board)
Shorted
Open
Shorted
324
(I/O board)
Open
406
(High voltage
supply)
SM
Shorted
Symptom
A paper jam is detected when paper is fed; and
the paper jam is cleared when the paper is
removed
A paper jam is detected when paper is not fed.
No immediate symptom is seen. (
NOTE)
The machine does not respond.
No immediate symptom is seen. (
NOTE)
SC481 is displayed.
SC481 is displayed.
Bottle full is not detected when the bottle is full.
No symptom is seen.
No immediate symptom is seen.
The oil pump turns on to pump oil up when there
is enough oil.
SC571 is displayed.
SC571 is displayed.
The original size is not correctly detected. Output
images are blurred.
The original size is not correctly detected. Output
images are blurred.
The original size is not correctly detected. Output
images are blurred.
The original size is not correctly detected. Output
images are blurred.
The original size is not correctly detected. Output
images are blurred.
The original size is not correctly detected. Output
images are blurred.
Paper end is not detected when the tray is
empty.
Paper end is detected when the tray is not
empty.
Paper end is not detected when the tray is
empty.
Paper end is detected when the tray is not
empty.
A paper jam is detected when paper is fed.
A paper jam is detected when no paper is fed.
A paper jam is detected when paper is fed; and
the paper jam is not cleared when the paper is
removed.
A paper jam is detected when paper is fed; and
the paper jam is not cleared when the paper is
removed. Or, a paper jam is detected before
paper is fed.
4-23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Troubleshooting
Component
(Symbol)
Fusing exit
sensor
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
Component
(Symbol)
Paper feed
sensor 2
CN
Condition
Open
340
(I/O board)
Shorted
Paper near-end
406
sensor 1
(High voltage
supply)
Paper near-end
sensor 2
308
(I/O board)
Paper overflow
sensor
Platen cover
sensor
Open
Shorted
Shorted
219
(Scanner I/O
board)
Open
Shorted
Open
405
(High voltage
supply)
Synchronization
detector
Shorted
Open
324
(I/O board)
Registration
sensor
Scanner HP
sensor
Open
240
(SBU)
503
(LDB)
307
(I/O board)
259
(BICU)
307
(I/O board)
307
(I/O board)
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Symptom
A paper jam is detected when paper is fed; and
the paper jam is not cleared when the paper is
removed.
A paper jam is detected when paper is fed; and
the paper jam is not cleared when the paper is
removed. Or, a paper jam is detected before
paper is fed.
Paper near end is detected when the tray is full.
Paper full is detected when the tray is almost
emptily.
Paper end is detected when the tray is not
empty.
Paper full is detected when the tray is almost
empty.
Paper near-end is detected when the tray is
full.
Paper overflow is not detected when the paper
exit tray is full.
Paper overflow is detected when the paper exit
tray is not full.
The original size is not correctly detected.
No symptom
A paper jam is detected when paper is fed; and
the paper jam is not cleared when the paper is
removed.
A paper jam is detected when paper is fed;
and the paper jam is not cleared when the
paper is removed.
A paper jam is detected before paper is fed.
SC120 is displayed.
The scanner motor tries to operate for about 40
seconds before SC122 is displayed.
SC220 is displayed.
The machine does not respond.
SC220 is displayed.
Bottle full is not detected when the bottle is full.
Bottle full is detected when the bottle is not full.
SC460 is displayed.
SC460 is displayed.
A paper jam is not detected when paper is fed.
A paper jam is detected when paper is not fed.
A paper jam is not detected when paper is fed.
A paper jam is detected when paper is not fed.
NOTE: An SC condition occurs only when a new PCU is being installed in the
machine. During copying, if the ID sensor fails, the image density will be
changed.
B156/B220
4-24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
4.4.2 SWITCHES
O/B waste
toner bottle
switch
Tray set/paper
size switch (tray
1)
Tray set/paper
size switch (tray
2)
Right cover
switch
T/B waste toner
bottle switch
CN
Condition
324
(I/O board)
324
(I/O board)
312
(I/O board)
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
307
(I/O board)
Shorted
Open
308
(I/O board)
Shorted
Open
308
(I/O board)
324
(I/O board)
307
(I/O board)
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Symptom
The user is prompted to close the exit cover.
No symptom is seen.
The user is prompted to close the front cover.
No symptom is seen.
The user is prompted to close the front cover.
No symptom is seen.
The bottle is not detected when it is installed.
The bottle is detected when it is not installed.
The tray is not detected when it is installed.
The paper tray is detected when it is not
installed.
The paper size is incorrectly detected (a paper
jam may occur).
The tray is not detected when it is installed.
The paper tray is detected when it is not
installed.
The paper size is incorrectly detected (a paper
jam may occur).
The user is prompted to close the right cover.
No symptom
The bottle is not detected when it is installed.
Bottle full is detected when the bottle is not
installed.
No response
FU2
10A/250V
5A/250V No response
The machine starts initialization (the sound is
FU8
5A/250V
5A/250V heard), but nothing appears on the operation
panel.
The machine starts program loading, and
optional units (PFU, LCT, Interchange, ByFU9
5A/250V
5A/250V
pass, Duplex, bridge, shift tray and key
counter) are disabled.
The machine starts program loading, and
FU12
5A/250V
5A/250V "Functional Problems" appears on the
operation panel with the "SC547".
Fuse
SM
4-25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Troubleshooting
Component
(Symbol)
Exit cover
switch
Front cover
switch
Interlock switch
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CHECK POINTS FOR IMAGE PROBLEMS AT REGULAR INTERVALS
Paper feed
B156T502.WMF
B156/B220
4-26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SKEWED, TRAPEZOID, AND PARALELLOGRAM IMAGES
Feed direction
Parallel
Troubleshooting
Parallel
Paper
Image Area
Feed direction
Parallel
Paper
SM
Image Area
4-27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SKEWED, TRAPEZOID, AND PARALELLOGRAM IMAGES
each other, however here, the leading and trailing edges are both slanted with
respect to the papers edge.
Feed direction
Parallel
Parallel
Parallelogram may
also appear in the
opposite orientation.
Paper
B156/B220
Image Area
4-28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SKEWED, TRAPEZOID, AND PARALELLOGRAM IMAGES
Skewed
SM
See Action 2
(Parallelogram Image
Adjustment)
4-29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Troubleshooting
Parallelogram
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SKEWED, TRAPEZOID, AND PARALELLOGRAM IMAGES
No
Yes
Action 1
(Skewed)
Yes
Do the above
still occur?
No
No
OK
Action 2
(Parallelgram)
No
Yes
Yes
Action 3
(Parallelogram)
Action 4/5
(Original skew)
B156T505.WMF
B156/B220
4-30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SKEWED, TRAPEZOID, AND PARALELLOGRAM IMAGES
Action
Action 1 (skewed image of trimming pattern)
Image skew when feeding from mainframe Trays 1 and 2 because the operator
does not set the side fence flush against the paper stack.
Troubleshooting
1. Advise customers that the side fence should be set flush against the loaded
paper stack, or in cases where the customer gives approval, secure the side
fences in places [A] with two screws. Two screws [B] are located on the tray 1
and 2 as shown below.
[B]
[A]
B156T602.JPG
B156T601.JPG
NOTE: The level of skew will increase twofold if there is a 1mm gap between the
paper and side fence.
2. As a supplement, the level of skew can be further minimized by increasing the
paper buckle in SP1-003. Try adjusting this value several times while checking
the level of skew on the printouts, keeping in mind that a higher value tends to
cause Z-folds and a lower value tends to cause paper jams.
SM
4-31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SKEWED, TRAPEZOID, AND PARALELLOGRAM IMAGES
[A]
B156R221.WMF
[B]
0.6mm
Paper feed
(A3 SEF)
B156R239.WMF
B156/B220
4-32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SKEWED, TRAPEZOID, AND PARALELLOGRAM IMAGES
1. Remove the rear cover, scanner left cover, and upper left cover.
2. Mark the position of the left scanner reinforcement plate by drawing a line
along the lower edge (see photograph below).
3. While holding the scanner unit in place, loosen the 6 screws of the left scanner
reinforcement plate.
Note: The scanner must be held in place, as it will tend to sink due to its own
weight.
4. Raise or lower the scanner with respect to the reference line, then tighten the
screws.
Troubleshooting
Mark the
line
SM
4-33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SKEWED, TRAPEZOID, AND PARALELLOGRAM IMAGES
DF (top)
DF (bottom)
297x30mm
297x30mm
B156/B220
4-34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SKEWED, TRAPEZOID, AND PARALELLOGRAM IMAGES
Action 5-1 Adjusting the original skew with equal front/rear pulling loads
Troubleshooting
B156T011.WMF
1. Peel off the black tape on the right hinge of the ADF.
2. Loosen the screw that secures the left hinge.
3. Change the position of the screw that secures the right hinge to the long hole.
NOTE: Do not tighten the screw at this moment.
4. Adjust the right hinge position to correct the skewed image.
NOTE: Shifting the hinge to the rear will slant the image to the right (and viceversa).
5. Tighten both screws and check the copy image.
6. If it is not fixed, repeat steps 2 to 5.
SM
4-35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SKEWED, TRAPEZOID, AND PARALELLOGRAM IMAGES
Action 5-2 Adjusting the original skew when the rear pulling load is larger
Raise the left side of the ADF by adding washers as shown below.
[C]
[A]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[B, C]
M03070202.WMF
M03070201.WMF
B156/B220
4-36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE TABLES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
CAUTION
Do not turn off the main power switch while the power LED (
) lights or
flashes. Doing so may severely damage the hard disk or the memory of the
copier. Before turning off the main power switch, press the operation
power switch, and wait for the power LED to go out.
NOTE: The main power LED lights or flashes when:
1) the platen cover or ARDF is open
2) the hard disk or memory is accessed
3) the copier is communicating with another device
3. Press the clear/stop key and hold it down until the screen
Copy SP
Service
Tables
SM
Exit
Exit
5-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
10
B156S001.WMF
B156/B220
5-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
3. Type the necessary values at the numeric key pad. The value in the input box
is overwritten.
Input box
B156S002.WMF
SM
5-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B156/B220
5-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SP1-XXX: (Feed)
001*
002*
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Lead Edge
1
Tray 1: Plain
2
Tray 1: Thick
3
Tray 1: OHP
4
Tray 2: Plain
5
Tray 2: Thick
6
Tray 2: OHP
7
Tray 3
8
Tray 4
9
By-pass: Plain
10 By-pass: Thick
11 By-pass: OHP
12 Duplex
Side-to-Side
1
By-pass
2
Tray 1
3
Tray 2
4
Tray 3
5
Tray 4
6
Duplex
Function / [ Setting ]
Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the
registration clutch operation timing for each mode.
[9.0 ~ 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
The user mode cannot adjust the settings for thick paper
or OHP sheets.
NOTE: When adjusting SP1-001-2 or 3, check SP1-0011 first. SP1-001-2 and 3 adjust the differences
between the leading edge registration positions
for the following paper types:
1: Plain paper and thick paper
2: Plain paper and OHP
In the same manner, when adjusting SP1-001-5
or 6, check SP1-001-4 first; and when adjusting
SP1-001-10 or 11, check SP1-001-9 first.
5-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
1
003*
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Paper Buckle
1
Tray: Plain
2
3
4
105*
Tray: Thick
Tray: OHP
Tray: Small Size
5
By-pass: Plain
6
By-pass: Thick
7
By-pass: OHP
8
Duplex
Fusing Temperature
1
Heating: Idling
Heating: Ready
Heating: Standby
Heating: Plain/Full
Color
Heating: Middle
Thick/1 Color
Heating: Middle
Thick/Full Color
Heating: Thick/Full
Color
10
B156/B220
Function / [ Setting ]
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration
roller by changing the paper feed timing.
[4 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
[4 ~ 6 / 2 / 1 mm/step]
[4 ~ 6 / 2 / 1 mm/step]
[4 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Small Size includes LT long edge feed and smaller.
[4 ~ 6 / 3 / 1 mm/step]
[4 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
[4 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
[4 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Sets the temperature at which the heating roller starts
idling.
[100 ~ 180 / 145 / 1C/step]
Sets the temperature at which the heating roller enters
the print ready condition.
[100 ~ 180 / 155 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for the ready
(standby) condition. After the main switch has been
turned on, the machine enters this condition when the
heating roller temperature reaches the temperature
specified in this SP mode. When the machine is
recovering from energy saver or auto off mode, the
machine becomes ready when both heat and pressure
roller temperatures reach the specified temperature.
Pressure roller: SP1-105-16
[100 ~ 180 / 160 / 1C/step ]
Sets the heating roller temperature for thin paper in
single-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 155 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for thin paper in fullcolor mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 160 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for normal plain
paper in single-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 165 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for normal plain
paper in full-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 170 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for thick paper in
single-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 165 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for thick paper in fullcolor mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 170 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for OHP sheets in
single-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 165 / 1C/step]
5-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
105*
106
109
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
11 Heating: OHP/Full
Color
12
Heating: Duplex/1
Color
13
Heating: Duplex/Full
Color
14
Pressure: Idling
15
Pressure: Ready
16
Pressure: Standby
27
Heating: OFFSET +
28
Pressure: OFFSET +
29
Heating: OFFSET
30
Pressure: OFFSET
Temperature Display
1
Heating Roller
2
Pressure Roller
Fusing Nip
1
Execute Mode
SM
Stop Duration
Function / [ Setting ]
Sets the heating roller temperature for the OHP sheets
in full-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 175 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for duplex printing
(both sides) in single-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 150 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for duplex printing
(both sides) in full-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 155 / 1C/step]
Sets the temperature at which the pressure roller starts
idling.
[10 ~ 100 / 10 / 1C/step]
Sets the temperature at which the pressure roller
becomes ready for printing.
[60 ~ 150 / 65 / 1C/step]
Sets the pressure roller temperature for the ready
(standby) condition. After the main switch has been
turned on, the machine enters this condition when the
pressure roller temperature reaches the temperature
specified in this SP mode. When the machine is
recovering from energy saver or auto off mode, the
machine becomes ready when both heat and pressure
roller temperatures reach the specified temperature.
Heating roller: SP1-105-3
[60 ~ 150 / 115 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature correction for when
room temperature is 15C or lower.
[0 ~ 20 / 5 / 1C/step]
Sets the pressure roller temperature correction for when
room temperature is 15C or lower.
[0 ~ 20 / 0 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature correction for when
room temperature is 30C or higher.
[0 ~ 20 / 5 / 1C/step]
Sets the pressure roller temperature correction for when
room temperature is 30C or higher.
[0 ~ 20 / 0 / 1C/step]
Displays the current temperature of the heating and
pressure rollers.
Checks the fusing nip width using an OHP sheet.
The OHP sheet stops in the fusing unit for the
specified time (
SP1-109-2).
The nip width should be 9 0.5 mm at front and rear.
If this requirement is not met, change the fusing unit.
Adjusts the stoppage time for the OHP sheet in the
fusing unit (
SP1-109-1).
[0 ~ 100 / 10 / 1 s/step]
5-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
1
905
920
930
940
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Fusing Roller
0: New 1: Old
LEF PriorityBypass
LEF PriorityBypass
B156/B220
Function / [ Setting ]
5-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SP2-XXX: (Drum)
001*
100*
101*
201*
208
213
306
400*
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Charge Bias
1
[M]
2
[C]
3
[Y]
4
[K]
5
No Image Area
6
Charger Current
Magnification Adjustment
1
Main Scan
2
Sub Scan
Trim Adjustment
1
front
2
back
3
lead
4
trail
Develop Bias Adjustment
1
[M]
2
[C]
3
[Y]
4
[K]
Forced Toner
1
[K]
2
[C]
3
[M]
4
[Y]
5
All Color
Toner End Set
Toner End Set
5
6
SM
2
2/3/4 Colors
Cleaning Bias LL1
1
1 Color
2
3
4
Function / [ Setting ]
Service
Tables
2 Colors-4 Colors
Half Speed/1 Color
Half Speed/2 Colors-4
Colors
ID pattern
No Image Area
5-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
400*
401*
Rev. 10/2005
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
7
Jam Recovery
8
Toner Revital
Cleaning Bias LL2
1
1 Color
2
3
4
402*
2 Colors-4 Colors
Half Speed/1 Color
Half Speed/2 Colors-4
Colors
5
ID pattern
6
No Image Area
7
Jam Recovery
8
Toner Revital
Cleaning Bias NN1
1
1 Color
2
3
4
403*
2 Colors-4 Colors
Half Speed/1 Color
Half Speed/2 Colors-4
Colors
5
ID pattern
6
No Image Area
7
Jam Recovery
8
Toner Revital
Cleaning Bias NN2
1
1 Color
2
3
4
404*
2 Colors-4 Colors
Half Speed/1 Color
Half Speed/2 Colors-4
Colors
5
ID pattern
6
No Image Area
7
Jam Recovery
8
Toner Revital
Cleaning Bias HH
1
1 Color
2
3
4
5
B156/B220
2 Colors-4 Colors
Half Speed/1 Color
Half Speed/2 Colors-4
Colors
ID pattern
Function / [ Setting ]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1100 / 10 Volt/step] (BICU v1.06)
Adjusts the transfer belt cleaning voltage when absolute
humidity AH (g/m3) is in the following range:
3.5 < AH 8.0 (this is the LL2 humidity range) DFU
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1400 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1100 / 10 Volt/step] (BICU v1.06)
Adjusts the transfer belt cleaning voltage when absolute
humidity AH (g/m3) is in the following range:
8.0 < AH 14 (this is the NN1 humidity range) DFU
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1400 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1100 / 10 Volt/step] (BICU v1.06)
Adjusts the transfer belt cleaning voltage when absolute
humidity AH (g/m3) is in the following range:
14 < AH 19 (this is the NN2 humidity range) DFU
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1400 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1100 / 10 Volt/step] (BICU v1.06)
Adjusts the transfer belt cleaning voltage when absolute
humidity AH (g/m3) is in the following range:
19 < AH (this is the HH humidity range) DFU
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
5-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Rev. 10/2005
404*
501*
502
503
801*
6
7
8
Toner Revital
Fusing Bias Status
Fusing Bias Status
Discharge Bias
1
LL1: 1st
SM
Function / [ Setting ]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1400 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
[0 ~ 2000 / 1100 / 10 Volt/step] (BICU v1.06)
Displays the status of fusing and discharge pin bias
control (ON or OFF).
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: Control OFF
1: Control ON
2
LL2: 1st
3
NN1: 1st
Fusing Bias SW
Fusing Bias SW
802
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
No Image Area
Jam Recovery
Additional Value
Charger Cleaning
Charger Cleaning
5-11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
2
803
904
905
912*
920
921
924
925
Rev. 10/2005
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Charger Cleaning Off Time
1
Charger Cleaning Off
Time
1C Bias Adjustment
1
M
2
C
3
Y
4
K
Paper Transfer Roller Type
1
0:D type 1:S type
Function / [ Setting ]
[10 ~ 200 / 10 / 10 sec /step]
Sets the time for charging the corona wire after charger
cleaning to prevent uneven image density.
Default 50V DFU
Default 0V DFU
Default 0V DFU
Default 0V DFU
Selects the paper transfer roller type.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
0: Drum type
1: Straight type
B156/B220
5-12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2
926
927
938
940
944
SM
Mode No.
Function / [ Setting ]
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Coverage Ratio Reference DFU
1
MC
[0~ 100 / 1.7 / 0.1%/step]
2
FC
[0~ 100 / 1.7 / 0.1%/step]
Disable Time (ITB Cleaning) DFU
[0 ~ 14 / 3 / 1 sec/step]
OPC Reverse Interval
[0 ~ 100 / 10 / 1 /step]
The main motor turns the OPC belt in reverse for 500ms
at the end of every job, to remove unwanted particles
between the OPC belt and OPC cleaning blade.
However, it is not necessary to do this often. In addition,
if the frequency of OPC belt reverse rotation is reduced,
the cleaning blade operates better.
This SP adjusts the counter for the OPC belt reverse
rotation, and is incremented as follows:
LT/A4 LEF or shorter: 1, Longer than LT/A4 LEF: 2.
When this SP reaches its set maximum, reverse rotation
is done for 500ms at job end.
OPC Lubricant Mode
OPC Lubricant Mode
Executes a forced OPC lubrication to reduce the friction
on the OPC belt. DFU
The OPC belt and the lubricant brush operate for 2
minutes.
OPC Lubrication: High Coverage
1
Setting
Enables/disables OPC lubrication after a certain amount
of images are printed. The lubrication timing depends on
SP2-944-2 to -5.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Disables
1: Enables
When high coverage images are continuously printed,
cleaning of the OPC may not be enough. To correct this,
OPC lubrication is carried out during printing
2
Image Coverage1
Specifies standard average coverage condition 1.
[50 ~ 800 / 300 / 10 units/step]
OPC lubrication is executed under the following
conditions.
After the previous OPC lubrication, the number of
output pages reaches the value specified with SP2944-4.
The average coverage of the outputs after the
previous OPC lubrication exceeds standard average
coverage condition 1.
3
Image Coverage2
Specifies standard average coverage condition 2.
[50 ~ 800 / 200 / 10 units/step]
OPC lubrication is executed under the following
conditions.
After the previous OPC lubrication, the number of
output pages reaches the value specified with SP2944-5.
The average coverage of the outputs after the
previous OPC lubrication exceeds standard average
coverage condition 2.
5-13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
2
944
950
951
4
5
6
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Sheets1
Sheets2
Time
Function / [ Setting ]
[6 ~ 80 / 30 / 1 sheet/step]
[6 ~ 80 / 60 / 1 sheet/step]
Specifies the time for OPC lubrication.
[8 ~ 30 / 14 / 1 sec/step]
M (32/24cpm)
C (32/24cpm)
Y (32/24cpm)
K (32/24cpm)
6
7
8
9
M (32/24cpm)
C (32/24cpm)
Y (32/24cpm)
K (20cpm)
10 M (20cpm)
11 C (20cpm)
12 Y (20cpm)
13 K (20cpm)
14 M (20cpm)
15 C (20cpm)
16 Y (20cpm)
Clock Phase Control
1
LD 1
2
LD 2
B156/B220
[6 ~ 6 / 1 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
Adjusts the start timing of the second imaging for each
color.
[6 ~ 6 / 2 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 1 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
Adjusts the start timing of imaging for each color.
[6 ~ 6 / 1 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 1 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 1 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 1 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
[6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
Adjusts the clock phase of the LD to reduce the density
difference between the left and right sides of the printout
when the color misalignment correction (SP29521) is
enabled.
[0 ~ 8 / 0 / 1 /step]
Do this after installing a new laser unit; see
Replacement and Adjustment for details.
5-14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2
952
953
954
970
SM
Mode No.
Function / [ Setting ]
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Color Misalignment Correction
Color Misalignment
Selects either color misalignment correction or reduction
Correction
in density difference between the left and right sides of
pages.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
1: ON
The data for LD1 and LD2 are switched between the
left and right sides of each page. This is done
because of the difference in the output of each LD.
However, in some cases this correction may cause
density differences between sides.
0: OFF
Use this setting if there are density differences
between sides.
S Reg. Adjustment
0:New 1:Old
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
New PCU Settings
0:New 1:Old
Selects the PCU type.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
0: New PCU
1: Old PCU
Oil Removal Mode
1
Oil Removal 1
Enables/disables the oil removal process for a multipage job.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Disables
1: Enables
Oil on duplex copies gets on the transfer belt, and this
can cause uneven image density. To remove this oil,
printing stops, the PCU turns, and the cleaning unit
removes the oil.
2
Oil Removal 2
Enables/disables the oil removal process after job end.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Disables
1: Enables
3
Number of Continue
Specifies how many times the oil removal process is
repeated.
[1 ~ 20 / 5 / 1 /step]
The more times the oil removal is repeated, the better
the output images are; but the longer it takes.
4
Number of Duplex
Specifies how often the oil removal process is done. The
unit is the number of duplex prints. The counter counts
down once every narrow (A4 SEF or less) duplex sheet,
and counts back up 1 for every other type of sheet.
[1 ~ 50 / 10 / 1 /step]
5
ITB Cleaning Clutch
[0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1 /step]
Off/On Number
This SP sets the number of times the ITB clutch is
turned on/off at the end of oil removal mode (SP2-97001 - this removes oil from the ITB to ensure uniform
image density). Turning the ITB clutch on/off helps to
remove excess toner that can cling to and then drop
from the edge of the newly added ITB cleaning blade
during oil removal.
5-15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
2
980
981
982
983
984
Rev. 10/2005
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Dctr Roller Interval
1
Job_Interruption: K
2
Job_Interruption: M
3
Job_Interruption: C
4
Job_Interruption: Y
Function / [ Setting ]
B156/B220
5-16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SP3-XXX: (Process)
001
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Forced Process Control
1
Execute
2
003*
Lubricant Interval
1
Interval
SM
Display
Forced Interval
Function / [ Setting ]
Does a forced process control, and displays the result as
one of the following codes.
Displays the completion code.
1: Normal termination
99: Stop (Interruption due to SC or door open)
103: Error (ID sensor inactive Defective ID sensor,
Defective circuit, Defective BCU board)
104: Error (ID sensor unable to receive light
Defective OPC belt, Dirty OPC belt, Defective ID
sensor, Defective circuit, Defective BCU board)
105: Error (ID sensor unable to receive reflection from
OPC Same as 104)
110: Error (Cyan: ID sensor unable to detect correct
image)
111: Error (Magenta: ID sensor unable to detect
correct image)
112: Error (Yellow: ID sensor unable to detect correct
image)
113: Error (Cyan: ID sensor unable to detect correct
image)
114: Error (Magenta: ID sensor unable to detect
correct image)
115: Error (Yellow: ID sensor unable to detect correct
image)
116: Error (Black: ID sensor unable to detect correct
image)
118: Error (Black image not detected)
123: Error (Development bias error; Black ID sensor
unable to detect correct image)
Solutions for codes 110 to 123:
Poor connection to the development unit
Dirty development bias terminal
Abnormal development bias
PCU not installed correctly
LD unit defective
Abnormal charge corona voltage
Defective BICU
Sets the process control interval. Process control for this
SP is done only after job end.
[0 ~ 1000 / 200 / 10 sheets/step]
0: Disables automatic process control
Sets the process control interval. Process control for this
SP is done during a job if the counter reaches the value
(N1 + N2).
If the counter is between N1 and N2, process control is
done after job end.
N1: the value specified with SP3-003-1.
N2: the value specified with this SP.
[0 ~ 5000 / 500 / 10 sheets/step]
5-17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
3
004*
006*
125
911
922*
929
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Environment Change
1
Temperature
2
Humidity
Density Adjustment
1
M/A Correction
2
Highlight Correction
Function / [ Setting ]
Sets the temperature/humidity change that triggers
process control (process control is done if temperature
or humidity has changed by this amount since the
previous process control).
[0 ~ 100 / 15 / 1C/step]
[0 ~ 200 / 15 / 1 g/m3/step]
Select the toner density compensation level for process
control. If prints are not dark enough when making multiprint jobs, increasing this value ensures that prints will
be darker after the next process control. The default (0)
is for no correction.
SP3-006-1: Use this one if the density of solid areas is
not satisfactory.
SP3-006-2: Use this one if the density of highlight areas
is not satisfactory.
[0 ~ 3 / 0 / 1/step]
0: None
1: Weak
2: Medium
3: Strong
The higher the value, the darker the prints will be.
Enables process control execution before ACC.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: No
1: Yes
B156/B220
5-18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Rev. 10/2005
970
2
3
4
5
971
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Image Area Rate
1
M
972
980
990
SM
C
Y
Bk
Oil End
Function / [ Setting ]
Specifies the minimum image area (expressed as a
percentage of an A4 page) required to maintain optimum
development unit condition (
Toner Revitalization:
SP3971).
[0 ~ 10.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 %/step]
After 20 sheets over a number of small jobs (or after 50
sheets in one job), if the developed area is less than the
value of this SP mode, toner is transferred to the image
transfer belt and cleaned off. This is performed during
the doctor roller reverse rotation.
[0 ~ 10.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 %/step]
[0 ~ 10.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 %/step]
[0 ~ 10.0 / 4.7 / 0.1 %/step]
When the average BK Image pixel is larger than 4.2%,
0.5% toner refresh (default) is carried out in duplex
mode. When the average BK Image pixel is 4.2% or
less, current toner refresh is carried out.
[0 ~ 10.0 / 0.5 / 0.1 %/step] (BICU v1.04, Main v1.05)
Toner Revitalization
1
Toner Revitalization
5-19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SP4-XXX: (Scanner)
4
008*
010
011*
012*
013
017
Mode No.
Function / [ Setting ]
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Scanner Sub Scan Magnification
Scanner Sub Scan
Adjusts the magnification in the sub scan direction for
Magnification
scanning.
[1.0 ~ 1.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step]
Use the key to toggle between + and before entering
the value. The specification is 1%. See Replacement
and Adjustment Copy Adjustment for details.
Scanner Leading Edge Registration
Scanner Leading Edge Adjusts the leading edge registration for scanning in platen
Registration
mode.
[3.0 ~ 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
(): The image moves in the direction of the leading edge.
Use the key to toggle between + and before entering
the value. The specification is 2 1.5 mm. See
Replacement and Adjustment Copy Adjustment for
details.
Scanner Side-to-side Registration
Scanner Side-to-side
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for scanning in platen
Registration
mode.
[6.0 ~ 6.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm /step]
(): The image disappears at the left side.
(+): The image appears.
Use the key to toggle between + and before entering
the value. The specification is 2 1.5 mm. See
Replacement and Adjustment Copy Adjustment for
details.
Scale Shadow Erase
1
Book: Lead Edge L
2
Book: Trail Edge R
3
Book: Left
4
Book: Right
5
ADF: Lead Edge
7
ADF: Left
8
ADF: Right
Scanner Free Run
1
Lamp: OFF
2
Lamp: ON
Scan
1
Shading ON
2
Shading OFF
B156/B220
5-20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
020
301
303
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
DF Glass Dust Check
1
Dust Check
Detect Level
Function / [ Setting ]
Turns DF glass dust detection on/off.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
Selects the detection level.
[0 ~ 8 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: Least detailed detection, 8: Most detailed detection
Selects the vertical line correction when using the DF.
[0 ~ 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disables image correction level
4: Most effective correction
305
400
SM
5-21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
4
417
440
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
IPU Test Pattern Select
select any test pattern
Function / [ Setting ]
Chroma Adjustment
Adjusts the color chroma for the scanner.
[0 ~ 5 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU
460
540
Printer Vector
1
R: Option
2
R: R
3
R: G
4
R: B
5
Y: Option
6
Y: R
7
Y: G
8
Y: B
9
G: Option
10 G: R
11 G: G
12 G: B
13 C: Option
14 C: R
15 C: G
16 C: B
17 B: Option
18 B: R
B156/B220
5-22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
540
550
551
552
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
19 B: G
20 B: B
21 M: Option
22 M: R
23 M: G
24 M: B
Scanner Application
5
Text (Print) MTF
Scanner Application
5
Text (OCR) MTF
Scanner Application
5
Text (OCR) D.O.C
MTF
6
Function / [ Setting ]
Adjust the vector correction of the filter in the CCD on the
SBU unit.
[0 255/ 0 / 1 /step]
When replacing the SBU, input the data from the data
sheet that is included with the spare SBU unit.
5-23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
4
553
554
555
558
558
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Scanner Application
5
Text /Photo MTF
Scanner Application
5
Photo MTF
Photo Smoothing
Photo Brightness
Photo Contrast
Scanner Application
5
Grayscale MTF
Grayscale Smoothing
Grayscale Brightness
Grayscale Contrast
Scanner Application
5
Color (T/P) MTF
B156/B220
Function / [ Setting ]
Adjusts the MTF level.
[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: Least effective MTF, 15: Most effective MTF
Adjusts the smoothing level.
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: Least effective smoothing, 7: Most effective smoothing
Adjusts the brightness level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
1: Least bright, 255: Brightest
Adjusts the contrast level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
1: Least effective contrast, 255: Most effective contrast
Adjusts the MTF level.
[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: Least effective MTF, 15: Most effective MTF
Adjusts the smoothing level.
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: Least effective smoothing, 7: Most effective smoothing
Adjusts the brightness level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
1: Least bright, 255: Brightest
Adjusts the contrast level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
1: Least effective contrast, 255: Most effective contrast
Adjusts the MTF level.
[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: Least effective MTF, 15: Most effective MTF
Adjusts the smoothing level.
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: Least effective smoothing, 7: Most effective smoothing
Adjusts the brightness level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
1: Least bright, 255: Brightest
Adjusts the contrast level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
1: Least effective contrast, 255: Most effective contrast
Adjusts the MTF level.
[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: Least effective MTF, 15: Most effective MTF
Adjusts the smoothing level.
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: Least effective smoothing, 7: Most effective smoothing
Adjusts the brightness level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step] 1: Least bright, 255: Brightest
Adjusts the contrast level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
1: Least effective contrast, 255: Most effective contrast
5-24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
559
560
561
562
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Scanner Application
5
Color (GlossyPhoto)
MTF
6
Color (GlossyPhoto)
Smoothing
Color (GlossyPhoto)
Brightness
Color (GlossyPhoto)
Contrast
Scanner Application
5
sRGB (T/P) MTF
sRGB (T/P)Contrast
Scanner Application
5
sRGB (GlossyPhoto)
MTF
6
sRGB (GlossyPhoto)
Smoothing
sRGB (GlossyPhoto)
Brightness
sRGB (GlossyPhoto)
Contrast
Scanner Application
5
ACS MTF
ACS Smoothing
ACS Brightness
Function / [ Setting ]
Adjusts the MTF level.
[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: Least effective MTF, 15: Most effective MTF
Adjusts the smoothing level.
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: Least effective smoothing, 7: Most effective smoothing
Adjusts the brightness level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
1: Least bright, 255: Brightest
Adjusts the contrast level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
1: Least effective contrast, 255: Most effective contrast
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
4
8
628
629
630
661
Gain Adjustment: R
1
R EVEN
2
R ODD
Gain Adjustment: G
1
G EVEN
2
G ODD
Gain Adjustment: B
1
B EVEN
2
B ODD
Last Gain Data: R
1
R EVEN
2
662
688
800
800
885
Displays the last gain value for the even red signal in the
CCD image processing circuit.
Displays the last gain value for the odd red signal in the
CCD image processing circuit.
R ODD
Displays the last gain value for the even green signal in
the CCD image processing circuit.
Displays the last gain value for the odd green signal in the
CCD image processing circuit.
G ODD
Displays the last gain value for the even blue signal in the
CCD image processing circuit.
Displays the last gain value for the odd blue signal in the
CCD image processing circuit.
B ODD
Function / [ Setting ]
663
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
ACS Contrast
Level Adjustment: R
Adjusts the ADC reference voltage. Details are in
Replacement and Adjustment.
[ 128 ~ 127 / 49 / 1 /step]
886
Level Adjustment: G
Adjusts the ADC reference voltage.
[ 128 ~ 127 / 17 / 1 /step]
887
Level Adjustment: B
Adjusts the ADC reference voltage.
[ 128 ~ 127 / 29 / 1 /step]
B156/B220
5-26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
902
903
905*
906*
907
918
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
ACC Data Display
1
R DATA 1
2
G DATA 1
3
B DATA 1
4
R DATA 2
5
G DATA 2
6
B DATA 2
Function / [ Setting ]
Displays ACC data.
[0 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
DFU
[0 255 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
[0 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: CCD
1: Black
2: White
3: 15-grade gray scale
4: Vertical line
SM
5-27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Rev. 10/2005
SP5-XXX: (Mode)
5
024*
045*
051
055
112
113
118
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
mm/inch Display Selection
mm/inch Display
Selection
Accounting Counter
Counter Method
Function / [ Setting ]
Selects a unit system.
North America: [0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
Europe: [0 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: mm
1: inch
Changes the counter method.
The setting can only be changed once.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Developments
1: Prints
Display IP Address
1
Display IP Address
B156/B220
5-28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5
120
121
Mode No.
Function / [ Setting ]
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal
Mode Clear Opt.
Selects the mode clear for all accounting devices when
Counter Removal
canceling the accounting devices counter.
[0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Yes (always cleared)
1: Standby (cleared before and after a job, not
cleared during an interrupt)
2: No (never cleared)
Counter Up Timing
Counter Up Timing
126
127
128
SM
F Size Setting
F Size Setting
APS Mode
APS Mode
5-29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5
131
150
162
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Paper Size Type
Paper Size Type
Function / [ Setting ]
Selects the original size type.
[0 ~ 2 / Depending on DIP switch setting / 1 /step]
0: Japan
1: N. America
2: Europe
DIP switch setting (
5.8)
Use or do not use long paper in the bypass tray.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON (jams are not detected in the paper path)
The standard length (sub scan) is limited to 600mm
even if "1" is selected in this SP.
167
169
CE Login
CE Login
212
Page Numbering
3
Duplex Printout
Right/Left Position
4
Duplex Printout
High/Low Position
B156/B220
5-30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5
302
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Setting Time
Time Difference
Function / [ Setting ]
Sets the time difference.
North America: [1440 1440 / 300 / 1 minute/step]
Europe: [1440 1440 / 60 / 1 minute/step]
Values indicate the time difference from the Greenwich
Mean Time (GMT). 300 indicates the eastern
standard time of Canada and the United States of
America. 60 indicates the standard time of the French
Republic.
Summer Time
1
Setting
SM
5-31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
307
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5
401*
404
501
Mode No.
Function / [ Setting ]
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Access Control
When installing the SDK application, SAS (VAS) adjusts the following settings. DFU
200 SDK1 Unique ID
This ID is overwritten by SAS (VAS) when you install or
uninstall the SDK application.
201 SDK1 Certification
[ 0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Method
210 SDK2 Unique ID
211 SDK2 Certification
[ 0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Method
220 SDK3 Unique ID
221 SDK3 Certification
[ 0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Method
User Code Count Clear
User Code Count
Clears the user code counter.
Clear
PM Alarm
1
PM Alarm Level
Specifies the PM alarm level.
[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disables the PM alarm
1 ~ 9999: Specifies the PM alarm level.
The PM alarm occurs when L x 1000 >= C, where L is
the specified level and C is the current PM counter
value.
2
504
505
B156/B220
0: OFF
1: ON
Selects the jam alarm level.
[0 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
0: Z (none)
1: L (6K x 1/4)
2: M (6K x 1/2)
3: H (6K)
When you select "1, 2 or 3", the machine does these
steps:
1) The jam alarm counter increases by "1" when a
paper jam is detected (except for jams in the ADF).
2) The jam alarm counter decreases by "1" when the set
number of sheets was copied or printed after the
machine detected the previous paper jam.
3) A jam alarm occurs when the jam alarm counter gets
to "10".
5-32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
507
Mode No.
Function / [ Setting ]
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Supply Alarm Used with RSS.
1
Paper Supply Alarm
Turns the supply alarm on or off.
[0 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off 1: On
This alarm occurs when one of the limits in SPs 5507128 to 172 is reached.
2
Staple Supply Alarm
Turns the supply alarm on or off.
[0 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off 1: On
This alarm occurs when every 1000 staples are used.
3
508
SM
Continuous Jams
5-33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5
508
11
12
610
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Low Call Mode
13
21
22
Jam Operation:
Continuous Count
23
B156/B220
Previous Setting
Function / [ Setting ]
Selects the alarm mode.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Normal Mode (CC Auto Call)
1: Reduce Mode (CC Manual Call)
When selecting 1 (reduce mode), SP5-508-011 through
-023 specify parameters (referred to as P in the
following descriptions). Alarms occur under the following
conditions:
Continuous jam:
When paper jams occur P times consecutively, where
P can be between 2 and 10. The default for P is 5 (
SP5-508-012).
Continuous door open:
When a door is left open for P minutes, where P can
be between 3 and 30. The default for P is 10 (
SP5508-013).
Unremoved jam:
When a paper jam is left unremoved for P minutes,
where P can be between 3 and 30. The default for P
is 10 (
SP5-508-011).
Specifies the unremoved jam timer (
SP5-508-004).
[3 30 / 10 / 1 minute/step]
Specifies the number of consecutive jams (
SP5-508004).
[2 10 / 5 / 1 time/step]
Specifies the continuous door open timer (
SP5-508004).
[3 30 / 10 / 1 minute/step]
Selects how the machine handles the unremoved jam
alarm.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Auto call
1: Beeper
If an unremoved jam occurs, a phone call is
automatically made when 0 (auto call) is selected. To
enable SP5-508-21 through -23, SP5-508-4 must be set
to 1.
Selects how the machine handles the consecutive jam
alarm.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Auto call
1: Manual Call
Selects how the machine handles the continuous door
open alarm.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Auto call
1: Manual Call
Recalls the ACC factory settings.
Overwrites the ACC factory settings with the current
settings.
Recalls the previous ACC settings.
5-34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5
611
801
802
803
804
810
811
812*
SM
Mode No.
Function / [ Setting ]
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
2nd. Single Color Adj.
1
BC
[0 100 / 90 / 1 %/step]
2
BM
[0 100 / 60 / 1 %/step]
3
GC
[0 100 / 85 / 1 %/step]
4
GY
[0 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
5
RM
[0 100 / 95 / 1 %/step]
6
RY
[0 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]
Memory Clear Refer to section 5.1.9 for how to use this SP
1
All Clear
Clears the settings from the NVRAM and initializes the
settings.
2
Engine Clear
Clears the engine settings.
3
SCS
Clears the system settings.
4
IMH Memory Clr
Clears IMH data. DFU
5
MCS
Clears MCS data. DFU
6
Copier application
Clears the copy settings.
7
Fax Application
Clears the fax settings.
8
Printer Application
Clears the user tool settings.
9
Scanner Application
Clears the scanner settings.
This SP must be performed after updating the scanner
software.
10 Web Service/Network
Clears the net file settings.
Application
11 NCS
Clears the network settings.
12 R-FAX
Clears the R-FAX settings.
14 Clear DCS Setting
Clears the DCS settings.
15 Clear UCS Setting
Clears the UCS settings.
16 MIRS Setting
Clears the MIRS settings.
17 CCS
Clears the CCS settings.
Free Run
Makes a free run test.
1
A4: BANK 2: Bk
All mode: Goes through tests 1 to 4.
2
A4: TRAY 1: Bk
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3
A4: By-pass: Bk
0: OFF
4
A4: BANK 2: FC
1: ON
5
All Mode
Input Check (See section 5.1.4, Input Check)
Output Check (See section 5.1.5, Output Check.)
SC Reset
SC Reset
Resets a fusing-related SC.
Resets a type A service call condition.
NOTE: Turn the main switch off and on after using this
SP.
Serial Number Display
SN Display
Displays the machine serial number.
Service Telephone No. Setting
1
Service
5-812-1: Service representative telephone number
5-812-2: Service representative fax number
2
Facsimile
5-812-3: Number for ordering consumables
3
Supply
5-812-4: Telephone number of the sales representative
4
Operation
Both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input.
5-35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5
816
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Remote Service
1
I/F Setting
CE Call
Function Flag
Communicate Test
Call
Device Information
Call
Device Information
Call Display Setting
5
6
821
SSL Disable
10
11
Port 80 Enable
B156/B220
RCG IP Address
Function / [ Setting ]
Selects the remote service setting.
[0 ~ 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: NRS remote service on
Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to
2.
Enables/disables the remote service function.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Communication Test Call
Device Information Call
Displays/does not display the device information call
content.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
Uses/does not use the RCG certification by SSL when
calling the RCG.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Uses the RCG certification
1: Does no use the RCG certification
Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the
RCG.
[1 ~ 90 / 10 / 1 second/step]
Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the
RCG.
[0 ~ 100 / 60 / 1 second/step]
Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the
RCG.
[0 ~ 100 / 60 / 1 second/step]
Enables/disables the access via port 80 to the SOAP
(Simple Object Access Protocol) method.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Selects the PI device code.
[0 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
To validate the setting, turn off and on the main power
switch.
Sets the RCG IP address for calling the center.
5-36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
824
825
828
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
NV-RAM Data Upload
NV-RAM Data Upload
NV-RAM Data Download
NV-RAM Data
Download
Network Setting
50 1284 Compatibility
(Centro)
52
ECP (Centro)
65
Job Spooling
66
69
Job Spooling
(Protocol)
84
90
Function / [ Setting ]
Use this to copy NVRAM data from the machine to an
SD card.
Imports data from an SD card to the NVRAM.
When data has been normally imported into the
NVRAM, a message appears on the operation panel.
After reading the message, turn the main power switch
off and on.
Validates/invalidates IEEE1284 compatibility.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Invalidated
1: Validated
Validates/invalidates ECP.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
This SP is activated only when SP5828-050 is set to 1.
0: Invalidated
1: Validated
Enables/disables Job Spooling.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables/disables Job Spooling Clear when the main
power turns on.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: ON (Erases the spooled job in the HDD before the
main power is turned off.)
1: OFF (Prints the spooled job in the HDD before the
main power is turned off.)
Enables/disables Job Spooling for each protocol.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: Enables Job Spooling
1: Disables Job Spooling
Bit switch
Bit 0: LPR
Bit 1: FTP
Bit 2: IPP
Bit 3: SMB
Bit 4: BMLinks
Bit 5: DIPRINT
Bit 6: Reserved
Bit 7: Reserved
Prints the settings list related to NCS parameters.
Turns on/ off TELNET.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
5-37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5
828
832
833
836
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
91 Web
(0: OFF 1: ON)
Function / [ Setting ]
Turns on/ off the web.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
HDD
Enter the SP number for the partition to initialise, then press . When the execution
ends, cycle down and on.
NOTE: Use this SP mode only for hard disk error recovery.
1
HDD Formatting (ALL) Initializes the hard disk.
2
HDD Formatting (IMH) Initializes followings:
Documents stored on the document server
Stamp print data
Scanner delivery images
Fax delivery images
3
HDD Formatting
Initializes MCS thumbnail images.
(Thumbnail)
4
HDD Formatting
Initializes lob data used by the Poplar server.
(Job Log)
5
HDD Formatting
Initializes printer fonts, overlay forms.
(Printer Fonts)
6
HDD Formatting
Initializes user information (UCS).
(User Info)
7
Mail RX Data
Initializes mail receive data (DCS)
8
Mail TX Data
Initializes mail send data (DCS)
9
HDD Formatting
Designer use only.
(Data for a Design)
10 HDD Formatting (Log) Initializes the logs (fax history and debug log).
11 HDD Formatting
Initializes the Net File management area.
(Ridoc interface)
e-Cabinet enable
e-Cabinet enable
Enables/disables the e-Cabinet.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
The e-Cabinet supplies the interface for registration,
editing, deleting and obtaining the users code name.
NOTE: Turn the main switch on and off after using this
SP.
NOTE:
Capture Setting
1
Capture Function
Turn the capture function on/off.
0: Off 1: On
[0 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off
1: On
2
Panel Setting
Displays or does not display the capture function
buttons.
[0 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
B156/B220
5-38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
71 Reduction for Copy
Color
72
73
74
75
Function / [ Setting ]
Selects the reduction rate of the document resolution
when transmitting the stored document data with the
copy color mode to the document management server.
[0 ~ 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
Selects the reduction rate of the document resolution
when transmitting the stored document data with the
copy B&W text mode to the document management
server.
[0 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
Selects the reduction rate of the document resolution
when transmitting the stored document data with the
copy B&W other mode to the document management
server.
[0 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
Selects the reduction rate of the document resolution
when transmitting the stored document data with the
print color mode to the document management server.
[0 ~ 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
Selects the reduction rate of the document resolution
when transmitting the stored document data with the
print B&W mode to the document management server.
[0 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
5-39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5
836
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
76 Reduction for Printer
B&W HQ
77
78
81
82
83
B156/B220
Function / [ Setting ]
Selects the reduction rate of the document resolution
when transmitting the stored document data with the
print B&W HQ mode to the document management
server.
[0 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
Selects the reduction rate of the document resolution
when transmitting the stored document data with the
print color 1200dpi mode to the document management
server.
[1, 3 ~ 5 / 4 / 1 /step]
1: 1/2
2: Skipped
3: 1/4:
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
Selects the reduction rate of the document resolution
when transmitting the stored document data with the
print B&W 1200dpi mode to the document management
server.
[1, 3 ~ 5 / 1 / 1 /step]
1: 1/2
2: Skipped
3: 1/4:
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
This SP shows the format when capturing the image
with copy color mode. This SP cannot be adjusted.
0: JFIF/JPEG
1: TIFF/MMR
2: TIFF/MH
3: TIFF/MR
This SP is activated only when the File Format
Converter has been installed.
Selects the format when capturing the image with copy
B&W text mode.
[0 ~ 3 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: JFIF/JPEG
1: TIFF/MMR
2: TIFF/MH
3: TIFF/MR
Selects the format when capturing an image with copy
B&W modes other than text.
[0 ~ 3 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: JFIF/JPEG
1: TIFF/MMR
2: TIFF/MH
3: TIFF/MR
5-40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
836
839
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
84 Format for Printer
Color
85
86
91
IEEE1394
4
Host Name
7
Cycle Master
BCR mode
10
Unique ID
11
Logout
12
Login
Function / [ Setting ]
This SP shows the format when capturing the image
with print color mode. This SP cannot be adjusted.
0: JFIF/JPEG
Selects the format when capturing the image with print
B&W mode.
[0 ~ 3 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: JFIF/JPEG
1: TIFF/MMR
2: TIFF/MH
3: TIFF/MR
Selects the format when capturing the image with print
B&W HQ mode.
[0 ~ 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: JFIF/JPEG
1: TIFF/MMR
2: TIFF/MH
3: TIFF/MR
Selects the default quality for JPEG
[5 ~ 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
Displays the 1394 host name.
[Text up to 64 bytes / NULL / /step]
Turns the cycle master function on/off.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
Selects either Standard, 'IRM Color Copy', or 'Always
Effective'.
Turns the IRM 1394a check on/off.
[0 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF
1: ON
If the IRM is not defined as 1394a standard, its node is
used as IRM.
[0 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF
1: ON
Prevents initiators from logging on or makes initiators log
off.
[0 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF
(Prevents the initiators, having already logged on, to
log on if they try to log on.)
1: ON
(Makes initiators, having already logged on, to log off
if they try to log on.)
Allows/disallows an initiator to exclusively log on.
[0 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF (Disallows)
1: ON (Allows)
5-41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5
839
840
841
842
844
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
13 Login MAX
IEEE 802.11b
6
Channel MAX
Channel MIN
11
USB
1
Transfer Rate
Function / [ Setting ]
DFU
Default: 00000000 do not change
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server
using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software
Vendor ID
Product ID
B156/B220
5-42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
844
845
846
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Device Release
Number
IP Address (Primary)
IP Address
(Secondary)
10
Delivery Srv.
Capability
11
Delivery Srv.
Capability (Ext)
UCS Setting
1
Machine ID (for
Delivery Server)
2
Machine ID Clear (for
Delivery Server)
Function / [ Setting ]
Specifies the device release number with BCD (Binary
Coded Decimal).
[0 ~ 9999 / 100 / 1 /step]
5-43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5
846
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Maximum Entries
Delivery Server
Maximum Entries
10
47
50
51
52
53
90
91
94
Encryption Stat
48
49
B156/B220
Function / [ Setting ]
Specifies the maximum entry counts.
[2000 ~ 20000 / 2000 / 1 /step]
Specifies the retry interval. The retry is executed when
the machine fails to get an address book from the
distribution server.
[0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 second/step]
NOTE: When this SP is set to 0, the retry is not
executed.
Specifies the retry times. The retry is executed when the
machine fails to get an address book from the
distribution server.
[0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
NOTE: When this SP is set to 0, the retry is not
executed.
Specifies the maximum account entries in the
distribution server user information that UCS controls.
[2000 ~ 20000 / 2000 / 1 /step]
Specifies the timeout for searching the LDAP server.
[1 ~ 255 / 60 / 1 /step]
Clears the local address book information, including the
user code.
Clears the distribution address book information, except
the user code.
Clears the LDAP address book information, except the
user code.
Clears all the address book information, including the
user code.
NOTE: The administrators account information cannot
be cleared with this SP.
Uploads all directory information to the SD card.
Downloads all directory information from the SD card.
Deletes the address book data from the SD card in the
service slot.
Deletes only the files that meet same machine category.
This feature does not work if the card is write-protected.
NOTE: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode,
and then turn the power off.
Do not remove the SD card until the Power
LED stops flashing.
Enables or disables the address book data writing to the
HDD or SD card in plane data.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Enable
1: Disable
Specifies the FTP port for getting a distribution server
address.
[0 ~ 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step]
Shows the status of the encryption function for the
address book data.
5-44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5
847
SM
Mode No.
Function / [ Setting ]
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Net File Resolution Reduction
1
Rate for Copy Color
Selects the net file resolution reduction (copy, color)
[0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
This resolution reduction is for jobs displayed on a PC
screen with the DeskTopBinder software.
SP 5847 adjustments are only available when the File
Format Converter is installed.
2
Rate for Copy B&W
Selects the net file resolution reduction (copy, black &
Text
white, text)
[0 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
6: 2/3
3
Rate for Copy B&W
Selects the net file resolution reduction (copy, black &
Other
white, others)
[0 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
6: 2/3
4
Rate for Printer Color
Selects the net file resolution reduction (printer, color)
[0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
5-45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5
847
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Rate for Printer B&W
21
848
Function / [ Setting ]
Selects the net file resolution reduction (printer, black &
white
[0 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
6: 2/3
Selects the net file resolution reduction (printer, black &
white)
[0 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
6: 2/3
Selects the net file default quality level (network, JPEG)
[5 ~ 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
Network Quality
Default for JPEG
Web Service
5848 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of 0001
has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5848 100 sets the maximum size of images that can be downloaded. The default is
equal to 1 gigabyte.
1
Access Ctrl: Net File
Bit switch settings.
Protocol (Lower 4bits
0000: No access control
only)
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder. Access and
deliveries from Scan Router have no effect on capture.
2
Access Ctrl:
0000: No access control
Repository (only Lower 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
4bits)
0010: No writing control
3
Access Ctrl: Doc. Svr.
Switches access control on and off.
Print (Lower 4bits)
0000: No access control
4
Access Ctrl: uDirectory 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
(Lower 4bits)
5
Access Ctrl: Delivery
Input (Lower 4bits)
7
Access Ctrl: Comm.
Log Fax (Lower 4bits)
9
Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl
Switches access control on and off.
(Lower 4bits)
0000: No access control
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
11
13
B156/B220
Access Ctrl:
Devicemanagement
(Lower 4bits)
Access Ctrl: Device
Ctrl Fax (Lower 4bits)
5-46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
848
21
22
41
100
849
Installation Date
1
Display
850
853
856
857
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Access Ctrl: Delivery
(Lower 4bits)
Access Ctrl:
uAdministration (Lower
4bits)
Security Setting
(Lower 4bits only)
Repository: Download
Image Max Size
Function / [ Setting ]
Switches access control on and off.
0000: No access control
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
Switch to Print
5-47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5
857
5
6
9
10
11#
12#
13
14
858
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Target (2: HDD 3: SD)
Save to HDD
Save to SD Card
Copy HDD to SD Card
(Latest 4MB)
Copy HDD to SD Card
(Latest 4MB Any Key)
Free Space on SD
Card
Copy SD to SD (Latest
4MB)
15
Copy SD to SD (Latest
4MB Any Key)
16
17
B156/B220
Function / [ Setting ]
Selects the storage device when the conditions set with
SP5-858 are satisfied.
[2 ~ 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
2: HDD
3: SD Card
Saves the selected key number log to the HDD.
Saves the selected key number log to the SD Card.
Copies the latest 4MB log file on the HDD to the SD
Card. Each file is automatically given a unique name.
Copies the latest 4MB log file of the selected key
number on the HDD to the SD Card. Each file is
automatically given a unique name.
NOTE: If the selected number is not on the HDD, this
SP has no effect.
Deletes the debug log file on the HDD.
Deletes the debug log file on the SD Card (this file is
copied when the conditions set with SP5-858 are
satisfied).
NOTE: The debug log files, which are copied with
SP5-857-10, cannot be deleted with this SP.
NOTE:
Displays the free space on the SD Card.
Copies the latest 4MB log file on the SD Card to another
SD Card. Each file is automatically given a unique
name.
Copies the latest 4MB log file of the selected key
number on the SD Card to another SD Card. Each file is
automatically given a unique name.
NOTE: If the selected number is not on the HDD, this
SP has no effect.
NOTE:
Makes a debug log file.
This function is automatically executed without this SP
when saving a debug log file to the HDD or SD Card at
the very first time. However, it takes a long time to save
it. In that case, the user may turn off the main power
before completing the saving. To prevent failing to save
it, this SP is useful.
Turns on/off the debug log save to the device set with
SP5-857-2 when an engine SC error occurs.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
5-48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
858
859
860
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Controller SC Error
(0: OFF 1:ON)
Any SC Error
21
MDN Response
RFC2298 Compliance
22
25
Function / [ Setting ]
Turns on/off the debug log save to the device set with
SP5857-2 when a controller SC error occurs.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
Saves the debug log to the device set with SP5-857-2
when the SC that you have set occurs.
Turns on/off the debug log save to the device set with
SP5857-2 when a paper jam occurs.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
5-49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5
866
870
871
873
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
E-mail Alert
Not Used
1
Notice function of EMail
5
Add Date Field
Common Key Info Writing
1
Writing
3
Initialize
HDD function disable
1
HDD function disable
(0: OFF 1: ON)
875
876
886
Rev. 10/2005
Undo Exec
SC Auto Reboot
SC Auto Reboot
Function / [ Setting ]
Turn the E-mail notice function on/off.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Writes the common key information of the device
authentication for NRS specifications to the flash ROM
etc.
Initialize the common key information. DFU
Turns the HDD disable function on/off.
This function must be activated when the data overwrite
security unit is installed.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON (HDD function limited)
Copies the application programs from the original SD
card in the SD card slot 3 to an SD card in the SD card
slot 1.
Copies back the application programs from an SD card
in SD Card Slot 1 to the original SD card in the SD card
slot 3. Use this menu when you have mistakenly copied
some programs by using "Move Exec" (SP5873-1).
Determines whether the machine reboots automatically
when an SC error occurs.
[0 ~ 1/ 0 / 1/step]]
0: The machine reboots automatically when the
machine issues an SC error and logs the SC
error code. If the same SC occurs again, the
machine does not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error
occurs.
The reboot does not occur for Type A, B, or C SC codes.
Security Clear
1
All Clear.
11 Clear NCS Security Setting
15 Clear UCS Security Setting
ROM Update
1
Allows access to the ROM by the Remote Firmware Update function
[0 ~ 1/ 0 / 1/step] (0: Yes, 1: No)
B156/B220
5-50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5
907
Mode No.
Function / [ Setting ]
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Plug & Play Maker/ Model Name
Plug & Play Maker/
[0 ~ 11 / 0 / - ]
Model Name
Select the required setting from the menu.
MF
Model Name
0
RICOH
Aficio 3224C
1
RICOH
Aficio 3232C
2
SAVIN
C2410
3
SAVIN
C3210e
4
Gestetner DSc424
5
GestetnerDSc432
6
NRG
DSc424
7
NRG
DSc432
8
infotec
ISC1024c
9
infotecISC1032c
10 LANIER
LD124c
11LANIERLD132c
913
Unit PM Alert
Unit PM Alert
102
955
SM
Test Pattern
1
Pattern
2
967
Density
5-51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
912
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5
974
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Cherry Server
Cherry Server
Function / [ Setting ]
Selects which version of the Scan Router application
program, Light or Full (Professional), is installed.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Light version (supplied with this machine)
1: Full version (optional)
985
Device Setting
1
On Board NIC
990*
996
On Board USB
SP Print Mode
1
All (Data List)
2
SP (Mode Data List)
3
User Program
4
Logging Data
5
Diagnostic Report
6
Non-Default
7
NIB Summary
(Configuration page,
system log page
NVRAM log page)
8
Capture Log
21 Copier User Program
(Copy Management
Report)
22 Scanner SP
23 Scanner User Program
(Scanner Management
Report)
Density Adjustment
1
Bk
2
Y
3
M
4
C
B156/B220
5-52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SP6-XXX: (Peripherals)
006*
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
ADF Adjustment
1
S-to-S Registration
2
3
007
008
SM
Leading Edge
Registration
Trailing Edge Erase
S-to-S Registration
(Rear)
Sub-san Magnification
Orig. Buckling
Buckle Adjustment
DF Input Check
1
Original Set
2
Original Width 1
3
Original Width 2
4
Original Length 1
5
Original Length 2
6
Orig. Trailing Edge
7
Cover Open
8
DF Position
9
Registration
10 Original Exit
11 Original Reverse
DF Output Check
1
Feed Motor (Forward)
2
Feed Motor (Reverse)
3
Trans. Motor
(Forward)
4
Feed Clutch
5
Pick-up Solenoid
6
Junction Gate
Solenoid
7
Stamp Solenoid
Function / [ Setting ]
Adjusts the side-to-side registration of the optional ADF.
[5.0 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
First adjust the copier registration. Then if ADF
registration is incorrect, adjust this SP.
Adjusts the sub-scan registration of the optional ADF.
[5.0 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Adjusts the trail edge erase of the optional ADF.
[5.0 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Adjusts the rear-side side-to-side registration of the
optional ADF.
[5.0 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
First adjust the copier registration. Then if ADF
registration is incorrect, adjust this SP.
Adjusts the sub-scan magnification of the optional ADF.
[5.0 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
Enables/disables original buckling during rear side
scanning. Disable if the customer is scanning fragile
originals.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Adjusts original buckling for rear side scanning.
[5.0 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches
of the ARDF.
See section 5.1.4
Do not check another item before the result is returned.
5-53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
6
009
010
050
117
118
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
ADF Free Run
ADF Free Run
B156/B220
Function / [ Setting ]
5-54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
6
3
4
5
6
7
12
13
15
16
18
19
22
23
24
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
Function / [ Setting ]
Switches on each electrical component of the finisher.
See section 5.1.5
Service
Tables
118
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Lower Transfer Motor
Exit Motor
Tray Gate Sol
Tray Lift Motor
Jogger Motor
Stapler Motor
Staple Hummer
Stapler Gate Sol
Pos. Roller Sol
Feed-out Motor
Shift Motor
Guide Plate Motor
Fin Free Run 1
Fin Free Run 2
500 Fin All Off
500 Fin Main Motor
500 Fin Jogger Motor
500 Fin Paddle Sol
500 Fin Gear Sol
500 Fin Lever Sol
500 Fin Tray Motor
500 Fin Stapler Motor
500 Fin Free Run 1
500 Fin Free Run 2
SM
5-55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
7
001*
106*
401*
403
502*
503
504*
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Operation Time
Operation Time
Function / [ Setting ]
B156/B220
5-56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
504*
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
23
40
41
58
59
60
61
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
73
80
100
101
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
main013 (Registration
from Duplex)
main014 (Duplex Exit)
main015
(Interchange Exit: ON)
main016
(Paper Exit: On)
main017
(Bridge Exit: On)
main018
(Bridge Relay: On)
main019 (Duplex
Entrance 1: On)
main020 (Duplex
Entrance 2: On)
main023
(Duplex Exit: On)
Finisher040 (Finisher
Entrance: On)
Finisher041
(Finisher Exit: On)
main058
(1st Relay: Off)
main059
(2nd Relay: Off)
main060
(3rd Relay: Off)
main061
(4th Relay: Off)
main063
(Registration: Off)
main064 (Fusing Exit)
main065
(Interchange Exit: Off)
main066
(Paper Exit: Off)
main067
(Bridge Exit: Off)
main068
(Bridge Relay: Off)
main069 (Duplex
Entrance 1: Off)
main070 (Duplex
Entrance 2: Off)
main073
(Duplex Exit: Off)
Wrap around ITB
Finisher100 (Finisher
Entrance: Off)
Finisher 101
(Finisher Exit: Off)
Function / [ Setting ]
Displays the number of jams according to the location
where they were detected.
[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 /step]
Service
Tables
5-57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
7
504*
505
506*
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
103 main103 (Finisher
Staple)
104 main104 (Finisher
Stack Feed-out)
105 main105 (Finisher
Paper Taking out)
107 main107 (Finisher
Drive Error)
108 main108 (Finisher
Tray Lift Error)
109 main109 (Finisher
Jogger Error)
110 main110 (Finisher
Tray Shift Error)
111 main111 (Finisher
Stapler Error)
112 main112 (Finisher
Stack Feed-out)
114 main114 (Finisher
Feed out Error)
115 main115 (Finisher No
Response)
Original Jam Detection
1
Initial jam
5
Regist Sensor005
6
Exit 006
Function / [ Setting ]
Displays the number of jams according to the location
where they were detected.
[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 /step]
55
56
57
B156/B220
5-58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
7
507*
508
801
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Plotter Jam History
1
Latest
2
Latest 1
3
Latest 2
4
Latest 3
5
Latest 4
6
Latest 5
7
Latest 6
8
Latest 7
9
Latest 8
10 Latest 9
Original Jam History
1
Latest
2
Latest 1
3
Latest 2
4
Latest 3
5
Latest 4
6
Latest 5
7
Latest 6
8
Latest 7
9
Latest 8
10 Latest 9
ROM No./ Firmware Version
Function / [ Setting ]
Displays the latest 10 paper jams.
The information contains the following four lines:
Location code (
SP7-504)
Paper size
Total counter (as of the jam)
Date
803*
PM Counter Display
1
Paper
2
PCU
3
Development: M
4
Development: C
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
SM
Development: Y
Development: Bk
Fusing Unit
Charger
Waste Tnr: OPC
Waste Tnr: Belt
Oil
Filter 1
Filter 2
Bank 1 Feed
Bank 2 Feed
Bank 3 Feed
Bank 4 Feed
Manual Feed
Paper Transfer unit
ADF
PCU: Rotation Time
(9045 mm = 120kD)
5-59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
7
804
807
826
827
832*
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
PM Counter Reset
1
Paper
2
PCU
3
Development: M
4
Development: C
5
Development: Y
6
Development: Bk
7
Fusing Unit
8
Charger
9
Waste Tnr: OPC
10 Waste Tnr: Belt
11 Oil
12 Filter 1
13 Filter 2
14 Tray 1 Roller
15 Tray 2 Roller
16 Tray 3 Roller
17 Tray 4 Roller
18 By-pass Feed
19 Paper Transfer Unit
20 ADF
100 All
SC Jam Counter Reset
SC Jam Counter
Reset
Function / [ Setting ]
Clears the PM counters.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
For displaying the counter, see SP7-803.
7-804-2 resets 7-803-2 and 7-803-21.
MF Error Counter
1
Error Total
2
Error Staple
B156/B220
5-60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
833
834
835
836
850
852
901
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Coverage
1
Last: M
2
Last: C
3
Last: Y
4
Last: Bk
5
Average: M
6
Average: C
7
Average: Y
8
Average: Bk
SM
Function / [ Setting ]
Location
5-61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
7
904
906*
907
Mode No.
Function / [ Setting ]
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Waste Tnr Full Cln (Waste Toner Full Clear)
Clears the waste toner bottle full counters.
1
OPC
2
Belt
100 All
PM Counter-PREV
Displays the previous PM counters.
1
PCU
[0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 0 /step]
2
Development: M
3
Development: C
4
Development: Y
5
Development: Bk
6
Fusing Unit
7
Charger
8
Waste Tnr: OPC
9
Waste Tnr: Belt
10 Oil
11 Filter 1
12 Filter 2
13 Tray 1 Roller
14 Tray 2 Roller
15 Tray 3 Roller
16 Tray 4 Roller
17 By-pass Feed
18 Paper Transfer Unit
19 ADF
20 PCU: Turn Time
Replace Cnter (Replace Counter)
Displays the number of times the unit was replaced.
1
PCU
[0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
2
Development: M
3
Development: C
4
Development: Y
5
Development: Bk
6
Fusing Unit
7
Charger
8
Waste Tnr: OPC
9
Waste Tnr: Belt
10 Oil
11 Filter 1
12 Filter 2
13 Tray 1 Roller
14 Tray 2 Roller
15 Tray 3 Roller
16 Tray 4 Roller
17 By-pass Feed
18 Paper Transfer Unit
19 Toner: M
20 Toner: C
21 Toner: Y
22 Toner: Bk
23 ADF
B156/B220
5-62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
7
908
909
913
914
915
920
921
922
923
924
SM
Mode No.
Function / [ Setting ]
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Proc Cont Cnter (Process Control Counter)
Proc Cont Cnter
Displays the process control counter.
[0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Proc Cont Reset (Process Control Reset)
Proc Cont Reset
Resets the process control counter.
Oil Cnter (Oil Counter)
Oil Cnter
Displays the oil supply unit counter.
[0 ~ 65535 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Oil Cln Cnt Rst (Oil Clean Counter Reset)
Oil Cln Cnt Rst
Resets the oil cleaner counter.
Proc Error Log (Process Error Log)
Displays the latest three process control error logs.
1
Log 1
The following are the error codes:
2
Log 2
Development unit initial settings errors:
3
Log 3
110: Incorrect image detected by cyan ID sensor
116: Incorrect image detected by magenta ID
sensor
118: No black image
Development bias settings errors:
113: Incorrect image detected by cyan ID sensor
114: Incorrect image detected by magenta ID
sensor
115: Incorrect image detected by yellow ID sensor
123: Incorrect image detected by black ID sensor
ID sensor errors:
103: ID sensor error
104: ID sensor unable to detect image
105: OPC belt not detected
Machine Counter
Machine Counter
[0 ~ 0xFFFFFFF / 0 / 1 /step]
Machine Cnt Clr (Machine Counter Clear)
Machine Cnt Clr
Clears the machine counter.
Toner End Cnter (Toner End Counter)
1
K Toner
Displays the toner end counter, which indicates the
possible print count after a toner near end.
2
C Toner
3
M Toner
4
Y Toner
Toner End Cnt Clr (Toner End Counter Clear)
Clears the toner end counter (SP7-922).
1
K Toner
2
C Toner
The machine goes back to the normal operation mode if
3
M Toner
the toner end counter is cleared.
4
Y Toner
100 All
Charger Cln Cntr (Charger Clean Counter)
Charger Cln Cntr
Displays how many times the charge corona wire has
been cleaned.
[0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
SP7-926 resets the counter.
5-63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
7
925
926
927
928
929
931
934
Mode No.
Function / [ Setting ]
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Time Cnter Disp (Time Counter Display)
Time Cnter Disp
Displays the current counter of the charge corona unit
cleaning interval. (Number of counts since the last
cleaning)
SP2-801 specifies the charge corona unit cleaning
interval.
Chgr Cln Cnt Rst (Charger Cleaner Counter Reset)
Chgr Cln Cnt Rst
Resets the charge wire cleaner counter (SP7-924).
Time Cnter Clr (Timer Counter Clear)
Time Cnter Clr
Clears the counter of the charge corona unit cleaning
interval.
SP7-927 clears the counter displayed by SP7-925, but
does not clear the value specified with SP2-801.
PREV PM Cnt Clr (Previous PM Counter Clear)
PREV PM Cnt Clr
Clears the previous PM counter (SP7-906).
Replace Cnter Clr (Replace Counter Clear)
Replace Cnter Clr
Clears the replace counter.
Engine Status Display DFU
1
Status 1
These SPs are used for previous models.
2
Status 2
3
Status 3
4
Status 4
5
Status 5
6
Status 6
7
Status 7
8
Status 8
9
Status 9
10 Status 10
11 Status 11
12 Status 12
13 Status 13
14 Status 14
15 Status 15
16 Status 16
17 Status 17
Coverage Cler (Coverage Clear)
1
Average
Clears the average coverage.
This SP clears the following SPs:
SP8-831-1 to 4
SP8-841-1 to 4
2
Toner
Clears the consumed toner bottle number.
This SP clears the following SP:
SP8-781-1 to 4
3
S: PREV Toner
Clears the number of prints copied or printed with last
toner bottle.
This SP clears the following SPs:
SP8-891-1 to4
SP8-901-1 to 4
SP8-911-1 to 4
B156/B220
5-64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
7
934
ALL
Function / [ Setting ]
Clears the number of scanned sheets for each coverage
range.
This SP clears the following SPs:
SP8-851-001004 (0 ~ 10%)
SP8-861-001004 (11 ~ 20%)
SP8-871-001004 (21 ~ 30%)
SP8-881-001004 (31% ~ )
Clears the all coverage related data.
This SP clears SPs that can be cleared in the SP7-9341 to 4.
Service
Tables
255
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
S: Coverage 0-100
SM
5-65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
What They Do
The number of pages scanned to the document server.
The number of pages printed from the document server
The number of pages sent from the document server
C:
F:
P:
S:
L:
Copy application.
Fax application.
Print application.
Scan application.
Local storage
(document server)
O:
Other applications
(external network
applications, for
example)
B156/B220
What it means
Grand total of the items counted for all
applications (C, F, P, etc.).
Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each
application when the job was not stored on the
document server.
Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document
server. The L: counters work differently case by
case. Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored
on the document server; this can be in
document server mode (from the document
server window), or from another mode, such as
from a printer driver or by pressing the Store
File button in the Copy mode window.
Sometimes, they include occasions when the
user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by
case.
Refers to network applications such as Web
Image Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK
(Software Development Kit) will also be counted
with this group in the future.
5-66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
IFax
ImgEdt
K
LS
LSize
Mag
MC
NRS
Org
OrgJam
Palm 2
PC
SM
What it means
By, e.g. T:Jobs/Apl = Total Jobs by Application
More (2> 2 or more, 4> 4 or more
Address Book
Application
Black & White
Black
Cyan
Color Create
Color Mode
Combine
Compression
Delivery
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan,
Print) used to store the job on the document server, for
example.
Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Duplex, printing on both sides
Emulation
Full Color
Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
No Margins
Generation Copy Mode
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter
does not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this
counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10
(e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
Internet Fax
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI,
e.g. border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
Black (YMCK)
Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
Large (paper) Size
Magnification
One color (monochrome)
New Remote Service, which allows a service center to
monitor machines remotely. NRS is used overseas, CSS
is used in Japan.
Original for scanning
Original Jam
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that
allows print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers
on the network, and allows files to moved around,
combined, and converted to different formats.
Personal Computer
5-67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Abbreviation
PGS
PJob
Ppr
PrtJam
PrtPGS
R
Rez
SC
Scn
Sim, Simplex
S-to-Email
SMC
Svr
TonEnd
TonSave
TXJob
YMC
YMCK
What it means
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.
Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as
two pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.
Print Jobs
Paper
Printer (plotter) Jam
Print Pages
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model
A2 only. This machine is under development and currently
not available.
Resolution
Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scan
Simplex, printing on 1 side.
Scan-to-E-mail
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8
counters are recorded in the SMC report.
Server
Toner End
Toner Save
Send, Transmission
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
NOTE: All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5-801-1 Memory All Clear.
B156/B220
5-68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
Function / [ Setting ]
T:Total Jobs
C:Total Jobs
F:Total Jobs
P:Total Jobs
S:Total Jobs
L:Total Jobs
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of
pages processed.
When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer
engineer using the SP modes are not counted.
When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job),
the job is counted at the time when either Delete Data or Specify Output is
specified.
A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L:
counter does not (the document server is not used).
A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the
broadcast are not counted separately).
A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their
destinations. If one transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not
be counted until the transmission has been completed.
A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments,
and when a print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also
increments.
When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and
L: counters both increment.
When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter
increments.
When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter
increments.
When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter
increments. However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax
application, the F: counter increments.
SM
5-69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
T:Jobs/LS
C:Jobs/LS
F:Jobs/LS
P:Jobs/LS
S:Jobs/LS
L:Jobs/LS
O:Jobs/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments.
When you enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter
increments.
When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter
increments.
When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter
increments.
When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
T:Pjob/LS
C:Pjob/LS
F:Pjob/LS
P:Pjob/LS
S:Pjob/LS
L:Pjob/LS
O:Pjob/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the C: counter increments.
When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on
the document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the
C: and P: counters both increment.
When a job already on the document server is printed with another application,
the L: counter increments.
When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within
document server mode, then the L: counter increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application (including
Palm 2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network
application (Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.
B156/B220
5-70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 031
8 032
8 033
8 034
8 035
8 036
8 037
T:Pjob/DesApl
C:Pjob/DesApl
F:Pjob/DesApl
P:Pjob/DesApl
S:Pjob/DesApl
L:Pjob/DesApl
O:Pjob/DesApl
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count
for the application that started the print job is incremented.
When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web
Image Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.
T:TX Jobs/LS
C:TX Jobs/LS
F:TX Jobs/LS
P:TX Jobs/LS
S:TX Jobs/LS
L:TX Jobs/LS
O:TX Jobs/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter
increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2
are sent as an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
8 051
8 052
8 053
8 054
8 055
8 056
8 057
T:TX Jobs/DesApl
C:TX Jobs/DesApl
F:TX Jobs/DesApl
P:TX Jobs/DesApl
S:TX Jobs/DesApl
L:TX Jobs/DesApl
O:TX Jobs/DesApl
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example,
then the O: counter increments.
SM
5-71
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
8 041
8 042
8 043
8 044
8 045
8 046
8 047
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 061
T:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by
the application.
8 062
C:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
8 063
F:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.
P:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
8 064
8 065
8 066
8 067
S:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
L:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified
from the print window within document server mode.
O:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external
application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
8 06x 1
Sort
8 06x 2
8 06x 3
8 06x 4
Stack
Staple
Booklet
8 06x 5
Z-Fold
8 06x 6
Punch
8 06x 7
Other
B156/B220
5-72
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 071
8 072
8 073
8 074
8 075
8 076
8 077
8 07x 1
8 07x 2
8 07x 3
8 07x 4
8 07x 5
8 07x 6
8 07x 7
T:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages
in the job, regardless of which application was used.
C:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on
the number of pages in the job.
F:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the
number of pages in the job.
P:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on
the number of pages in the job.
S:Jobs/PGS
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on
the number of pages in the job.
L:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of
pages in the job.
O:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of Other application jobs (Web
Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the
job.
1 Page
8 07x 8
21~50 Pages
2 Pages
8 07x 9
51~100 Pages
3 Pages
8 07x 10
101~300 Pages
4 Pages
8 07x 11
301~500 Pages
5 Pages
8 07x 12
501~700 Pages
6~10 Pages
8 07x 13
701~1000 Pages
11~20 Pages
8 07x 14
1001~ Pages
For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in
document server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8-076 0xx) increments.
Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP8-073).
Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is
counted at the time the error occurs.
For copy jobs (SP8-072) and scan jobs (SP8-075), the total is calculated by
multiplying the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One
duplex page counts as 2.)
The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the
number of pages of the copy job (SP8-072).
When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the
page is counted.
SM
5-73
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 111
8 113
8 11x 1
8 11x 2
T:FAX TX Jobs
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by
fax, either directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a
telephone line.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
F:FAX TX Jobs
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by
fax directly on a telephone line.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
B/W
Color
T:IFAX TX Jobs
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent,
either directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images
using I-Fax.
NOTE: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
8 123
F:IFAX TX Jobs
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not
stored on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax.
NOTE: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
8 12x 1 B/W
8 12x 2 Color
B156/B220
5-74
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 131
T:S-to-Email Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned
and attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was
used or not.
8 135
S:S-to-Email Jobs
*CTL
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and
attached to e-mail, without storing the original on the document server.
8 13x 1 B/W
8 13x 2 Color
8 13x 3 ACS
8 141
8 145
8 14x 1
8 14x 2
8 13x 3
T:Deliv Jobs/Svr
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned
and sent to a Scan Router server.
S:Deliv Jobs/Svr
*CTL
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in
scanner mode and sent to a Scan Router server.
B/W
Color
ACS
SM
5-75
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 151
T:Deliv Jobs/PC
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned
and sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC).
NOTE: At the present time, SP8 -151 and 8-155 perform identical counts.
8 155
S:Deliv Jobs/PC
*CTL
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned
and sent with Scan-to-PC.
8 15x 1 B/W
8 15x 2 Color
8 13x 3 ACS
8 161
8 163
T:PCFAX TX Jobs
F:PCFAX TX Jobs
*CTL
*CTL
This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending
the data out to the destination from the PC through the copier.
8 191
8 192
8 193
8 195
8 196
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
SP8-191 to 8-196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number
of physical pages.
These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to
adjust color.
Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
B156/B220
5-76
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Examples
If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not
stored, the S: count is 4.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using
the Store File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L:
count is 6.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
8 205
8 211
8 212
8 213
8 215
8 216
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
SM
5-77
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
8 201
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 221
8 221 1
8 221 2
When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count
is 1.
If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double
counting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet
is output.
8 231
8 231 1
8 231 2
8 231 3
8 231 4
8 231 5
Scan PGS/Mode
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to
determine the work load on the ADF.
Large Volume
Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded
in the ADF at one time.
SADF
Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the
ADF.
Mixed Size
Selectable. Select Mixed Sizes on the operation
panel.
Custom Size
Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
Platen
Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the
original directly on the platen.
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application
so if the originals page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
If the user selects Mixed Sizes for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size
count is enabled.
In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2
pages with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
B156/B220
5-78
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
T:Scan PGS/Org
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all
jobs, regardless of which application was used.
8 242
C:Scan PGS/Org
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy
jobs.
8 243
F:Scan PGS/Org
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs.
8 245
S:Scan PGS/Org
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan
jobs.
8 246
L:Scan PGS/Org
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode screen
8 241
8 242
8 243
8 245
8 246
8 24x 1: Text
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8 24x 2: Text/Photo
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8 24x 3: Photo
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8 24x 4: GenCopy, Pale
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
8 24x 5: Map
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
8 24x 6: Normal/Detail
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
8 24x 7: Fine/Super Fine
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
8 24x 8: Binary
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
8 24x 9: Grayscale
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
8 24x 10: Color
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
8 24x 11: Other
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
SM
5-79
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
8 241
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 251
8 252
8 254
8 256
8 257
T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
8 261
T:Scn PGS/ColCr
8 262
C:Scn PGS/ColCr
8 266
L:Scn PGS/ColCr
8 26x 1 Color Conversion
8 26x 2 Color Erase
8 26x 3 Background
8 26x 4 Other
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs show how many times color creation
features have been selected at the operation
panel.
8 281
8 285
T:Scan PGS/TWAIN
S:Scan PGS/TWAIN
*CTL
*CTL
8 291
8 293
8 295
8 296
T:Scan PGS/Stamp
F:Scan PGS/Stamp
S:Scan PGS/Stamp
L:Scan PGS/Stamp
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
B156/B220
5-80
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 301
8 302
8 303
8 305
8 306
8 30x 1
8 30x 2
8 30x 3
8 30x 4
8 30x 5
8 30x 6
8 30x 7
8 30x 8
8 30x 9
8 30x 10
8 30x 254
8 30x 255
SM
T:Scan PGS/Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all
applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP8-441].
C:Scan PGS/Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP8-442].
F:Scan PGS/Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output page size [SP8-443].
S:Scan PGS/Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output page size [SP8-445].
L:Scan PGS/Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from
within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals to
compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP8-446].
A3
A4
A5
B4
B5
DLT
LG
LT
HLT
Full Bleed
Other (Standard)
Other (Custom)
5-81
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 311
8 315
8 31x 1
8 31x 2
8 31x 3
8 31x 4
8 31x 5
T:Scan PGS/Rez
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
S:Scan PGS/Rez
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
NOTE: At the present time, SP8-311 and 8-315 perform identical counts.
1200dpi ~
600dpi~1199dpi
400dpi~599dpi
200dpi~399dpi
~199dpi
B156/B220
5-82
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
T:Total PrtPGS
C:Total PrtPGS
F:Total PrtPGS
P:Total PrtPGS
S:Total PrtPGS
L:Total PrtPGS
O:Total PrtPGS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5-104, 1 A3/DLT
page is counted as 2.
When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored
are counted for the application that stored them.
These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine,
so the following pages are not counted as printed pages:
Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip
sheets.
Reports printed to confirm counts.
All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine
maintenance reports, etc.)
Test prints for machine image adjustment.
Error notification reports.
Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
8 391
8 401
8 402
8 403
8 404
8 405
8 406
LSize PrtPGS
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
NOTE: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are
also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
T:PrtPGS/LS
C:PrtPGS/LS
F:PrtPGS/LS
P:PrtPGS/LS
S:PrtPGS/LS
L:PrtPGS/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the
L: count.
Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F:
count.
SM
5-83
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
8 381
8 382
8 383
8 384
8 385
8 386
8 387
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 411
Prints/Duplex
8 421
8 422
8 423
8 424
8 425
8 426
8 427
8 42x 1
8 42x 2
8 42x 3
8 42x 4
8 42x 5
8 42x 6
8 42x 7
8 42x 8
8 42x 9
8 42x 10
8 42x 11
8 42x 12
8 42x 13
*CTL
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing by the copier application.
F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window
at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing by Other applications
Simplex> Duplex
Duplex> Duplex
Book> Duplex
Simplex Combine
Duplex Combine
2>
2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
4>
4 pages on 1 side (4-Up)
6>
6 pages on 1 side (6-Up)
8>
8 pages on 1 side (8-Up)
9>
9 pages on 1 side (9-Up)
16>
16 pages on 1 side (16-Up)
Booklet
Magazine
These counts (SP8-421 to SP8-427) are especially useful for customers who
need to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper
consumption.
Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1
page.
Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
B156/B220
5-84
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 431
8 432
8 434
8 436
8 437
8 43x 1
8 43x 2
8 43x 3
SM
Magazine
Original
Count
Pages
1
1
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
4
6
4
7
4
8
4
T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below, regardless of which application was used.
C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below with the copy application.
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below with the print application.
L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below.
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below with Other applications.
Cover/Slip Sheet
Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The
count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
Series/Book
The number of pages printed in series (one side) or
printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
User Stamp
The number of pages printed where stamps were
applied, including page numbering and date stamping.
5-85
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
Booklet
Original
Count
Pages
1
1
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
3
6
4
7
4
8
4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 441
8 442
8 443
8 444
8 445
8 446
8 447
8 44x 1
8 44x 2
8 44x 3
8 44x 4
8 44x 5
8 44x 6
8 44x 7
8 44x 8
8 44x 9
8 44x 10
8 44x
254
8 44x
255
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
copy application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within
the document server mode window at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.
A3
A4
A5
B4
B5
DLT
LG
LT
HLT
Full Bleed
Other (Standard)
Other (Custom)
B156/B220
5-86
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 451 1
8 451 2
8 451 3
8 451 4
8 451 5
8 451 6
8 451 7
8 451 8
8 451 9
8 451 10
8 461
8 462
8 463
8 464
8 466
8 46x 1
8 46x 2
8 46x 3
8 46x 4
8 46x 5
8 46x 6
8 46x 7
8 46x 8
SM
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
Bypass
Bypass Tray
Tray 1
Copier
Tray 2
Copier
Tray 3
Paper Tray Unit (Option)
Tray 4
Paper Tray Unit (Option)
Tray 5
LCT (Option)
Tray 6
Currently not used.
Tray 7
Currently not used.
Tray 8
Currently not used.
Tray 9
Currently not used.
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all
applications.
These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is
based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed
rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.
Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a
page printed on one side counts as 1.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy
application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
Normal
Recycled
Special
Thick
Normal (Back)
Thick (Back)
OHP
Other
5-87
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
8 451
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 471
8 471 1
8 471 2
8 471 3
8 471 4
8 471 5
PrtPGS/Mag
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
~49%
50%~99%
100%
101%~200%
201% ~
Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation
panel but performed remotely with an external network application capable of
performing magnification adjustment as well.
Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as
Excel are also counted.
Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on
the document server are not counted.
Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge
copying are counted.
The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically
assigned a rate of 100%.
8 481
8 484
T:PrtPGS/TonSave
*CTL
P:PrtPGS/TonSave
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
NOTE: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print
application.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 491
8 492
8 493
8 496
8 49x 1
8 49x 2
8 49x 3
8 49x 4
T:PrtPGS/Col Mode
C:PrtPGS/Col Mode
F:PrtPGS/Col Mode
L:PrtPGS/Col Mode
B/W
Single Color
Two Color
Full Color
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
8 501
8 504
8 50x 1
8 50x 2
8 50x 3
T:PrtPGS/Col Mode
P:PrtPGS/Col Mode
B/W
Single Color
Full Color
*CTL
*CTL
B156/B220
5-88
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 511
8 514
8 514 1
8 514 2
8 514 3
8 514 4
8 514 5
8 514 6
8 514 7
8 514 8
8 514 9
8 514 10
8 514 11
8 514 12
8 514 13
8 514 14
T:PrtPGS/Emul
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
P:PrtPGS/Emul
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
RPCS
RPDL
PS3
R98
R16
GL/GL2
R55
RTIFF
PDF
PCL5e/5c
PCL XL
IPDL-C
BM-Links
Japan Only
Other
Service
Tables
SP8-511 and SP8-514 return the same results as they are both limited to the
Print application.
Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
SM
5-89
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 521
8 522
8 523
8 524
8 525
8 526
8 52x 1
8 52x 2
8 52x 3
8 52x 4
8 52x 5
8 52x 6
8 52x 7
T:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Copy application.
F:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Fax application.
NOTE: Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available.
P:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Print application.
S:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
Sort
Stack
Staple
Booklet
Z-Fold
Punch
Other
NOTE: 1) If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling,
the unstapled pages are still counted.
2) The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so
jam recoveries are counted.
8 531
B156/B220
Staples
*CTL
5-90
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 581 1
8 581 2
8 581 3
8 581 4
8 581 5
8 581 6
8 581 7
8 581 8
8 581 9
8 581 10
8 581 11
8 581 12
8 581 13
8 581 14
8 581 15
8 581 16
8 582
8 582 1
8 582 2
8 582 3
8 582 4
T:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of
the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these
counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
Total
Total: Full Color
B&W/Single Color
Development: CMY
Development: K
Copy: Color
Copy: B/W
Print: Color
Print: B/W
Total: Color
Total: B/W
Full Colour: A3
Full Colour: B4 JIS or Smaller
Full Colour Print
Mono Colour Print
Full Colour GPC
C:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by
color output.
B/W
Single Color
Two Color
Full Color
8 583
F:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by color
output.
8 583 1 B/W
8 583 2 Single Color
8 584
P:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by
color output.
8 584 1 B/W
8 584 2 Single Color
8 584 3 Full Color
SM
5-91
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
8 581
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 586
8 582 1
8 582 2
8 582 3
8 582 4
8 591
8 591 1
8 591 2
8 591 3
8 631
8 633
8 63x 1
8 63x 2
L:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by color
output.
B/W
Single Color
Two Color
Full Color
O:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages
printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)
applications only.
A3/DLT
Duplex
Staple
T:FAX TX PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
F:FAX TX PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
B/W
Color
If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are
counted separately as B/W or Color.
At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so
SP8-631 and SP8-633 are the same.
The counts include error pages.
If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,
the count is done for each destination.
Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.
B156/B220
5-92
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 641
T:IFAX TX PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax
images using I-Fax.
8 643
F:IFAX TX PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax
images using I-Fax.
8 64x 1 B/W
8 64x 2 Color
8 651
8 655
8 65x 1
8 65x 2
T:S-to-Email PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an email for both the Scan and document server applications.
S:S-to-Email PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an email for the Scan application only.
B/W
Color
NOTE: 1) The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored
on the HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not
counted.
2) If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses,
the count is 10 (the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
3) If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the
count is 50 (the document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP
server).
4) Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a
10-page document to a large number of destinations, the count may be
divided and counted separately. For example, if a 10-page document is
sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and
the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).
SM
5-93
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are
counted separately as B/W or Color.
At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so
SP8-641 and SP8-643 are the same.
The counts include error pages.
If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,
the count is done for each destination.
Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 661
T:Deliv PGS/Svr
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by both Scan and LS applications.
8 665
S:Deliv PGS/Svr
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by the Scan application.
8 66x 1 B/W
8 66x 2 Color
NOTE: 1) The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the
HDD of the Scan Router server.
2) If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes,
the counts are not done.
3) The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at
the Scan Router server.
8 671
T:Deliv PGS/PC
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder
on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
8 675
S:Deliv PGS/PC
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scanto-PC with the Scan application.
8 67x 1 B/W
8 67x 2 Color
B156/B220
5-94
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 681
8 683
T:PCFAX TXPGS
F:PCFAX TXPGS
*CTL
*CTL
This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC
through the copier to the destination.
When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting,
the pages are only counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location
A and location B. The counter goes up by 10, not 20.)
T:TX PGS/LS
C:TX PGS/LS
F:TX PGS/LS
P:TX PGS/LS
S:TX PGS/LS
L:TX PGS/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
NOTE: 1) Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are
added to the count.
2) If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages
stored are counted for the application that stored them.
3) When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is
done for the number of pages sent to each destination.
8 701
8 701 1
8 701 2
8 701 3
8 701 4
8 701 5
8 711
8 711 1
8 711 2
8 711 3
8 711 4
SM
TX PGS/Port
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to
send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via
ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
PSTN-1
PSTN-2
PSTN-3
ISDN (G3, G4)
Network
T: Scan PGS/Comp
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of total pages compressed by each
compression method.
JPEG/ JPEG2000
TIFF (Multi/ Single)
PDF
Other
5-95
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
8 691
8 692
8 693
8 694
8 695
8 696
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 715
8 715 1
8 715 2
8 715 3
8 715 4
8 741
8 741 1
8 741 2
8 741 3
8 741 4
8 741 5
8 771
8 771 1
8 771 2
8 771 3
8 771 4
8 771 5
8 781
8 781 1
8 781 2
8 781 3
8 781 4
8 791
B156/B220
S: Scan PGS/Comp
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages for the scanner compressed by each
compression method.
JPEG/ JPEG2000
TIFF (Multi/ Single)
PDF
Other
RX PGS/Port
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to
receive them.
PSTN-1
PSTN-2
PSTN-3
ISDN (G3,G4)
Network
Dev Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the
development rollers) for black and other color toners.
Total
K
Y
M
C
No. of Toner
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.
NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in SP8781-001 through -004 are the same.
K
The number of black-toner bottle
Y
The number of yellow-toner bottle
M
The number of magenta-toner bottle
C
The number of cyan-toner bottle
LS Memory Remain
*CTL
5-96
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 801 1
8 801 2
8 801 3
8 801 4
8 831
8 831 1
8 831 2
8 831 3
8 831 4
8 841
8 841 1
8 841 2
8 841 3
8 841 4
8 851
8 851 1
8 851 2
8 851 3
8 851 4
8 861
8 851 1
8 851 2
8 851 3
8 851 4
8 871
8 871 1
8 871 2
8 871 3
SM
Toner Remain
*CTL
[0~100/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP
allows the user to check the toner supply at any time.
NOTE: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps)
is better than other machines in the market that can only measure in
increments of 10 (10% steps).
K
Y
M
C
Coverage Average
*BCU
[0~100/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the average coverage by color. (
SP7-833)
K
Y
M
C
*BCU
[0~100/ 0 / 1]
Coverage Newest
Page
These SPs display the coverage of the last print by color. (
SP7-833)
K
Y
M
C
Coverage: 0-10%
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of
each color is from 0% to 10%.
S: BK
S: Y
S: M
S: C
Coverage: 11-20%
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of
each color is from 11% to 20%.
S: BK
S: Y
S: M
S: C
Coverage: 21-30%
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of
each color is from 21% to 30%.
S: BK
S: Y
S: M
5-97
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
8 801
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 871 4
8 881
8 881 1
8 881 2
8 881 3
8 881 4
8 891
8 891 1
8 891 2
8 891 3
8 891 4
8 901
8 901 1
8 901 2
8 901 3
8 901 4
8 911
8 911 1
8 911 2
8 911 3
8 911 4
B156/B220
S: C
Coverage: 31%*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of
each color is 31% or higher.
K
Y
M
C
Page/Toner Bottle
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of sheets output by the scan application.
K
Y
M
C
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Page/Toner Bottle
Prev 1
These SPs display the number of sheet output by the scan application with
the previously replaced units.
K
Y
M
C
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Page/Toner Bottle
Prev 2
These SPs display the number of sheet output by the scan application with
the previously replaced units.
K
Y
M
C
5-98
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
8 941 1
8 941 2
8 941 3
8 941 4
8 941 5
8 941 6
8 941 7
8 941 8
8 941 9
8 951
8 951 1
8 951 2
8 951 3
8 951 4
8 951 5
8 951 6
8 951 7
8 951 8
8 951 9
8 951 10
SM
Machine Status
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation
mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine
operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
Operation Time
Engine operation time. Does not include time while
controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).
Standby Time
Engine not operating. Includes time while controller
saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in
Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
Energy Save Time
Includes time while the machine is performing
background printing.
Low Power Time
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.
Includes time while machine is performing
background printing.
Off Mode Time
Includes time while machine is performing
background printing. Does not include time machine
remains powered off with the power switches.
Down Time/SC
Total down time due to SC errors.
Down Time/PrtJam
Total down time due to paper jams during printing.
Down Time/OrgJam Total down time due to original jams during scanning.
Down Time/TonEnd Total down time due to toner end.
AddBook Register
*CTL
These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
User Code
User code registrations.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Mail Address
Mail address registrations.
Fax Destination
Fax destination registrations.
Group
Group destination registrations.
Transfer Request Fax relay destination registrations
for relay TX.
F-Code
F-Code box registrations.
Copy Program
[0~255 / 0 / 255]
Copy application registrations with
the Program (job settings) feature.
Fax Program
Fax application registrations with
the Program (job settings) feature.
Printer Program
Printer application registrations
with the Program (job settings)
feature.
Scanner
Scanner application registrations
Program
with the Program (job settings)
feature.
5-99
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
8 941
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Test Pattern
None
No.
23
24
25
26
29
30
31
32
35
36
38
39
40
41
43
50
51
52
53
54
Test Pattern
1 dot Grid Pattern
(Reverse order of LD1/2 on)
3 lines Grayscale
Horizontal Grayscale 1
Vertical Grayscale 1
Horizontal Grayscale 2
Vertical Grayscale 2
Horizontal Grayscale (600 dpi)
Vertical Grayscale (600 dpi)
Horizontal Grayscale with White Line 1
Vertical Grayscale with White Line 1
Horizontal Grayscale with White Line 2
Vertical Grayscale with White Line 2
Horizontal Grayscale with White Line
(600 dpi)
Vertical Grayscale with White Line
(600 dpi)
Blank image
Vertical Cross Stitch
2 beam
Trimming Area with Crossed Lines
1 dot Grid Pattern 2
1 dot pair Grid Pattern 2
B156/B220
5-100
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
76543210
3. Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in
the table below.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
SM
Reading
Description
Tray 1 Set
Tray 1 Paper End
Tray 1 Paper
Near End
Tray 1 Paper Size
Tray 2 Set
Tray 2 Paper End
Tray 2 Paper
Near End
Tray 2 Paper Size
Registration Sensor
Paper feed sensor 1
Paper feed sensor 2
Right Cover SW
Exit Sensor
Paper Overflow
Exit Cover Switch
Interchange Unit Set
Interchange Exit
By-pass Tray Set
By-pass Paper End
0
Set
Paper End
Not near end
Near end
(Upper relay)
(Lower relay)
1
Not set
Paper is
present
5-101
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Not set
Paper is
present
Near end
Not detected
Not detected
Not detected
Open
Not detected
Not full
Open
Not set
Not detected
Set
Paper is
Paper End
present
(See table 2.)
Set
Not set
Paper is
Paper End
present
Not End
End
Detected
Not detected
Detected
Not detected
B156/B220
Service
Tables
SP5-803
-XXX
1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SP5-803
-XXX
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
46
47
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
B156/B220
Reading
Description
PCU-Coil Paper
Check
PPI-Level: Bit 0
Toner End: M
Toner End: C
Toner End: Y
Toner End: K
O/B Waste Toner
Sensor
O/B Waste Toner
Switch
Belt Mark
T/B Waste Toner
Sensor
T/B Waste Toner
Switch
LD 5V Cover
Left Cover
Right Upper Cover
Front Cover
Main Motor Lock
Paper Feed Motor
Lock
Polygon Motor Lock
1 Bin Set
1 Bin Paper Sensor
Dev. Motor 1: Lock
Dev. Motor 2: Lock
PSU-Fan Lock
Fuser-Fan lock
Duplex Connection
Bank 1 Connection
Bank 2 Connection
Finisher Connection
Bridge Exit Sensor
Bridge Relay Sensor
Bridge Set Sensor
Bridge Right Cover
Bridge Left Cover
Bank Upper Relay
Bank Cover 1
Detected
Not detected
Detected
Not detected
Detected
Not detected
Not end
Not end
Not end
Not end
End
End
End
End
Full
Not full
Set
Not set
Not detected
Detected
Full
Not full
Set
Not set
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Locked
Open
Open
Open
Open
Not locked
Locked
Not locked
Locked
Set
Detected
Not locked
Not set
Not detected
Locked
Not locked
Locked
Not locked
Locked
Locked
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Detected
Detected
Set
Closed
Closed
Not locked
Not locked
Connected
Connected
Connected
Connected
Not detected
Not detected
Not set
Open
Open
No paper
Paper present
No paper
Paper present
Closed
Open
PPI-Level: Bit 1
5-102
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Bank Cover 2
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
86
87
88
89
90
91
SM
Reading
Description
Closed
Open
Not set
Not set
Set
Set
Not end
End
Not end
End
Detected
Not detected
Open
Closed
Detected
Not detected
Set
Set
Set
Not set
Not set
Not set
Detected
Not detected
Detected
Not detected
5-103
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
SP5-803
-XXX
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
North America
81/2" x 11" SEF
B5 SEF
51/2" x 81/2" LEF
11" x 17" SEF
A4 SEF
B5 LEF
81/2" x 11" LEF
81/2" x 14" SEF
Europe/Asia
81/2" x 11" SEF
B5 SEF
A5 LEF
A3 SEF
A4 SEF
B5 LEF
A4 LEF
B4 SEF
Value
00001110
00000110
00001010
00000010
00001100
00000100
00001000
00000000
Value
01110000
Paper Width
B5/8"
Value
10010000
00110000
10110000
A5/5.5"
B6
11010000
11000000
Europe/Asia
Detected
Detected
Detected
Detected
Detected
Detected
Detected
None
None
Detected
None
Code
10000100
10001101
10000101
00000101
00001110
00000110
10100000
10001101
10000101
00100110
00000110
0: pushed
1: not pushed
North America
Detected
None
None
Detected
Detected
None
Detected
Detected
Detected
Detected
Detected
B156/B220
5-104
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Code
11111111
11111110
11111101
11111100
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
76543210
3. Check the status of bit 0 for the required item listed in the table below.
No.
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
SM
Reading
0
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Cover closed
ADF closed
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
5-105
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Cover opened
ADF opened
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
B156/B220
Service
Tables
B156S505.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
00000000
Bit
76543210
3. Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in
the table below.
No.
Description
1
2
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
14
17
18
21
23
35
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
Entrance Sensor
Tray Exit Sensor
Staple Entrance Sensor
Stapler Home Position Sensor
Jogger Fence Home Position Sensor
Feed-out Belt Home Position Sensor
Stapler Tray Paper
Stapler Rotation Home Position
Staple Sensor
Staple Sheet Sensor
Exit Plate Home Position Sensor
Tray Shift Home Position Sensor
Stack Height Sensor
Tray Lower Limit Sensor
Paper Limit
500 Fin Entrance Sensor
500 Fin Exit Sensor
500 Fin Jogger Home Position Sensor
500 Fin Top Cover Sensor
500 Fin Height Sensor
500 Fin Lever Sensor
500 Fin Upper Limit Sensor
500 Fin Near Limit Sensor
500 Fin Staple Cover Sensor
500 Fin Stapler Home Position Sensor
500 Fin Staple End Sensor
500 Fin Staple Sensor
500 Fin Stapler Lock Sensor
B156/B220
Reading
0
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Closed
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Closed
Activated
Activated
Activated
Locked
5-106
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Opened
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Opened
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Not Locked
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Service
Tables
NOTE: You cannot exit and close this display until you touch OFF to switch off
the output check currently executing. Do not keep an electrical
component switched ON for a long time.
B156S505.WMF
SM
Description
Feed Mot: 89 mm/s
Feed Mot: 120 mm/s
Feed Mot: 178 mm/s
Feed Mot: 240 mm/s
Upper Paper Feed
Clutch
Lower Paper Feed
Clutch
Upper Relay Roller
Clutch
Lower Relay Roller
Clutch
Transfer Motor: Half
Speed
5-107
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SP5-804
-XXX
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
53
54
55
56
57
58
B156/B220
Description
Transfer Motor: Low
Speed
Regist Clutch
Interchange Upper
Gate
Interchange Lower
Gate
By-pass Feed Clutch
By-pass Pick-Up
Solenoid
Development Clutch: M
Development Clutch: C
Development Clutch: Y
Development Clutch: K
Lubricant Clutch
Main Motor (Forward)
Main Motor Half Speed
(Forward)
Main Motor (Reverse)
Main Motor Half Speed
(Reverse)
Polygon Motor
LD On
Polygon Motor + LD
Transfer 2nd Solenoid
T/B Cleaning Clutch
T/B Cleaning Solenoid
Engine Ready Signal
ID sensor LED
QL
Toner End Led
Charger Bias
Development Bias 1
Development Bias 2
Belt Transfer
Paper Transfer: +
Paper Transfer:
T/B Cleaning: +
Discharge
Fuser Main Relay
Fusing Bias
Scanner Lamp
Development Motor 1
(Fwd)
Development Motor 1
High Sped (Fwd)
Development Motor 1
(Rev)
5-108
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
60
61
62
63
100
101
102
103
110
111
112
120
121
122
123
124
125
130
131
132
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
160
161
162
SM
Description
Development Motor 1
High Speed (Rev)
Development Motor 2
(Fwd)
Development Motor 2
High Sped (Fwd)
Development Motor 2
(Rev)
Development Motor 2
High Speed (Rev)
Bank Upper Feed Cl
Bank Lower Feed Cl
Bank Feed Motor: L
Bank Feed Motor: H
Shift Tray Motor: CW
Shift Tray Motor: CCW
Shift Tray Motor: Run
Duplex Reverse Motor
(Forward)
Duplex Reverse Motor
(Reverse)
Duplex Feed Motor
(Forward)
Duplex Feed Motor
(Reverse)
Duplex Solenoid
Duplex Free Run
Bridge Motor: H
Bridge Motor: L
Bridge Gate Sol
Fusing Fan: H
Fusing Fan: L
Dev Fan: H
Dev. Fan: L
Cooling Fan: H
Cooling Fan: L
Ozone Fan: Hi
Ozone Fan: Low
Scanner Fan: Hi
Scanner Fan: Low
Bridge Cooling Fan: H
Bridge Cooling Fan: L
PSU Fan
Service
Tables
SP5-804
-XXX
59
5-109
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Description
Feed Motor (Forward)
Feed Motor (Reverse)
Transport Motor (Forward)
Feed Clutch
Pick-up Solenoid
Junction Gate Solenoid
Stamp Solenoid
B156/B220
Description
1000-sheet finisher
Fin All Off
Upper Transfer Motor
Lower Transfer Motor
Exit Motor
Tray Gate Sol
Tray Lift Motor
Jogger Motor
Stapler Motor
Staple Hummer
Stapler Gate Sol
Pos. Roller Sol
Feed-out Motor
Shift Motor
Guide Plate Motor
Fin Free Run 1
Fin Free Run 2
No.
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
Description
500-sheet finisher
500 Fin All Off
500 Fin Main Motor
500 Fin Jogger Motor
500 Fin Paddle Sol
500 Fin Gear Sol
500 Fin Lever Sol
500 Fin Tray Motor
500 Fin Stapler Motor
500 Fin Free Run 1
500 Fin Free Run 2
5-110
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Service
Tables
SM
5-111
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B156/B220
5-112
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Counter values
Machine serial number
Plug & play brand name and
production name setting
Normally, this SP mode should not be used. This procedure is necessary only after
replacing the NVRAM, or when the copier malfunctions because the NVRAM is
damaged.
Using an SD card
1. Upload the NVRAM data to an SD card (
5.4.2 NVRAM Data Upload).
2. Print out all SMC data lists (SP5-990).
NOTE: Be sure to print out all the lists. If the NVRAM data upload is not
completed, it is necessary to manually change the SP mode settings.
4. Press the number for the item that you want to initialize. The number you select
determines which application software is initialized. Touch 1, for example, if you
want to initialize all modules; or select the appropriate number from the table
below.
SM
No.
1
2
What It Initializes
All Clear
Engine Clear
5
6
7
Printer Application
Scanner Application
Comments
Initializes items 2 ~ 15 below.
Initializes all registration settings for the engine and
process settings.
Initializes default system settings, CSS settings,
operation display coordinates, and ROM update
information.
Initializes the registration setting for the image
memory handler. (Deletes all image files in the
HDD).
Initializes the automatic delete time setting for
stored documents.
Initializes all copier application settings.
Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook
timer.
Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered,
the printer SP bit switches, and the printer CSS
counter.
Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and
all the scanner SP modes.
5-113
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
3. Open SP5-801.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
No.
10
11
What It Initializes
Web Service/Network
Application
NCS
(Network Control Service)
12
R-FAX
14
15
16
MIRS Setting
17
CCS
Comments
Deletes the network file application management
files and thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings
(IP addresses also), SmartNetMonitor for Admin,
WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET
settings.
Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
Initializes the DCS (Delivery & Receive Control Server)
settings
Initializes the UCS (User Directory Control Server)
settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report
Service) settings.
Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control
Service) settings.
5. Touch EXECUTE, and turn the main switch off and on.
6. Download the NVRAM data from an SD card (
5.4.2).
B156/B220
5-114
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER SERVICE MODE
italics
*
DFU
SP1
001
003
004
005
What it means
Example: [-9 ~ +9 / +3.0 / 0.1 mm step]. The setting can be
adjusted in the range 9, value reset to +3.0 after an NVRAM
reset, and the value can be changed in 0.1 mm steps with each
key press.
Comments added for your reference.
This value is stored in NVRAM. After a RAM reset, the default
value (factory setting) is restored.
Denotes Design or Factory Use. Do not change this value
Mode Number
Bit Switch
1
Bit Switch 1 Settings
2
Bit Switch 2 Settings
3
Bit Switch 3 Settings
4
Bit Switch 4 Settings
5
Bit Switch 5 Settings
6
Bit Switch 6 Settings
7
Bit Switch 7 Settings
8
Bit Switch 8 Settings
Clear Setting
1
Initialize Printer System
3
Delete Program
Print Summary
Print Printer Summary
Function / [Setting]
Adjusts bit switch settings.
Note: Currently the bit switches are not being used.
Service
Tables
Notation
[range / default / step]
Display Version
101
SM
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Recalls a set of gamma settings.
5-115
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER SERVICE MODE
SP1
102
Mode Number
Resolution Settings
Toner Control Mode
Selection
Function / [Setting]
Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer
gamma adjustment.
1800x600 Photo
1800x600 Text
1800x600 Graph
600x600 Photo
600x600 Text
103
Test Page
1
Color Gray Scale
2
Color Pattern
104
105
106
Gamma Adjustment
1
Black: Highlight
2
Black: Shadow
3
Black: Middle
4
Black: IDmax
21 Cyan: Highlight
22 Cyan: Shadow
23 Cyan: Middle
24 Cyan: IDmax
41 Magenta: Highlight
42 Magenta: Shadow
43 Magenta: Middle
44 Magenta: IDmax
61 Yellow: Highlight
62 Yellow: Shadow
63 Yellow: Middle
64 Yellow: IDmax
Save Tone Control Value
Save Tone Control
Value
Toner Limit
1
Toner Limit Photo
B156/B220
5-116
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER SERVICE MODE
Description
A3/DLT Double
Count
5907
7832
Self-Diagnose
Result Display
Service
Tables
5801
SM
5-117
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER SERVICE MODE
1
004
005
009
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[Compression Type]
Compression Type
Function / [Setting]
Selects the compression type for binary picture
processing.
[ 1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step ]
1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR
2
021
Mode Number
Function / [Setting]
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[Compression ratio of gray-scale]
1
Compression ratio
Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing
(Normal image)
mode (JPEG) for the three settings that can be
selected at the operation panel.
[ 5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ]
5: lowest compression ratio,
95: highest compression ratio
2
Compression ratio
[ 5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step ]
(High-comp image)
3
Compression ratio
[ 5 to 95 / 30 / 1 /step ]
(Low-comp image)
4
Compression ratio
[ 5 to 95 / 60 / 1 /step ]
(High Lv2-comp image)
5
Compression ratio
[ 5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]
(Low Lv2-comp image)
B156/B220
5-118
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER SERVICE MODE
L1
L2
L3
W1
W2
Code
5
132
165
133
128
W1
P
P
W2
P
P
Sensors
L1
P
P
P
Other combinations
L2
P
P
P
L3
P
P
P: Activated
: Deactivated
SM
5-119
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
B156S540.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
[A]
7. Monitor the downloading status
on the operation panel.
While downloading is in
B156I451.WMF
progress, the panel displays
Writing. When downloading has been completed, the panel displays
Completed.
The Start key lights red while downloading is in progress, and then lights
green again after downloading is completed. (only for "Operation Panel"
downloading)
CAUTION
Never switch off the power while downloading. Switching off the power while the
new software is being downloading will damage the boot files in the controller.
8. After confirming that downloading is completed, turn off the main power and
remove the SD card.
9. If more software needs to be downloaded, repeat steps 1 to 7.
10. Turn the main power on and confirm that the new software loads and that the
machine starts normally.
11. After installing new scanner firmware, perform copier SP5-801-9 (Memory All
Clear Scanner Application). Then input scanner settings that are different
from the defaults (see the SMC prints of 5-990-22 and -23 that you made
earlier).
NOTE: If the download failed, an error message appears on the panel. In this case,
download the firmware again using the SD card.
In this condition, if the firmware cannot be downloaded again, do the
following:
B156/B220
5-120
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
Service
Tables
SM
5-121
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
[Slot 3]
5. Open SP5-824.
6. Touch EXECUTE to start
uploading the NVRAM data.
[B]
[A]
B156I451.WMF
B156/B220
5-122
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
[Slot 2]
[Slot 3]
[B]
[A]
SM
5-123
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
B156I451.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SOFTWARE RESET
Procedure 1
1. Turn the main power switch off and on.
2. Check that Now loading. Please wait is displayed and that the copy window
opens.
Procedure 2
1. Press and hold down the and keys together until the machine beeps (for
about 10 seconds).
2. Release both buttons.
3. Check that Now loading. Please wait is displayed and that the copy window
opens.
B156S503.WMF
3. When the display asks if you want to reset the system settings, touch Yes.
4. Check that the completion message appears, and touch Exit.
B156/B220
5-124
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET
B156S504.WMF
3. When the display asks if you want to reset the Copier Document Server
settings, touch Yes.
Service
Tables
SM
5-125
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USER TOOLS
System Settings
In the User Tools/Counter display, touch System Settings.
Touch a tab to display the settings. If the Next button is lit in the lower right corner,
touch it to display more options. Specify the settings, touch Exit to return to the
User Tools/Counter display, and then touch Exit to return to the copy window.
Inquiry
In the User/Tools Counter display, touch Inquiry.
The following SP mode settings will be displayed.
Service Telephone Number (SP5-812-1)
Service Facsimile Number (SP5-812-2)
Telephone Number for ordering consumables (SP5-812-3)
Sales Telephone Number (SP5-812-4)
Toner Type (SP5-841-1~4)
B156/B220
5-126
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DIP SWITCHES
Rev. 11/2005
Counter
In the User/Tools Counter display, touch Counter.
The total counters will be displayed.
View the settings, touch Print Counter Exit to return to the User Tools/Counter
display, and then touch Exit to return to the copy window.
OFF
Boot-up from SD card
Default: OFF DFU
Default: ON DFU
ON
Default: Boot-up from Machine
If the controller firmware download attempt failed, you must boot the machine from
the SD card. To do this, set DIP SW 1 on the controller board to OFF.
Function
Not used
Destination
Not used
Debug
Mode
Settings
Default: ON DFU
Off:
Off:
Off: JAN
On: NA
Off:
Off:
Default: OFF DFU
Default: OFF DFU
Off:
Off: EU
On:
On:
On: AA
Off:
On:
Off: TWN
Off:
Off:
On: CHN
On:
JAN: Japan, NA: North America, EU: Europe, AA: Asia, TWN: Taiwan, CHN: China
SM
5-127
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
DIP
SW
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SD CARD APPLICATION MOVE
B156/B220
5-128
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SD CARD APPLICATION MOVE
Move Exec
Do this procedure to move an application from one SD card to another.
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Put the destination SD card in SD Card Slot 1 (upper slot).
3. Put the source SD card into SD Card Slot 3 (lower slot). This SD card holds the
application program that you want to copy to the destination SD card in Slot 1.
4. Turn the main switch on.
5. Go into the SP mode.
6. Do SP5873-001 Move Exec.
7. Follow the messages on the operation panel to complete the procedure.
8. Turn the main switch off.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3.
10. Turn the main switch on.
11. Check that the application programs combined on the SD card in Slot 1 operate
correctly.
Undo Exec
SM
5-129
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
Do this procedure to repair the original source SD card if you accidentally move the
application to a different SD card.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
3. On the control panel keypad, press 1 then press . This switches the Save
Debug Log feature on.
NOTE: The default setting is 0 (OFF). This feature must be switched on in
order for the debug information to be saved.
B156/B220
5-130
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
4. Next, select the target destination where the debug information will be saved.
Under 5857 Save Debug Log, touch 2 Target, enter 2 with the operation
panel key to select the hard disk as the target destination, then press .
COPY : SP-5-857-002
Save Debug Log
Target (2:HDD 3:SD)
_2_
Initial 2
Engine SC Error
Controller SC Error
Any SC Error
Jam
__
OFF
__
Service
Tables
COPY : SP-5-858-001
Debug Save When
Engine SC Error
__
ON
__
NOTE: For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in
Section 4. Troubleshooting.
SM
5-131
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
6. Next, select the one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug
information. Touch 5859.
Under 5859 press the appropriate key item for the module that you want to
record.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number, then press .
NOTE: Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each
key.
The example below shows Key 1 with 2222 entered.
COPY : SP-5-859-001
Debug Save Key No.
Key 1
___2222
The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in
parentheses indicate the names of the modules.)
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10
KEY NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
COPY
4848 (COPY)
2224 (BCU)
PRINTER
2222 (SCS)
2223 (SRM)
256 (IMH)
1000 (ECS)
1025 (MCS)
4400 (GPS)
4500 (PDL)
4600 (GPS-PM)
2000 (NCS)
2224 (BCU)
SCANNER
WEB
5375 (Scan)
5682 (NFA)
3000 (NCS)
2000 (NCS)
5682 (NFA)
6600 (WebDB)
3300 (PTS)
6666 (WebSys)
2000 (NCS)
NOTE: The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero (0).
Key to Acronyms
Acronym
ECS
GPS
GSP-PM
IMH
MCS
Meaning
Engine Control Service
GW Print Service
GW Print Service Print Module
Image Memory Handler
Memory Control Service
Acronym
NFA
PDL
PTS
SCS
SRM
NCS
WebDB
Meaning
Net File Application
Printer Design Language
Print Server
System Control Service
System Resource
Management
Web Document Box
(Document Server)
B156/B220
5-132
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
Please keep the following important points in mind when you are doing this setting:
Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer,
Scanner, and Web memory modules.
The initial settings are all zero.
These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the
settings, especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting,
enter a zero for that key.
You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the
corresponding 4-digit numbers from the table.
You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006~010. For
example, if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the
settings from the 9 available selections for the PRINTER column only.
One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is
limited to 4 MB.
3. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh
representative by email, or just send the SD card by mail.
SM
5-133
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
2. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857-009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4
MB)) to write the debugging data to the SD card.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
(Clear Modes).
2. On the control panel, enter 01 then hold down for at least 3 sec. until
the machine beeps then release. This saves the debug log to the hard disk for
later retrieval with an SD card by the service representatives.
3. Switch the machine off and on to resume operation.
The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk so the service
representatives can retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD to
an SD card.
B156/B220
5-134
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written
directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation
is executed in the log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot. (This
function does not copy from one slot to another.) Each SD card can hold up to 4
MB of file data. Unique file names are created for the data during the copy
operation to prevent overwriting files of the same name. This means that log data
from more than one machine can be copied onto the same SC card. This
command does not execute if there is no log on the HDD for the name of the
specified key.
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. However, this is not a
completely empty file. The created file will hold the number 2225 as the SCS key
number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is
created on the HDD when the first log is stored on the HDD, but this operation
takes time. This creates the possibility that the machine may be switched off and
on before the log can be created completely. If you execute this SP to create the
log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time required to acquire
the log information and save onto the HDD. With the file already created on the
HDD for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a new log file does not
require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-011 to delete the debug
log data from the HDD and then execute this SP (SP5857-016).
SP5857-017
SM
5-135
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
Service
Tables
SP5857-016
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
22
10
21
11
20
12
19
13
14
18
17
16
B156D001.WMF
1. Scanner HP sensor
2. ADF exposure glass
3. Exposure glass
4. 2nd carriage
5. Scanner lamp
6. 1st carriage
7. Original width sensor
8. Scanner motor
9. Sensor board unit
10. Original length sensors
11. Fusing unit
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
8
9
10
11
29
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
28
27
20
26
21
22
23
25
24
B156V101.WMF
B156/B220
6-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
4
5
8
9
21
10
20
11
19
18
12
13
16
15
SM
14
B156D002.WMF
6-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[HK]
[HC]
[IK, C]
[S]
[R]
[IY, M]
[Q]
2
[HY]
[HM]
[P ]
[O ]
[J]
[P2]
[O2]
Motor (Type)
Scanner [B]
(Stepper)
Development [IK&C]
(DC brushless)
Development [IY&M]
(DC brushless)
Main [G]
(DC brushless)
B156/B220
[L]
[K]
B156V108.WMF
Drives ...
Scanner motor gear [C]
Development clutches [HK, C] Development unit for K and C
[N] [M]
6-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
2
3
4
5
6
10
9
7
8
SM
1. Anti-condensation heater
2. Scanner HP sensor
4. Lamp stabilizer
9. Operation panel
6-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Detailed
Descriptions
B156D003.WMF
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Image Transfer
3
2
5
6
7
8
18
17
16
15
10
14
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
11
13
12
B156D004.WMF
B156/B220
6-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Paper Path
2
3
4
5
19
6
18
7
17
8
16
15
14
9
13
12
11
10
B156D005.WMF
SM
6-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Detailed
Descriptions
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Development Units
1
2
10
9
8
7
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B156D006.WMF
B156/B220
6-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Boards
1
2
17
4
16
15
14
6
13
7
12
11
10
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
SM
9. PSU fan 1
10. Breaker
11. Controller fan
12. Temperature/humidity sensor
13. Controller board
14. High voltage supply board
15. Oil pump
16. Fusing unit fan
17. Paper exit fan
6-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
B156D007.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARD STRUCTURE
Printer
Options
Memory
: Standard
: Option
NIB
Fax Options
Controller
Fax Unit
Xenon Lamp
HDD
Lamp
Stabilizer
Operation
Panel
Scanner
Motor
Polygon
Motor
Scanner IOB
ARDF
Printer/
Scanner
BICU
APS
Thermistors
SBU
LD Units
PSU
Fusing Lamps
Paper
Tray Unit/
LCT
1-Bin Tray
Interchange
LSD
IOB
By-pass
Duplex
Bridge
Unit
High
Voltage
P.P
Sensors
Clutches/
Solenoids
Motors
Finisher
B156D511.WMF
B156/B220
6-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARD STRUCTURE
Detailed
Descriptions
SM
6-11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARD STRUCTURE
6.2.2 CONTROLLER
OPTION
USB
2.5" HDD
(40 GB)
IDE
PS3/
Printer/
Scanner
DATA
Overwite
Security Unit
SD Card
RAM
(256 MB)
SD Slot 1
SD Slot 2
SD Slot 3
SDRAM
DIMM
NIB
Local BUS
System
Flash ROM
(16 MB)
On-board
SDRAM
(512 MB)
ASIC
CPU
NVRAM
(128 kB)
PCI BUS
CONTROLLER
PCI
PCI
PCI
PCI
BICU
IEEE1394/
Wireless LAN/
Bluetooth/
IEEE1284
File Format
Converter
FCU
G3
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
B156D510.WMF
The controller uses RC2K architecture, which allows the board to control all
applications (copier, printer, scanner, and fax).
The fax option requires FCU installation also.
Systems and application software can be downloaded from the controllers SD
Card slot. For details about how to download software from an SD card (
5.4).
1. CPU:
PMC RM7035C-466MHz
2. ASIC:
This is a dedicated chip developed for use with RC2K architecture. It controls
the following functions: memory, local bus, interrupts, PCI bus, video data,
HDD, network, operation panel, and image processing.
3. Flash ROM:
16MB Flash ROM for the system program
B156/B220
6-12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARD STRUCTURE
4. SDRAM (on-board):
768 MB SDRAM (512MB + 256MB)
5. SD Card Slots:
Three slots are provided for three SD cards. Slot 1 is for the printer and
scanner applications (standard). Slot 2 is for the PostScript 3 or the Data
Overwrite Security applications (optional). Slot 3 is for service purposes, such
as firmware updates.
6. NVRAM:
Stores the engine and controller settings
7. PCI Interface:
For installing the FCU board, File Format Converter, IEEE1394, Bluetooth,
IEEE1284 and wireless LAN. The IEEE1394, wireless LAN, Bluetooth and
IEEE1284 cannot both be installed on the same machine at the same time.
8. HDD:
Used for the document server. Also used for collation, locked print, sample
print, form overlay, and font storage. The hard disk is partitioned as shown
below.
40GB HDD
Function
15,000 MB
Document server
File System 1
500 MB
File System 2
1,000 MB
Downloaded fonts,
forms.
Job spooling area
File System 3
2,400 MB
File System 4
500 MB
Image TMP
16,800 MB
Job Log
10 MB
Job log
Swap
406 MB
Debug, Swap
SDK
1,200 MB
Address book/
Mil data
2,000 MB
Others
1,276 MB
Total
41,092 MB
SM
SDK application
Address book/ Mail box/
Net files
Stamps/ SAF thumbnail
etc.
Comment
Remains stored even after cycling
power off/on.
Remains stored even after cycling
power off/on.
Erased after power off.
Remains stored even after cycling
power off/on.
Erase after power off.
Erased after power off.
Erased after power off.
Erased after power off.
Erased after power off.
Remains stored even after cycling
power off/on.
Remains stored even after power
is turned off/on.
Remains stored even after power
is turned off/on.
Remains stored even after power
is turned off/on.
Remains stored even after power
is turned off/on.
6-13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
Partition
Image Local
Storage
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY PROCESS
3
4
6
B156D008.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Development unit
OPC belt
Image transfer belt cleaning unit
Image transfer belt
Paper transfer roller unit
B156/B220
Quenching lamp
OPC belt cleaning unit
Charge corona unit
Polygonal mirror
6-14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY PROCESS
1. Drum Charge
The corona wire gives the drum a negative charge.
2. Black (K) Image Creation
a) Laser Exposure
The laser diode (LD) emits two laser beams. The laser beams create a latent
image on the OPC surface.
b) Development
The development roller transfers negatively charged toner to the latent
image. The OPC belt surface holds only one toner color at one time.
c) Image Transfer
The OPC belt transfers the single-color toner image to the image transfer
belt.
d) Cleaning
The OPC belt cleaning unit cleans the image transfer belt.
3. Magenta (M) Image Creation
Same as 2 a) through 2 d) above.
4. Cyan (C) Image Creation
Same as 2 a) through 2 d) above.
6. Paper Transfer
The paper transfer roller transfers the combined CMYK toner image to the
paper.
The OPC belt and the image transfer belt can hold two A4-size LEF images on
their surfaces. When printing on A4 LEF or smaller paper, the OPC and image
transfer belts process two images in one cycle. At this time, two sheets of
paper are consecutively output with little interval between them. This speeds up
color print output.
7. Separation
The paper is separated from the image transfer belt when the belt curves away
from it. A discharge plate assists this process.
8. Fusing
The fusing unit fuses the image to the paper.
9. Cleaning
The image transfer belt cleaning unit cleans the belt.
10. Quenching
The quenching lamp erases any remaining charge on the OPC belt.
SM
6-15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
Power on
Environmental
change
B156/B220
Condition
When forced process control is done (engine SP mode
3-001-1)
End of job: When more than 200 sheets have been
printed upon completion of a job. (The interval can be
changed with engine SP3-003-1.) Black-and-white
outputs are not included in this count.
During a job: If the number of prints since process
control gets to 700, printing stops and process control is
done. The interval can be changed with engine SP 3003-1 [default: 200] and engine SP 3-003-2 [default:
500]. Change only SP 3-003-2 if you do not wish to
change the end-of-job interval.
When the fusing pressure roller temperature is 60C or
lower immediately after the power is turned on.
When the change in the temperature/humidity sensor
output since the previous process control exceeds a
certain value. SP3-004 can be used to change the
threshold temperature and humidity values.
6-16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Steps
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
Event
Condition
K toner cartridge This is done after clearing the K toner near-end state
or K development (i.e., when a new K development unit is added). The
unit replacement machine idles and when the development roller stops for
10 seconds, indicating that idling is over, process control
occurs.
Color
After the color toner end or near-end state is reset, the
development unit machine idles to transfer color toner to the development
replacement
unit. After idling, process control occurs.
Color toner
After the color toner end or near-end state is reset, the
cartridge
machine idles to transfer color toner to the development
replacement
unit. After idling, process control occurs.
Same as power on process control
24 hours after
previous process
control
PCU replacement After the PCU counter is reset, it is lubricated (new OPC
belt lubricant application mode). Then process control
occurs.
After charge
The wire is cleaned at these times, if a set number of
developments were done since the last cleaning:
corona wire
cleaning
In the middle of a job
At the end of a job
Immediately before the machine goes to low power
mode
For more information:
6.7.2
ACC
Process control is done just before ACC is done (this
process control can be enabled/disabled with SP 3-125).
Steps
, , , g
, , ,
, , ,
6-17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
The following is a brief explanation of process control. This is for your reference. If
the information is helpful for understanding the machine in the field, read the
following explanation.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
development bias values are fine-tuned to correct for any changes in the machine
or temperature/humidity since the last full process control.
This step always has to be done when installing a new development unit. The toner
amount carried by a development roller varies with each unit. (The toner amount
used for a certain development bias is not the same.) Black development bias
initialization (step 3) has to be done more often, because tests have shown that
process control errors occur more often if this is not done.
0
240
0
0
0
0
This is only to give you a rough idea - the exact pixel densities used by this
machine are not shown here.
The net effect is to have two dark pixels surrounded by white pixels on all sides,
repeated all over the paper.
If there is a difference between the target M/A and the detected M/A, the grid
voltage is adjusted.
B156/B220
6-18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNING
6.5 SCANNING
6.5.1 OVERVIEW
1
B156D009.WMF
10
1. Scanner HP sensor
7. Scanner motor
3. Exposure glass
5. Scanner lamp
ADF mode: The ADF feeds the original past the ADF exposure glass. The 1st
scanner moves under the ADF exposure glass. The original does not stay on the
glass, but keeps going to the ADF exit.
SM
6-19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
Book mode: The scanner motor drives the 1st and 2nd scanners. The original is
scanned from left to right.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNING
[C]
[A]
[F]
[E]
[D]
[B]
B156D010.WMF
Scanner drive: Scanner motor [A] Scanner drive pulley [B and C], and scanner
drive shaft [D] Scanner wires [E and F] 1st [G] and 2nd [H] scanners
Book Mode
The scanner I/O board controls the scanner motor.
The 1st scanner moves twice as fast as the 2nd scanner.
For reduction/enlargement, the scanning speed depends on the magnification ratio.
The returning speed is always the same, regardless of magnification ratio.
Sub-scan magnification is controlled by the scanner motor speed. Main-scan
magnification is controlled by image processing on the BICU board.
NOTE: Sub-scan magnification errors can be corrected by changing the scannermotor speed (
SP4-008).
ARDF Mode
The 1st and 2nd scanners stay at their home positions; the scanner HP sensor
detects the 1st scanner position, and the 2nd scanner position is linked with that of
the 1st scanner.
Sub-scan magnification is controlled by the ADF feed speed. Main-scan
magnification is controlled by image processing on the BICU board.
NOTE: Sub-scan magnification errors can be corrected by changing the ADF feedspeed (
SP6-006-5).
B156/B220
6-20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNING
[A]
[B]
B156D011.WMF
The original width sensors [A] detect the original width, and the original length
sensors [B] detect the original length.
The on/off signals received from the sensors are used to detect the original size.
When the by-pass tray is used, the machine assumes that the paper is set
lengthwise. So, if A4 paper is set sideways on the by-pass tray, the machine
assumes it is A3 paper (set lengthwise) and scans the whole A3 area, disregarding
the original size sensors. However, when the registration sensor detects that the
paper is not A3 but only A4 sideways, paper feed stops and a jam occurs. This is to
prevent large amounts of toner transferring from the transfer belt to the transfer
roller. (Also see SP 1-940.)
NOTE: Original size detection using the ARDF is described in the manual for the
ARDF.
The table (next page) shows the sizes that are detected for various sensor outputs.
SM
6-21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
The SBU board checks each sensor signal at the following times:
As the platen cover is closed
When the start key is pushed, if the platen cover stays open.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNING
L1
L2
L3
W1
W2
B156D012.WMF
Original Size
Metric
A3
B4
F4
A4-L
B5-L
A4-S
B5-S
A5-L, A5-S
Length Sensor
Inch
11" x 17"
10" x 14"
8.5" x 14" (8" x 13")
8.5" x 11"
11" x 8.5"
5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 5.5"
L3
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
L2
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
L1
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
Width
Sensor
W2
W1
O
O
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
X
O
X
X
SP4-301
display
132
141
165
133
142
5
14
128
B156/B220
6-22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
CCD
6.6.1 OVERVIEW
SBU
BICU
LD Board
Fax
(Option)
HDD
Controller
Memory
Printer
B156D512.WMF
The CCD (Charge-Coupled Device) generates three analog video signals. The
SBU (Sensor Board Unit) converts the three analog signals to 10-bit digital signals.
It sends these signals to the BICU board. The BICU board processes the image,
then the image data is sent to the LD unit.
SM
6-23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
Scanner
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
O R(B)
E
CCD
O
E
O B(R)
E
Analog Amplifier
A/D Converter
10 bit
Analog Amplifier
A/D Converter
10 bit
Analog Amplifier
A/D Converter
10 bit
SBU
Controller
R 10 bit
Field
Memory
G 10 bit
Field
Memory
B 10 bit
SBU
8 bit
ASIC
8 bit
8 bit
BICU
B156D013.WMF
Signal Processing
1. Signal Amplification
Odd-pixel and even-pixel RGB analog signals from the CCD are amplified.
2. Signal Composition
The amplified signals are combined after A/D conversion.
A/D Conversion
The analog signals (CCD output) are converted to 10-bit (1,024 gradations)
digital signals.
White Level Correction
A white reference plate is scanned before the original is scanned.
Data is updated before the original is scanned.
The differences in the white level across the page, including irregularities in the
CCD and the optical parts across the main scan, are corrected.
Others
The SBU controller exchanges the R and B signals if originals are scanned through
the ARDF.
B156/B220
6-24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Detailed
Descriptions
To make sure the scanner VPU control is functioning, output the VPU test pattern
with SP4-907 (for more details, see chapter 4, Troubleshooting).
SM
6-25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
SBU
Shading correction
Picture element correction
Scanner line correction
Scanner gamma correction
Filters
ASIC 1
ADS
Color conversion
Main scan magnification
Printer gamma correction
Error diffusion
Image Separation
ACS
Gradation processing
Image rotation
Image sort
HDD
ASIC 2
ASIC 3
ASIC 4
Controller
LD Unit
BICU
B156D014.WMF
Shading Correction
Auto shading compensates for the possible differences in the light emission level at
the edge and center of a scanned image caused by the scanner lens, or the
differences among the CCD pixels.
B156/B220
6-26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
255
1023
Light
Dark
Fig. 1
B156D015.WMF
255
Filtering
255
Light
Dark
Fig. 2
B156D016.WMF
6-27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Image Separation
The original image is classified into the text and photo (dot screen) areas.
Edge Separation
Used to locate text and line diagrams
Locates areas of strong contrast.
Looks for continuity of black or colored pixels.
Looks for continuity of white pixels around black or colored pixels.
Only uses data from the green CCD.
Dot Screen Separation
If white pixels are not detected around non-white pixels, it is a dot screen area.
Colored Text Separation
Identifies whether the text areas pixels are black or color.
Based on:
1) Differences among the RGB maximum signal levels.
2) Output levels of the RGB video signals.
ACS (Auto Color Selection)
Signal Level
255
204 (50% UCR rate)
153 (50% UCR rate)
Color first
102 128
255
B156D017.WMF
B156D018.WMF
B156/B220
6-28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Color Conversion
Transparency for each color toner is not ideal. Color conversion compensates for
the differences between the ideal and actual characteristics. A matrix converts the
RGB video signals into CMYK video signals while the original is scanned once.
Conversion Matrix
The following color conversion table is an example of the results from the matrix
operation.
Simple color copying.
No special modes applied.
To represent green, the yellow and cyan toners are used in a 1:1 ratio.
Color Conversion Table
Original Color
Toner
Y
M
C
K
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
While the machine changes the scanner speed to reduce or enlarge the original in
the sub-scan direction, the ASIC2 chip on the BICU board handles reduction and
enlargement in the main scan direction.
Scanning and laser writing are done at a fixed pitch (CCD elements cannot be
squeezed or expanded).
Imaginary points are calculated, corresponding to a physical enlargement or
reduction.
Image density is then calculated for each of the imaginary points based on the
image data for the nearest two true points.
The calculated data then becomes the new (reduced or enlarged) image data.
NOTE: The actual calculations for main scan magnification use the polynomial
convolution method. This mathematical process is beyond the scope of a
service manual and will not be covered here.
SM
6-29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
B156D020.WMF
B156D019.WMF
Ideally, the gamma curves for Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and Black should be
identical, as shown in figure 1. However, slight variations in the electrical
components can result in varying gamma curves, as shown in figure 2.
Printer characteristics are much more variable than the scanner. Printer gamma
needs re-calibration and adjustment from time to time.
The Auto Color Calibration (ACC) procedure compensates for any discrepancies
in color reproduction.
ACC makes new gamma curves for each color in each mode (text, photo, and
black text).
After ACC, the gamma curve for each color can be adjusted with service
programs (SP4-918).
4 different modes:
1) ID max.
2) Shadow (High ID)
3) Middle (Middle ID)
4) Highlight (Low ID)
If the previous gamma curve was better, it can be recalled.
Factory settings can be loaded using SP5-610-4.
NOTE: If the factory settings have been overwritten, this will return the new
values, not the actual settings made in the factory. This is deliberate,
since some drift is expected. After a time, the original factory settings
may no longer be suitable.
Factory settings can be overwritten by the current gamma settings using SP5610-5.
B156/B220
6-30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
ID Max.
This mode adjusts the total image density
as shown in figure 3.
Fig. 3
B156D021.WMF
Fig. 4
B156D022.WMF
Fig. 5
Detailed
Descriptions
B156D023.WMF
Fig. 6
SM
6-31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156D024.WMF
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Dark
Light
K
C
Y
K
C
M
B156D025.WMF
6. The copier then calculates the ID max (amplitude of the gamma curve) based
on data from the ACC scan.
7. The corrected printer gamma curves can be adjusted further using SP modes
(SP4-918).
Error Diffusion
Error diffusion reduces the difference in contrast between light and dark areas of a
halftone image. Each pixel is corrected using the difference between it and the
surrounding pixels. The corrected pixels are then compared with an error diffusion
matrix.
B156/B220
6-32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
31
7
8
10
30
29
11
28
12
27
13
26
14
15
16
17
24
23
22
20
21
1. Ground brush
2. ID sensor
3. OPC belt
4. Bias brush
5. Image transfer belt cleaning blade
6. Image transfer belt cleaning unit
7. T/B toner collection auger 1
8. T/B toner collection auger 2
9. T/B waste toner sensor feeler
10. Waste toner bottle switch
11. Paper transfer roller
12. Paper transfer roller unit
13. T/B waste toner bottle full sensor
14. Registration roller
15. Image transfer belt
SM
19
18
B156D352.WMF
6-33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
[A]
[B]
B156D026.WMF
High voltage supply [A] Harness [C] Charge corona unit [B] (negative charge)
(
Photocopying Processes Charge Corona Charge Scorotron Method)
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
Motor
Screw
Wire cleaner
Corona wire
Grid
[C]
[A]
[B]
B156D027.WMF
The motor [A] drives the bottom screw [B], which moves the wire cleaner [C]
forward or backward. The cleaner cleans the grid [E] and corona wire [D].
The wire is cleaned at these times:
Immediately before the machine goes to low power mode, if there was between
200 and 600 development counts since the last cleaning.
Between 600 (SP2-801-1) and 1200 (= the sum of the settings in SP2-801-1 and
3 plus 200) development counts at job end.
If the count gets to 1200 in the middle of a job (= the sum of the settings in SP2801-1 and -3 plus 200) development counts (stops in the middle of the job).
B156/B220
6-34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
Color
4 counts
8 counts
NOTE: 1) The counter always increases as shown in the table. These values are
not adjustable.
2) To change the cleaning interval, use SP2-801 (
5.1.2).
Quenching
[C]
Detailed
Descriptions
SM
6-35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
OPC belt
Main motor
Fly wheels
Bottom shaft
[C]
[D]
B156D309.WMF
Main motor [B] Gear Bottom shaft [D] OPC belt [A]
The flywheels [C] ensure that the OPC belt moves smoothly.
NOTE: The OPC belt and transfer belt contact each other. If you wish to inspect
the OPC belt by turning it, you must also turn the transfer belt at the same
time to avoid damaging the surfaces of the belts.
Lubricant bar
Cleaning brush
Feeler link (on the frame)
Waste toner bottle full sensor
(on the frame)
Waste toner feeler
Waste toner bottle switch
(on the frame)
Toner collection auger 1
Toner collection auger 2
Waste toner bottle
Cleaning blade
OPC belt
[A]
[K]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[J]
[F]
[I]
[H]
[G]
B156D029.WMF
Bottle Detection
The waste toner bottle switch [F] is on the frame, behind the OPC belt cleaning unit.
When the unit is installed, it pushes the switch, which indicates the bottle is in place.
B156/B220
6-36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
Drive
[B] [C]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
B156D312.WMF
Development motor [A] Gear Timing belt OPC belt cleaning clutch [B]
Gears [C, D] OPC belt cleaning unit (including the brush and toner collection
augers)
The clutch cuts the drive to the cleaning unit when the development motor reverses
(this is done each development to prevent toner blockages in the development unit).
SM
6-37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
[H]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
[A]
[B]
[C]
B156D314.WMF
[B]
[A]: Belt mark sensor
[B]: Mark
[A]
B156D030.WMF
B156/B220
6-38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
Transfer Roller
[A]
[B]
[A]: Transfer roller
[B]: High voltage supply board
[C]: Terminal plates
[C]
B156D031.WMF
The transfer roller [A] attracts toner from the OPC belt to the image transfer belt by
using a positive charge.
The terminal in the middle of the PCU contacts the terminal on the transfer roller
shaft when the image transfer belt unit is installed in the PCU.
Detailed
Descriptions
SM
6-39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
[A]
[M]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
[J]:
[K]:
[L]:
[M]:
[N]:
Cleaning blade
Toner collection auger 1
Image transfer belt
Toner conduit
Waste toner sensor feeler
Waste toner bottle switch
Actuator
Waste toner full sensor
Waste toner bottle
Transfer roller
Toner collection auger 2
Cleaning brush
Lubricant bar
Cleaning roller
[B]
[L]
[C]
[E]
[D]
[K]
[F]
[J]
[I]
[H]
[G]
B156D032.WMF
B156/B220
6-40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
Contact Mechanism
[C]
[A]
[E]
[D]
REAR VIEW
[B]
B156D034.WMF
B156D033.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
When the toner images are being transferred from the OPC belt to the image
transfer belt, the image transfer belt cleaning unit must be kept away from the belt.
The unit contacts the belt only while cleaning the belt.
NOTE: During standby mode, the cleaning unit is away from the image transfer
belt.
When the image transfer belt cleaning contact solenoid [A] is off, it catches a hook
on the surface of the half-turn clutch [B]. As a result, the high point of the cam
pushes the lever [C], and the cleaning unit is away from the transfer belt.
When the solenoid activates, the hook is released, drive from the motor is
transferred from the gear to the clutch, the cam [D] makes half a turn, the lever
drops, and the cleaning unit contacts the transfer belt
SM
6-41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
The fusing unit motor [E] drives the image transfer belt cleaning unit and the
contact mechanism.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
Power Supply
[B]
[A]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
Cleaning brush
Cleaning roller
High voltage supply
Contact spring
Contact spring
Contact spring
[C]
[F]
[D]
[E]
B156D035.WMF
The cleaning roller [B] charges the cleaning brush, and attracts toner from it.
The high voltage supply [C] supplies positive charge to the cleaning roller via the
harness and contact springs (leaf springs) [D, E, and F].
[A]
Drive
[A]: Gear 1
[B]: Image transfer belt cleaning
clutch
[C]: Fusing unit motor
[D]: Drive gear
[E]: Gear 2
[F]: Toner path
[G]: Image transfer belt
[H]: Toner collection auger 1
[I]: Toner collection auger 2
[J]: Turning direction of the
cleaning brush
[B]
[C]
[J]
[F]
[I]
[H]
[D]
[E]
[G]
Fusing unit motor [C] drive gear [D] gears [A] and [E] cleaning brush [J]
and toner collection augers [H and I]
The clutch [B] controls the on/off timing of the mechanism.
B156/B220
6-42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
11
10
9
4
5
8
6
B156D037.WMF
SM
LD Unit
Synchronization Detector
Synchronization Detector Mirror
Dust Shield Glass
3rd Mirror
Polygon Mirror Motor Unit
6-43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Detailed
Descriptions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
6.8.4 LD UNIT
Two laser diodes in the LD unit emit 2 main-scan laser-beams. Having two lasers
speeds up image creation. It also allows the polygon motor to operate at a lower
speed, which cuts down noise emission and makes the motor last longer.
The LD unit does not need any adjustment when replaced.
B156/B220
6-44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
Circuit
The LD safety switch is on the 5V circuit leading to the LD unit. Between the switch
and the unit, the line has 2 contacts on the front door and on the right door (series
circuit). When either of the covers is opened, the power supply is interrupted,
preventing laser emission.
BICU
PSU
+5V
+5V
5VLD
5VLDS
LDDR
LD
Control
IC
Detailed
Descriptions
Door SW
B156D500A.WMF
SM
6-45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B156D038.WMF
[E]
B156/B220
6-46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.9 DEVELOPMENT
6.9.1 OVERVIEW
2
B156D351.WMF
Memory chip
Toner cartridge
Toner cartridge agitators
Development agitator
Development unit
Detailed
Descriptions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SM
6-47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
Distinguishing the development unit with the one for the B051 series
Top line of caution decal on
the toner cartridge
Indication on the toner
cartridge holder
(development unit side)
This model
Black words on a white
background
B154 (BK only)
CMY development units have
the same indication as the
previous model (B051)
B051 series
White words on a black
background
B051 (BK, C, M, and Y)
Caution decal
NOTE: B051 is shown on CMY development units for both models. But the units
are not interchangeable.
Memory chip
Each toner cartridge contains a memory chip, which contains information about
which machine it can be used in. If a toner cartridge for the B051 series is installed
in this machine, the machine will not detect the toner cartridge.
B156/B220
6-48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
[B]
[H]
[I]
[E]
[J]
[D]
[N]
[L]
[K]
B156D301.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
[J]:
[K]:
[L]:
[M]:
[N]:
Drive
Development motor [A, B] development clutch [C] development roller [F]
cam [E] lever [D] agitators [K].
Development motor [A, B] development clutch [C] development roller gear [F]
development roller [J]
SM
6-49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
[M]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
Shutter
Each toner cartridge has a shutter on its right side. The shutter is pushed open
when the cartridge is installed in the development unit, and closed when removed
from the unit.
B156/B220
6-50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
[C]
[A]
B156D303.WMF
SM
6-51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
The machine counts how many pixels have been printed with each toner cartridge.
When there are 500 prints remaining until the estimated toner end condition, toner
near-end is indicated.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
B156/B220
6-52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
Approx. 3
minutes
Long (quiet)
Approx. 7
minutes
Medium
Approx. 6
minutes
Quick (default)
Total Time
The Total time column includes process control after cartridge replacement.
Detailed
Descriptions
SM
6-53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
[A]
B156D040.WMF
B156/B220
6-54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
Reverse Rotation
The gears reverse every development to prevent toner from clumping. There are
two development motors in this model. While one motor is used to develop a color,
the other is used to clean another development unit. This parallel action reduces
the idle time.
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Detailed
Descriptions
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
B156D300.WMF
SM
6-55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
[B]
[D]
[E]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
Development unit
Rear-side terminal
Development roller
Bias terminal
Harness terminal
High voltage supply
Doctor roller
[F]
[A]
[G]
B156D041.WMF
Doctor Roller
The doctor roller [G] restricts the amount of toner on the development roller [C].
The high voltage supply [F] applies a charge to the doctor roller through the rearside terminal cable [B]. This charge is the same as the charge applied to the
development roller. However, the development roller charge is applied through a
different terminal [E].
Mono-component Development Toner Metering Blade (similar principle)
B156/B220
6-56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
2
3
13
12
5
11
B156D042.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Registration roller
Path from duplex unit
Vertical transport roller
By-pass tray
Friction pad with spring (Tray 1)
Friction pad with spring (Tray 2)
Path from optional paper tray
SM
Number
2
1
2
1
Main/Optional
Main unit
Optional unit
6-57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
Transport Speed
Until the registration roller, the paper travels at 240 mm/s. This high initial speed
ensures that the first output time is as short as possible.
From the registration roller to the exit, the paper travels at the following speeds:
178 mm/s (plain paper)
89 mm/s (thick paper or OHP films)
Friction Pad
Handling Paper Paper Feed Paper Feed Methods Friction Pad
NOTE: Replace the roller and pad as a unit (not separately).
[A]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
[B]
[I]
[C]
[H]
[D]
[G]
[E]
[F]
B156D043.WMF
Registration
The fusing unit motor [A] drives the registration roller [H], under the control of the
registration clutch [B].
The idle roller [G] facing the registration roller does not have any drive gears. It
turns with the paper [I].
B156/B220
6-58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
[C]
[B]
B156D044.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[C]
B156D045.WMF
The bottom plate gradually rises as paper is fed. The bottom plate position is
checked with the near-end sensor feeler [B]. The sensor [A] is actuated when
about 50 sheets are left in the tray, and the paper near-end message appears on
the operation panel.
When paper runs out, the paper end sensor feeler [D] drops into the cutout in the
bottom plate. This actuates the sensor [C], and the paper end message appears on
the operation panel.
SM
6-59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
[A]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
[D]
[E]
[F]
[C]
[B]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[A]
[G]
B156D046.WMF
The end fence [G] moves the lever [F], which moves a different set of notches on
the actuator [E] into contact with the paper size switches [B][D].
When you put the tray in the main unit, the rear fence of the tray and the actuator
activate the switches; from this the machine detects the presence of the tray, and
the paper size.
Switch Pattern
When the tray is pushed into the machine, the leftmost switch [A] is always
activated by the rear fence of the tray; this switch detects the presence of the tray.
The combination of the other 3 switches [B][D] detects the paper size.
Auto Detection
North America
Europe/Asia
DLT SEF
A3 SEF
LG SEF
B4 SEF
A4 SEF
LT SEF
B5 SEF
10.5" x 7.25" SEF
LT LEF
A4 LEF
B5 LEF
A5 LEF
(No tray)
* On: Pushed
Switch*
[A]
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
[B]
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
[C]
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
On
Off
[D]
On
On
Off
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Off
B156/B220
6-60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION
3
1
4
6
B156D401.WMF
5.
6.
7.
8.
SM
6-61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
1.
2.
3.
4.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION
[D]
[B]
[C]
[E]
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
B156D048.WMF
B156D047.WMF
Timing
When transferring toner to paper, the paper transfer roller unit contacts the image
transfer belt. At other times during printing, the unit stays away from the image
transfer belt. After printing, the unit contacts the belt and stays there.
NOTE: During standby mode, the unit stays away from the image transfer belt.
Mechanism
Fusing unit motor [A] Gear Paper transfer solenoid [C] Cam [E]
Contact/separation lever [D] Paper transfer roller unit movement
The fusing unit motor [A] drives the mechanism. (It also drives the paper transfer
roller).
The cam [E] is controlled by the half-turn clutch [B] and the paper transfer solenoid
[C].
When the solenoid is off, it catches a hook on the surface of the half-turn clutch [B].
As a result, the high point of the cam pushes the contact/separation lever [D], and
the paper transfer roller unit is away from the belt.
When the solenoid is activated, the hook is released, so the half-turn clutch makes
a half-turnthe unit moves to the right and contacts the image transfer belt.
B156/B220
6-62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION
[E]
High voltage supply
Terminal
Paper transfer roller shaft
Temperature-humidity sensor
(inside the rear-right cover)
[E]: Discharge plate (negative
charge)
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[D]
[A]
B156D049.WMF
The discharge plate [E] discharges the remaining charge on the paper going past
the paper transfer roller. This helps the paper separate from the image transfer belt.
Temperature/Humidity Control
The temperature-humidity sensor [D] is inside the rear-right cover. The sensor
output is used to control the current for the paper transfer roller.
The temperature and humidity can be read with SP2-912.
SM
6-63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
Discharge Plate
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION
Roller Cleaning
The paper transfer roller is cleaned at the following times:
After the user clears a paper jam
After the user closes the front cover
Just after the main power has been switched on
After paper passes the paper transfer roller, the paper transfer solenoid releases
the paper transfer roller from the image transfer belt.
Then, a certain time after the trailing edge of the paper passes the registration
sensor, the following steps occur:
1) The paper transfer solenoid turns on again, and the paper transfer roller
contacts the image transfer belt.
2) A negative charge is applied to remove toner stuck to the paper transfer
roller.
3) Positive and negative charge is applied alternately to remove any toner that
is still stuck to the paper transfer roller.
Toner removed from the paper transfer roller goes back to the image transfer belt,
where it is removed by the image transfer belt cleaning unit.
B156/B220
6-64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
13
12
3
4
11
5
10
9
6
B156D050.WMF
Hot roller
Metal cleaning roller
Pressure roller
Pressure roller fusing lamp (350W)
Pressure roller thermistor
Heating roller thermistor
Thermostat
Heating roller fusing lamp (770W)
9. Heating roller
10. Fusing belt
11. Oil overflow sensor
12. Oiling roller
13. Oil supply roller
14. Fusing sponge roller
15. Spring roller
16. Metal cleaning roller
Detailed
Descriptions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
The fusing unit divides into two subunits: the fusing subunit and the oil supply
subunit.
SM
6-65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
6.12.2 DRIVE
[A]
[B]
[C]
[I]
[D]
[H]
[E]
[G]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
[F]
B156D051.WMF
Hot roller
Pressure roller gear
Cover disengagement gear
Fusing unit motor
Drive gear
Fusing belt
Heating roller
Oil supply roller
Oiling roller
The fusing unit motor [D] drives the fusing unit through gears [C] and [E].
The hot roller [A] turns the fusing belt [F] as a result of the friction between the two.
When the right cover is open, gear [C] moves away, which allows jammed paper to
be removed from the fusing unit and exit easily.
B156/B220
6-66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
Fusing belt
Heating roller
Lamp (770 W)
Thermostat
Thermistor
Pressure roller
Lamp (350 W)
Thermistor
Thermofuse
Pawl
[D]
[E]
[A]
[J]
[I]
[H]
[F]
[C]
[B]
[G]
B156D052.WMF
Fusing Belt
This machine uses a fusing belt [A]. The paper goes between the fusing belt and
the pressure roller [F].
Detailed
Descriptions
The heating roller lamp (770W) [C] and pressure roller lamp (350W) [G] give more
heat to the front and rear edge of the fusing belt and pressure roller. The lamps
give more heat to the front edge than the rear edge. This makes fusing better for
large paper (larger than B4). If the lamp is installed in the orientation, unsatisfactory
fusing and/or paper creasing can occur.
SM
6-67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
[B]
[G]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[C]
[D]
[E]
[A]
[F]
B156D053.WMF
Fusing Bias
The high voltage supply [A] provides the fusing bias in a new fusing unit until 2K
prints are made. The fusing bias is a negative voltage that quenches static
electricity created on the belt [C] and rollers [D][F] in a new fusing unit by the
paper. This prevents the belt and rollers from attracting dust and dirt, which can
cause offset image in black areas and/or white spots in half tone images because
of toner attracted to the fusing belt.
After 2K prints, the static electricity is not very high. If the bias is applied to the
oiling roller, this can attract dust and dirt to the oil supply felt area. Because of this,
the bias is turned off after 2K prints.
With SP2-503, you can select the status of bias control (Always off, Always on, or
Auto [turns off after 2k prints]). After a new fusing unit is installed, fusing bias must
be applied during the first 2K prints. To do this, you must reset the PM counter of
the fusing unit with SP7-804-7, and fusing bias control will automatically switch on
(the machine uses the Auto setting).
SP2-501 shows the current status of fusing bias control. The setting is changed
from 1 (ON) to 0 (OFF) when 2K prints from the new unit are made or when SC420
is detected. At this time, the fusing bias is stopped.
B156/B220
6-68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
[B]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[C]
[E]
[A]
Oil tank
Air inlet
Oil pump
Oil pipe
Fusing unit
[D]
[F]
B156D054.WMF
[I]
[J]
[K]
[L]
[H]
[D]
Oil reservoir
Felt
Oil supply unit
Oil supply roller
Oiling roller
Fusing sponge roller
Metal cleaning roller
[F]
[G]
B156D055.WMF
The technician adds oil to the oil tank [A] in the bottom-left corner inside the rear
cover.
The oil pump [C] pumps oil along the oil pipe [D] to the oil reservoir [F] in the oil
supply unit.
The air inlet [B] equalizes the pressure inside the oil tank [A].
The oil goes to the fusing belt as follows:
Oil tank [A] Oil pipe [D] (oil pump [C]) Oil reservoir [F] Felt [G] Oil
supply roller [I] Oiling roller [J]
The fusing sponge roller [K] removes excess oil from the fusing belt. The metal
cleaning roller [L] removes foreign substances from the belt.
SM
6-69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
[J]:
[K]:
[L]:
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
Oil Supply
[C]
[A]: Oil end sensor
[B]: Oil overflow sensor
[B]
[A]
B156D056.WMF
The oil end sensor [A] controls the supply of oil from the oil tank in the bottom of
the machine, via the oil pump, to the reservoir in the oil supply unit.
The oil end sensor detects oil by emitting a beam through the protruding part of the
tank bottom (the bottom is transparent).
When oil is detected, the pump does not supply oil up from the lower tank. So, the
reservoir is normally less than half full (maximum capacity: 70 grams).
When oil has been used up so that the level in the reservoir falls below the sensor,
the sensor detects oil end. Then, the oil pump turns on to pump oil up from the oil
tank, until the oil end sensor detects oil.
If the oil end sensor fails, the oil overflow sensor [B] detects when the reservoir is
full [C], and the pump stops (SC571 will be generated, and the machine must be
repaired). This failsafe measure prevents oil flooding inside the machine.
B156/B220
6-70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
Detailed
Descriptions
If the oil tank at the bottom of the machine has no oil in it, the following occurs:
1) The oil pump operates for 50 milliseconds and waits for 150 milliseconds. If
the oil end condition still exists, this step is repeated. If the sensor still does
not detect oil, this step can be repeated up to 150 times (total maximum time
taken: 30 seconds).
2) If oil is still not detected, the pump stops for 30 seconds.
3) The oil pump repeats steps 1 and 2 until oil is detected. The pump can
repeat these steps up to 9 times. So, the machine can pump for up to 9
minutes if oil is not detected ([30 seconds + 30 seconds] x 9).
4) If oil is still not detected, the oil end counter starts. This counts the pages fed
through the fusing unit. Every 100 pages, the oil pump operates again for 50
seconds to try to get oil into the fusing unit.
5) When the counter goes up to 50, the operation panel indicates oil near end
(the counter is not reset).
6) When the counter goes up to 500, the code SC 570 appears on the display,
and printing stops.
7) To clear the oil end condition, a technician adds some oil to the oil tank in
the bottom of the machine and clears the SC code (this is a Level A code).
Then, the oil pump resumes steps 1 through 3.
NOTE: Do not switch the machine on with the fusing unit out of the machine
if an oil end condition exists. This will clear the oil end counter, and
the machine incorrectly detects oil.
8) If the oil end condition is cleared, the procedure ends. If not, the code SC
570 appears again.
SM
6-71
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
Energy saver
Normal
paper
>90 g/m2,
24 lb (*4)
Printing
Thick
OHP
Duplex (*5)
Panel off 1
Panel off 2
Low power
mode
Auto off
mode
Mono color
Full color
Mono color
Full color
Mono color
Full color
Mono color
Full color
Mono color
Full color
15C or lower
30C or higher
Heat.
150
Heat.
140
Press.
10
Press.
10
140
100
Room
temp.
155
160
165
170
165
170
165
175
150
155
100 ~
190
Room
temp.
Lamp off
Lamp off
Lamp off
Lamp off
Lamp off
Lamp off
Lamp off
Lamp off
Lamp off
Lamp off
Heat.: +5
Adjustable with
SP1-105-27
Press.: +0
Adjustable with
SP1-105-28
Heat.: 5
Adjustable with
SP1-105-29
Press.: +0
Adjustable with
SP1-105-30
30 ~ 200
0 ~ +20
0 ~ 20
*1: External temperature is measured (temperature/humidity sensor) when the main switch is
turned on and when a job start signal is received.
*2: The pressure and heating rollers start idling.
*3: Fusing idling stops when both roller temperatures reach the print ready condition. The
printer can process jobs when the rollers reach this temperature during warm-up.
*4: A user tool (User Tools - System Settings - Tray Paper Settings - Paper Type) specifies the
paper type in each tray (plain, thick, or OHP). If plain is selected, then another user tool
(User Tools - Maintenance - Plain Paper Type) defines whether the paper in the tray is
normal or >90 g/m2, 24 lb. (
5.1.2). >90 g/m2, 24 lb means greater than or equal to
90 g/m2, 24 lb.
Thick means paper heavier than 105 g/m2 (28 lb).
*5: Both sides of the paper are processed with the same roller temperatures.
*6: Use SP1-105 to adjust the default fusing temperatures (
5.1.2).
B156/B220
6-72
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
Stand-by Mode
Panel-Off Mode
Operation Sw. On
Platen Cover Open / Close
Original Set ADF
Return Time Less Than 99 s
After Printing
B156D903.WMF
SM
6-73
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
When the machine is not being used, the energy saver function reduces power
consumption by decreasing the fusing temperature.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
B156/B220
Operation
Switch
Energy
Saver LED
Fusing Temperature
On
On
+24V
System +5V
On
On
6-74
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
Energy
Saver LED
Low power
On
On
Fusing Temperature
+24V
System +5V
On
On
Detailed
Descriptions
Mode
SM
6-75
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
Off Mode
The system +5V supply also turns off. However, +5VE (+5V for energy saver
mode) is still activated. When the machine detects a ringing signal, off-hook signal,
or receives a print job, the machine returns to the Off Stand-by mode and the
system +5V and +24V supplies are activated.
Operation
Switch
Energy
Saver LED
Fusing Lamp
+24V
System +5V
Off
Stand-by
Off
Off
Off
(On when printing)
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
B156/B220
6-76
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Note
+5VE is
supplied
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
Interface gear
Pressure roller gear
Drive gear (fusing unit)
Cover disengagement gear
Fusing unit motor
Fusing exit sensor feeler
Turning direction of the
fusing exit sensor feeler
Fusing exit sensor
[I]
Paper exit sensor
Turning direction of the
paper exit sensor feeler
Paper exit sensor feeler
Paper
[A]
[K]
[L]
[B]
[C]
[J]
[G]
[D]
[E]
[F]
B156D057.WMF
[H]
Drive
Fusing unit motor [E] gear [D] fusing unit drive gear [C] pressure roller
gear [B] gear [A] exit rollers.
[A]
[B]
[D]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
Feeler
Paper overflow sensor
Paper
Tray
[C]
B156D058.WMF
When the paper overflow sensor [B] is deactivated, the machine detects that the
paper stack height exceeded the limit and stops printing.
SM
6-77
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINT DATA PROCESSING
Printer
Engine
Controller
RGB
Corrected
RGB
CMYK
Gray
Correction
OR
UCR/BG
Correction
CMYK
Toner Limitation
CMYK
8 bits
CMYK
1 bit or 2 bits
B156D562.WMF
Printer
Engine
Controller
(Matching by Host)
RGB
RGB 8 bits
PCL Driver
ICM Engine/
ICM profile
RGB
Decode
&
Scale
8 bits
RGB
8 bits
Color
Matching
CMY
8 bits
BG/UCR,
CMY
8 bits
Negative Correction
Correction
Toner Limitation
CMY
1 bit
Dithering
&
ROP
CMYK
1 bit
B156D563.WMF
B156/B220
6-78
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINT DATA PROCESSING
XYZ
Color
Matching
CMYK
8 bit
Fine
Fine Super
RGB
Vivid
Super Vivid
None
Gamma
XYZ
PS Driver
RGB
to
XYZ
BG/UCR
(RGB
Correction)
CMYK
CMYK
8 bit
CMYK
CMYK
CRD
Toner Limitation
CIE
to
XYZ
Gray Correction
CIE ABC
CMYK
1 bit
CMM/
ICC/ICM
Profile
B529D564.WMF
Gray Correction
Gamma Correction
The printer gamma can be adjusted with controller SP mode (Gamma Adj.). For
CMYK, there are15 points between 0 and 100%. The corrected gamma data is
stored in NVRAM.
SM
6-79
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
Detailed
Descriptions
Gray correction processes gray with K or CMYK toner depending on the driver
settings.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINT DATA PROCESSING
Toner Limitation
Toner limitation prevents toner from being scattered around text or printed lines.
Maximum values have been prepared independently for text and photo. They can
be adjusted with controller SP mode (Toner Limit).
Default: 180% for text, 250% for photo
Adjustable range: 100% to 400%
B156/B220
6-80
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)
Detailed
Descriptions
In scanner mode, users can select file format from TIFF, JPEG, or PDF. The time
to create TIFF and JPEG files will be shortened with the File Format Converter,
especially for high scanning resolution and large image size. When the customer
selects PDF, the machine creates a TIFF or JPEG file from the scanned image first
then converts it to PDF. Therefore, the total time to create a PDF is also shortened
with the File Format Converter.
SM
6-81
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)
Copier
Printer
Copy jobs
1) Print jobs
2) Sample Print/Locked Print jobs(*1)
3) Spool Printing jobs
Scanner(*2)
1) Scanned files sent by e-mail
2) Files sent by Scan to Folder
3) Documents sent or retrieved by using Web
Image Monitor, Desk Top Binder, Scan Router
Fax
PC fax print jobs, Internet fax transmission jobs
Document Server Temporary data that still remains in the
Document Server even after user erases the
data in the Document Server.
1) Documents stored by the user in the Document Server using the
Copier, Printer or Scanner functions
2) Information registered in the Address Book (*3)
3) Counters stored under each user code
4) Network setting
NOTE: *1: A Sample Print or Locked Print job can only be overwritten after it has
been executed.
*2: Temporary data via TWAIN scanner function are not originally stored in
HDD, so TWAIN scanner functions can be used together with DOS
unit.
*3: Data stored in the Address Book can be encrypted for security.
Overwrite timing
Overwriting starts automatically once a copy, print and scanner job is completed.
Copier, printer and scanner functions take priority over the Data Overwrite function.
If a copier, printer or scanner job comes while a previous job is beign overwritten,
the overwrite process is automatically interrupted until the next job is completed.
B156/B220
6-82
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (MAIN UNIT)
Configuration:
Desktop
Print Process:
Original Type:
Sheet/Book/object
Original Size:
Max: A3/11"x17"
Max:
Min:
Paper Weight
(excluding by-pass tray):
A3/11" x 17"
A6 SEF (100 x 148 mm)/8.5" x 5.5"
Width: 100 ~ 297 mm (3.9" ~ 11.5")
Custom size:
Length: 148 ~ 432 mm (5.8" ~ 17")
*Printable area is 297 x 432 mm (11.7" x 17").
Printing Speed
(A4/8.5" x 11" LEF):
Model
TH-C1b
TH-C1c
Paper Capacity:
Color
Black & White
Color
Black & White
Plain
Paper
10 cpm
24 cpm
10 cpm
32 cpm
Thick
OHP
4 cpm
6.5 cpm
4 cpm
6.5 cpm
2 cpm
3.2 cpm
2 cpm
3.2 cpm
Main
250 sheets x 2 tray
Paper tray unit (Option) 500 sheets x 2 trays
By-pass (Option)
100 sheets
LCT (Option)
1,000 sheets x 2
*Maximum capacity is 2,600 sheets.
A4/LT or smaller:
B4 or larger:
Up to 500 sheets
Up to 250 sheets
Color:
Black & White:
18 seconds or less
7.8 seconds or less
Warming-up Time:
1 to 100
Memory:
768 MB
Hard Disk:
40 GB
Reproduction Ratios:
Enlargement
Full Size
Reduction
SM
7-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Specifications
LT/DLT Version
400, 200 155, 129,
121%
100%
93, 85, 78, 73, 65,
50, 25%
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Zoom:
Scanning System:
Light Source:
1 xenon lamp
Photoconductor:
OPC belt
Charging:
Print System:
Development System:
Transfer:
Separation:
Discharge pin
Fusing:
Cleaning:
Quenching:
Lamp
Toner Supply:
Cartridge
Power Source:
NA
EU & Asia
Voltage
100 to 120 V
220 to 240 V
Power Consumption:
Frequency
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
Mainframe only
Less than 1.5 kW
Less than 1.2 kW
Less than 200 W
5.7 W
Maximum:
Copying:
Stand-by:
Auto Off:
Amperage
12 A
8A
Full System
Less than 1.5 kW
Less than 1.3 kW
Less than 200 W
15.5 W
NOTE: Full system: ARDF + 1 bin tray + Paper Tray Unit + Duplex Unit + Bridge
Unit +1000-sheet Finisher
Noise Emission:
Stand-by:
Copying:
Mainframe only
Less than 40 dB (A)
Less than 65 dB (A)
Full System
Less than 40 dB (A)
Less than 70 dB (A)
NOTE: Full system: ARDF + 1 bin tray + Paper Tray Unit + Duplex Unit + Bridge
Unit +1000-sheet Finisher
Dimensions (W x D x H):
NA:
640 x 682 x 945 mm (25.2 x 26.85 x 37.2)
EU/CHN: 550 x 682 x 781 mm (21.65" x 26.85" x 30.74")
ASIA:
550 x 682 x 945 mm (21.65" x 26.85" x 37.2)
Weight:
NA:
Less than 106 kg (234 lb)
EU/CHN: Less than 88 kg (197 lb)
ASIA:
Less than 98 kg (220 lb)
B156/B220
7-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
2. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
2.1
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
13
14
12
11
10
9
7
B156V500.WMF
Specifications
SM
7-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Version
Copier
Fax
Printer/
Scanner
Machine
Code
B156
B220
B810
B484
B456
B457
B480
B510
B509
B490
Item
Base Machine
Base Machine
ARDF (Optional
NOTE 1))
Platen Cover (Optional)
Paper Tray Unit (Optional)
LCT (Optional)
1-bin Tray (Optional)
Shift Tray (Optional)
Duplex Unit (Optional
NOTE 1))
By-pass Tray (Optional
NOTE
1))
Interchange Unit
(Optional
NOTE 1))
Bridge Unit (Optional)
1000-sheet Finisher (Optional)
Adjustment Table (Optional)
500-sheet Finisher (Optional)
Key Counter Bracket (Optional)
Fax Option (Optional)
G3 Interface Unit (Optional)
Memory Unit (Optional)
Handset (Optional)
PS3 (Optional)
IEEE1394 (Optional)
IEEE1284 (Optional)
Wireless LAN (Optional)
Bluetooth
Media Link Board (Optional)
Data Overwrite Security Unit
(Optional)
No.
14
14
2
1
8
7
3
13
5
6
B481
B482
B408
B488
B458
B508
B750
B751
G578
B433
B769
B581
B679
G813
B736
B609
B735
12
10
9
11
Common
with
NOTE 2)
NOTE 2)
NOTE 2)
NOTE 2)
NOTE: 1) N. America: ARDF, Duplex Unit, By-pass Tray and Interchange Unit are
standard.
Asia (except China): ARDF is standard.
2) The color of the exterior is changed to blue.
B156/B220
7-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
[F]
[A]
[B]
Service
[D]
[E]
[C]
B156I402.WMF
Machine
Code
Item
Remarks
USB 2.0:
Standard
Ethernet:
Standard
B609
G813
Bluetooth: [C]
B736
B679
B581
PostScript 3: [F]
B769
B735
SM
Standard
Specifications
7-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
2.2
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
ARDF
Original Size:
Standard sizes
Single-sided mode: A3 to A5, DLT to HLT
Double-sided mode: A3 to A4, DLT to LT
Non-standard sizes (Single-sided mode only)
Max. width 297 mm
Min. width 105 mm
Max. length 1,260 mm
Min. length 128 mm
Original Weight:
Table Capacity:
Original Position:
Center
Separation:
Original Transport:
Roller transport
Reproduction Range:
Power Source:
Power Consumption:
50 W
Dimensions (W x D x H):
Weight:
10 kg
Bridge Unit
Paper Size:
Standard sizes
A6 lengthwise to A3
HLT to DLT
Non-standard sizes
Width: 100 to 305 mm
Length: 148 to 432 mm
Paper Weight:
Power Source:
Dimensions (W x D x H):
Weight
B156/B220
7-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Standard sizes
A6 lengthwise to A3
HLT to DLT
Non-standard sizes
Width: 90 to 305 mm (3" to 12")
Length: 148 to 457.2 mm (5.83" to 18")
Paper Weight:
Dimensions (W x D x H):
Weight:
3 kg (6.6 lbs)
Duplex Unit
Paper Size:
Standard sizes
A5 lengthwise to A3
HLT to DLT
Non-standard sizes
Width: 140 to 297 mm
Length: 182 to 432 mm
Paper Weight:
Tray Capacity:
1 sheet
Power Consumption:
40 W
Power Source:
DC 24 V, 5 V
Dimensions (W x D x H):
90 x 495 x 452 mm
Weight:
6 kg
Paper Size:
Standard sizes
A6 lengthwise to A3
HLT to DLT
Non-standard sizes
Width: 100 to 305 mm
Length: 148 to 432 mm
Paper Weight:
Power Consumption:
10 W
Dimensions (W x D x H):
117 x 447 x 92 mm
Weight:
1.6 kg
SM
7-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Specifications
Interchange Unit
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
LCT
Paper Size:
A4 sideways/LT sideways
Paper Weight:
Tray Capacity:
Power Source:
DC 24 V, 5 V (from copier/printer)
Power Consumption:
30 W (Max.)/25 W (Ave.)
Weight:
25 kg (55 lbs)
Size (W x D x H):
FRR
Capacity:
Paper Weight:
Paper Size:
Power Source:
Power Consumption:
Less than 30 W
Dimensions (W x D x H):
Weight:
25 kg (33 lb.)
Standard Size:
A5 lengthwise to A3
HLT lengthwise to DLT
Non-standard Size:
Paper Width: 90 to 297 mm
Paper Length: 148 to 432 mm
Paper Weight:
Tray Capacity:
Power Source:
Power Consumption:
17 W
Weight:
1.1 kg
Size (W x D x H):
B156/B220
7-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Standard Size:
A5 Lengthwise to A3
HLT Lengthwise to DLT
Non-standard Size:
Paper Width: 90 to 297 mm
Paper Length: 148 to 432 mm
Paper Weight:
Tray Capacity:
Power Source:
Power Consumption:
0.5 W
Weight:
1.1 kg
Size (W x D x H):
500-Sheet Finisher
A3, B4, A4, B5 sideways (Metric)
DLT, LG, LT (Inch)
Paper Weight
Staple Capacity:
Stack Capacity
(Maximum):
Stapling Positions:
Staple Replenishment:
Power Source:
Power Consumption:
40 W
Weight:
Dimensions (W x D x H):
Paper Size:
SM
7-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
1000-sheet Finisher
Upper Tray
Paper Size:
A3 to A6
DLT to HLT
Paper Weight:
Paper Capacity:
Lower Tray
Paper Size:
No staple mode:
A3 to B5
DLT to HLT
Staple mode:
A3, B4, A4, B5
DLT to LT
Paper Weight:
Stapler Capacity:
Paper Capacity:
No staple mode:
1,000 sheets (A4/LT or smaller: 80 g/m2, 20 lb)
500 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG: 80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Staple mode:
(80 g/m2, 20 lb, number of sets)
Set Size
Size
A4/LT sideways
B5 sideways
A4/LT Lengthwise
A3, B4, DLT, LG
2 to 9
10 to 50
10 to 30
31 to 50
100
100 to 20
100 to 20
100
50
50 to 10
50 to 10
50 to 10
Staple positions:
Staple Replenishment:
Power Source:
Power Consumption:
50 W
Weight:
25 kg (55.2 lbs)
Dimensions (W x D x H):
B156/B220
7-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1000-SHEET FINISHER
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2. TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................8
2.1 JAM DETECTION......................................................................................... 8
3. SERVICE TABLES..........................................................................9
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS ............................................................................. 9
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MAIN PCB
: Clip ring
B408R109.WMF
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
[B]
B408R110.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER UNIT
[B]
[C]
[A]
B408R102.WMF
[D]
[E]
[F]
B408R113.WMF
7. Harness [G]
8. Unhook the spring [H]
9. Turn the stapler unit [I] and take it
out.
[J]
[G]
[I]
B408R114.WMF
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MOTORS
1.3 MOTORS
1.3.1 SHIFT MOTOR
1. Rear cover (1.1)
2. Shift motor [A] ( x 2,
x 1)
[A]
B408R123.WMF
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
[A]
B408R124.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MOTORS
[A]
[B]
[C]
B408R112.WMF
[A]
B408R111.WMF
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MOTORS AND SENSORS
1.4.1 PREPARATION
1. Front cover and inner cover (1.2)
[B]
[C]
B408R116.WMF
[E]
[D]
B408R117.WMF
[F]
B408R118.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B408
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MOTORS AND SENSORS
[B]
B408R121.WMF
B408R120.WMF
[A]
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MOTORS AND SENSORS
[A]
B408R119.WMF
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
[A]
B408R122.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JAM DETECTION
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 JAM DETECTION
Mode
Shift
Staple
Content
Entrance sensor:
On check
Entrance sensor:
Off check
Lower tray exit sensor:
On check
B408
Jam
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those listed in
the table below.
SW100
1
0
1
2
0
0
Description
Normal operation mode (Default)
Packing mode.
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
Before packing the machine, do the following: Set switch 1 to 1 then back to
zero. The lower tray moves to the lowest position. Then turn off the main switch.
After unpacking the machine, do the following: After turning the main switch back
on, the lower tray returns to home position automatically.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
GENERAL LAYOUT
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
2
1
13
4
5
6
12
11
10
8
9
B408D101.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B408
Upper Tray
Upper Tray Exit Roller
Entrance Roller
Tray Junction Gate
Upper Transport Roller
Stapler Junction Gate
Lower Transport Rollers
8. Stapler
9. Stack Feed-out Belt
10. Positioning Roller
11. Shift Roller
12. Lower Tray
13. Lower Tray Exit Roller
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
11
4
5
10
12
19
13
18
14
20
21
17
15
16
B408D103.WMF
SM
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B408
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
B408D102.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
22
32
31
30
29
28
27
23
26
25
24
B408D104.WMF
B408
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Name
Function
Upper
Transport
Lower
Transport
Jogger Fence
Staple Hammer
Stack Feed-out
Exit Guide Plate
Exit
Lower Tray Lift
Shift
Stapler
Entrance
Index No.
32
29
26
17
27
4
31
23
11
25
Sensors
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
Paper Limit
Jogger Fence
HP
Shift HP
Stack Feed-out
Belt HP
Stapler HP
Exit Guide Plate
HP
Stapler Tray
Entrance
Lower Tray Exit
Stack Height
Lower Tray
Lower Limit
Stapler Tray
Paper
Staple Sheet
Stapler Rotation
HP
Staple
3
2
12
10
19
14
5
15
8
7
24
16
18
20
21
Solenoids
SOL1
SOL2
SM
Tray Junction
Gate
Stapler Junction
Gate
13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
22
30
B408
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
S1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Symbol
SOL3
Name
Positioning
Roller
Function
Moves the positioning roller.
Lower Tray
Upper Limit
Front Door
Safety
Upper Cover
Main
Index No.
13
Switches
SW1
SW2
SW3
9
6
1
PCBs
PCB1
B408
14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
28
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE LAYOUT
B408D106.WMF
B408D105.WMF
7
8
9
B408D107.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SM
Exit Motor
Upper Transport Motor
Lower Transport Motor
Shift Motor
Exit Guide Plate Motor
6.
7.
8.
9.
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B408
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JUNCTION GATES
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
B408D108.WMF
Depending on the finishing mode, the copies are directed up, straight through, or
down by the combination of the tray junction gate [A] and stapler junction gate [B].
These gates are controlled by the tray junction gate solenoid [C] and stapler
junction gate solenoid [D].
B408
16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
UPPER TRAY
[A]
B408D109.WMF
SM
17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
When the paper limit sensor [A] switches on during feed-out for each of three
consecutive sheets of paper, paper overflow is detected.
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
[B]
[F]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[C]
B408D112.WMF
The vertical position of the lower tray [A] depends on the height of the copied paper
stack on the lower tray. The stack height sensor feeler [B] contacts the top of the
stack, and the lower tray lift motor [C] controls the tray height.
When the lower tray reaches its lowest possible position, the actuator [D] turns on
the lower tray lower limit sensor [E], and copying stops.
Tray Up
When the copy paper on the tray is removed, the stack height sensor [F] turns off
and the tray lifts up. Then, the tray stops when the sensor turns on again (the tray
pushes up the feeler).
If the stack height sensor fails, the lower tray upper limit switch [G] detects the tray
and stops the motor. This is a safety measure against stack height sensor failure.
Sort/Stack Mode (Tray Down)
Every five sheets of paper, the tray goes down until the sensor turns off again.
Then, it goes up until the sensor is on again.
Staple Mode (Tray Down)
After a stapled copy is fed out, the tray goes up for 220 ms and stops for 300 ms.
Then, it goes down for 1 second, waits for 500 ms, then goes up until the sensor
turns on.
B408
18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
B408D110.WMF
In the sort/stack mode, the shift roller [A] moves from side to side to separate the
sets of copies.
The horizontal position of the shift roller is controlled by the shift motor [B] and the
shift gear disk [C]. After the trailing edge of the copy passes the upper transport
roller, the shift motor turns on, driving the shift gear disk and the link [D].
After the paper is delivered to the lower tray [E], the shift roller moves to its home
position, which is detected by the shift HP sensor [F]. Then, when the trailing edge
of the next copy passes the upper transport roller, the shift roller shifts again. This
operation is done every sheet.
When the trailing edge of each page in the next set of copies passes the upper
transport roller, the shift roller shifts in the opposite direction.
SM
19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B408
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
[E]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
B408D113.WMF
[B]
[F]
[E]
[A]
[C]
B408D114.WMF
[D]
In staple mode, each sheet of copy paper is vertically and horizontally aligned
when it arrives in the jogger unit.
For the vertical paper alignment, the positioning roller solenoid [A] turns on shortly
after the stapler tray entrance sensor [B] turns off, and the positioning roller [C]
pushes the copy against the bottom of the stack stopper [D].
For the horizontal paper alignment, the jogger front fence [E] and the rear fence [F]
move to the waiting position, which is 18 mm away from the side of the paper.
When aligning the paper vertically, the jogger fence moves in 14 mm from the
waiting position. After the vertical position has been aligned, the jogger fence
pushes the paper 4 mm against the rear fence to align the paper horizontally. Then
the jogger fence moves back to the previous position.
B408
20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXIT GUIDE PLATE
[A]
B408D111.WMF
When stacking a large size of paper (such as A3, DLT) in the jogger unit, the
leading edge of the paper reaches the exit rollers. To prevent the paper from
running into the exit rollers and not being aligned correctly, the exit guide plate [A]
is moved up to make a gap between the exit rollers. This operation is done for all
paper sizes, but is only needed for the larger sizes.
The exit guide plate motor [B] and exit roller release cam [C] control the exit guide
plate movement. When the exit guide plate motor starts, the cam turns and the exit
guide plate moves up. When stapling is finished, the exit guide plate motor turns on
again to close the exit guide plate. When the exit guide plate HP sensor [D] turns
on, the motor stops.
SM
21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B408
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
[D]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER MECHANISM
[E]
[D]
[C]
[A]
B408D116.WMF
B408
22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
The stapler motor moves the stapler [A] from side to side. After the start key is
pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.
If two-staple-position mode is selected, the stapler moves to the front stapling
position first, then moves to the rear stapling position. However, for the next copy
set, it staples in the reverse order (at the rear side first, then at the front side).
After the job is completed, the stapler moves back to its home position. The stapler
HP sensor [B] detects this.
SM
23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B408
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
B408D117.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B408D118.WMF
After the copies have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [A] starts. The pawl
[B] on the stack feed-out belt [C] transports the set of stapled copies up and feeds
it to the shift roller. The shift roller takes over stack feed-out after the leading edge
reaches this roller.
Just before the stapled stack passes through the lower tray exit sensor, the stackfeed-out motor turns off until the shift rollers have completely fed the stack out to
the lower tray. Then, the stack-feed-out motor turns on again until the pawl [B]
actuates the stack feed-out belt home position sensor [D].
B408
24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B456
PAPER TRAY UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REAR COVER.............................................................................................. 1
PAPER FEED CLUTCHES........................................................................... 1
LIFT MOTORS ............................................................................................. 2
PAPER FEED MOTOR ................................................................................ 2
CONTROLLER BOARD ............................................................................... 2
PAPER FEED UNIT ..................................................................................... 3
PICKUP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS ......................................... 4
UPPER LIMIT, PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS................................ 4
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REAR COVER
Paper Tray
Unit
B456
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning
any of the procedures in this section.
: Clip ring
[B]
B456R002.WMF
[A]
[A]
[B]
[D]
B456R008.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LIFT MOTORS
[A]
[B]
B456R005.WMF
[A]
B456R006.WMF
B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED UNIT
[A]
[B]
B456R001.WMF
[C]
[E]
[C]
B456R003.WMF
[F]
B456R004.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B456
Paper Tray
Unit
B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PICKUP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
B456R009.WMF
[D] [E]
[B]
[A]
B456R113.WMF
B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
9
10
21
11
20
12
19
13
18
17
16
15
14
B456D001.WMF
NOTE: Listed above are the components of tray 1 (upper tray). Tray 2 (lower tray)
has the same components as tray 1.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B456
Paper Tray
Unit
B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
5
6
7
8
15
9
14
10
11
13
12
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B456D002.WMF
NOTE: Listed above are the components of tray 1 (upper tray), except for the right
cover switch and anti-condensation heater (there is only one each of these
for the entire unit). Tray 2 (lower tray) has the same components as tray 1.
B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
Paper Tray
Unit
B456
[B]
[E]
[C]
[D]
B456D004.WMF
Drive Path
Tray 1 (upper tray) and tray 2 (lower tray) have identical paper feed systems. The
paper feed motor [A] drives all the rollers in the unit. The paper feed clutches [B]
control the pickup roller [E], paper feed roller [C], and reverse roller [D].
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER SIZE DETECTION
[D]
[C]
[E]
[F]
[A]
[B]
B456D007.WMF
Four paper size switches [C to F] detect paper size. They use the paper tray
actuator [A], which is linked with the end plate [B]. The table lists the combinations
of switch status and detected paper size.
Models
North America
Europe/Asia
11" x 17" SEF
11" x 17" SEF
A3 SEF
A3 SEF
81/2" x 14" SEF
B4 SEF
81/2" x 11" SEF
A4 SEF
81/2" x 11" LEF
81/2" x 11" LEF
A4 LEF
A4 LEF
B5 LEF
B5 LEF
51/2" x 81/2" LEF
51/2" x 81/2" LEF
Switch Location
1 [C]
2 [D]
3 [E]
4 [F]
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
NOTE: 1) Other paper sizes cannot be automatically detected. The user must
select them at the operation panel with a user tool.
2) The machine disables feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be
detected (when the paper size actuator is broken or no tray is installed).
B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REVERSE ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE
[C]
Paper Tray
Unit
B456
[E]
[A]
[B]
B456D108.WMF
[E]
[A]
[D]
B456D109.WMF
The pickup roller and separation roller release the paper when it is not being fed.
This helps remove jammed paper easily.
When the paper tray [A] is not in the machine, the separation roller [B] is away from
the paper feed roller [C] and the pickup roller stays in its upper position.
When the paper tray is pushed into the machine, it pushes the release lever [E].
This causes the pickup roller [D] to go down into contact with the top sheet of
paper, and causes the reverse roller [B] to move up and contact the paper feed
roller.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER LIFT
[C]
B456D005.WMF
The tray lift motor [C] raises/lowers the tray bottom plate [A] (via the coupling gear
[B]), based on the signals from the paper size switches, paper end sensor, and
upper limit sensor.
The motor starts to lift the plate when all of the following three conditions exist: any
of the paper size switches is pushed, the paper end sensor actuator is in the
sensor, and the upper limit sensor actuator is out of the sensor. The motor stops
lifting the plate when the upper limit sensor actuator enters the sensor.
B456
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER HEIGHT AND END DETECTION
Paper Tray
Unit
B456
[D]
B456D006.WMF
Two paper height sensors detect the amount of paper in the tray. The actuator [A]
on the lift arm shaft [D] turns counterclockwise, passing through the paper height
sensor 2 [C] and the paper height sensor 1 [B].
Remaining paper
Full
Nearly full
Near end
SM
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER HEIGHT AND END DETECTION
[A]
[B]
[C]
B456D106.WMF
The paper end sensor [A] detects paper end. When the paper is all used, the paper
end sensor feeler [B] drops into the cutout [C] in the tray bottom plate.
When paper end is detected, the tray lift motor ( 2.6) lowers the bottom plate.
B456
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY
: Clip ring
Large
Capacity Tray
B457
1.1 TRAY
While pressing the stopper [A]
attached to the guide rail, pull out the
large capacity tray.
NOTE: When reinstalling the tray, set
the tray on the guide rail and
carefully push the tray in,
making sure to keep the tray
level.
[A]
B457R001.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SENSORS
1.2 SENSORS
[B]
[A]
[C]
1. Tray ( 1.1)
2. Rear fence [A] ( x 2)
3. Rear fence bracket [B] ( x 2)
4. Paper height sensors [C] (
x 2)
B457R002.WMF
[E]
[F]
[D]
B457R003.WMF
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE
[B]
[C]
[D]
Large
Capacity Tray
B457
B457R004.WMF
[A]
B457R105.WMF
[C]
B457R005.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY MOTOR
[A]
B457R006.WMF
[A]
B457R007.WMF
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH
B457R008.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
B457R009.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457
Large
Capacity Tray
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED UNIT
[A]
[C]
[B]
B457R010.WMF
[D]
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457R011.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PICKUP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS
[C]
[B]
Large
Capacity Tray
B457
[A]
B457R012.WMF
[B]
[A]
[C]
B457R013.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1
4
5
6
10
B457D001.WMF
1. Pickup Roller
4. Relay Sensor
5. Relay Roller
6. Separation Roller
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
4
5
8
B457D002.WMF
Large
Capacity Tray
B457
17
10
11
12
16
13
15
14
B457D003.WMF
1. Main board
2. Tray sensor
4. Tray motor
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
Name
Function
Tray
Tray Lift
Paper End 1
(paper feed side)
Index No.
4
6
Sensors
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
Relay
Upper Limit
Lower Limit
Paper Height 1, 2, 3
Paper Height 4, 5
Left Fence HP
Tray
Side Fence
S9
S10
S11
Paper Size
Paper End 2
(paper storage side)
Switches
SW1
Right Cover
Magnetic Clutches
MC1
Paper Feed
Stack Transport
MC2
13
14
12
11
10
17
16
2
9
8
15
5
3
PCBs
PCB1
B457
Main
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
Large
Capacity Tray
B457
[A]
[B]
[C]
B457D005.WMF
SM
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICKUP ROLLER RELEASE
[C]
[E]
[A]
[B]
B457D008.WMF
[E]
[A]
[D]
B457D009.WMF
To prevent the paper from being torn when pulling out the paper feed tray, the
separation and pickup rollers release automatically.
When the paper tray [A] is not inside the machine, the separation roller [B] is away
from the paper feed roller [C], and the pickup roller [D] stays in the upper position.
When the paper tray is set into the machine, it pushes the release lever [E]. This
causes the pickup roller [D] to go down into contact with the top sheet of paper and
the separation roller [B] to move up and contact the paper feed roller.
B457
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY LIFT
Large
Capacity Tray
B457
[B]
[D]
[A]
[E]
[C]
B457D010.WMF
[F]
B457D009.WMF
When the paper feed tray is put in the machine, the tray switch on the back turns
on and the tray lift motor [B] starts. The base plate lift shaft [C] is coupled to the lift
motor at the shaft [D], so the base plate [A] of the tray is lifted. After a short while,
the top of the paper stack contacts the pickup roller and lifts it up. Then the motor
stops lifting the plate when the upper limit sensor actuator enters the sensor (
2.2).
When paper in the tray is used up, the pick-up roller is gradually lowered, and the
actuator leaves the upper limit sensor [F]. When this happens, the lift motor begins
turning again. The tray will then be lifted until the actuator enters the upper limit
sensor again).
When the tray is removed from the copier, the coupling between the lift motor [B]
and base plate lift shaft [C] is broken and the base plate goes into a controlled free
fall (using a damper [E] to slow the fall and prevent damage).
SM
13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER AMOUNT DETECTION
Paper Height
Sensor 5
Paper Height
Sensor 2
Paper Height
Sensor 4
Paper Height
Sensor 3
Paper End
Sensor 2
H4
H5
PE2
Feed
side
PE1
H1
H2
H3
B457D112.WMF
Indication
^ >
Remarks
The table shows the change of sensor patterns after the storage side is half loaded
and the feed side is fully loaded.
Storage
side
H4
H5
PE2
Feed
side
PE1
H1
H2
H3
Indication
Remarks
^
>
B457
14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER END DETECTION OF PAPER FEED SIDE
Large
Capacity Tray
B457
[B]
[C]
B457D006.WMF
[E]
[D]
B457D007.WMF
The paper end sensor 1[A] detects when copy paper in the paper feed side runs
out.
When there is paper in the tray, the paper pushes up the feeler [B] and the actuator
enters the sensor. When paper runs out, the feeler drops and the actuator leaves
the sensor, and the machine detects that there is no paper in the tray.
When the user puts back the tray, the lever [E] lowers the pickup roller and the
feeler. When, on the other hand, the tray is pulled out, the lever lifts the roller and
feeler.
SM
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER STACK TRANSPORT
[F]
[E]
[C]
[A]
[B]
B457D004.WMF
When the paper in the paper feed side is used up, the tray motor [A] and stack
transport clutch [B] turn on. Then the rear fence [C] moves the stack of paper from
the paper storage side to the paper feed side.
NOTE: During paper feed, the stack transport clutch ( 2.2) does not switch on,
so drive from the tray motor only transfers to the relay roller and not to the
fence mechanism.
While the stack is in motion, it pushes the side fence [D] aside, and the side fence
sensor [E] detects that the fence is open.
After the stack has been moved all the way across, a spring in the side fence
moves the side fence back, and the side fence sensor detects that the fence is
closed. Then, the tray motor reverses until end fence home position sensor [F] is
deactivated.
B457
16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458
500-SHEET FINISHER
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXTERIOR
: Clip ring
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
1.1 EXTERIOR
[A]
B458R156.WMF
Pull out the lever [A] under the finisher while lifting the finisher off the machine.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXTERIOR
Front Cover
[A]: : Front cover ( x 1)
[A]
B458R101.WMF
Rear Cover
[B]: Rear cover ( x 1)
[B]
B458R102.WMF
Top Cover
[C]: Top cover (2 links)
[C]
B458R105.WMF
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXTERIOR
[A]
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
B458R116.WMF
[B]
B458R104.WMF
[C]
[D]
B458R103.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ENTRANCE UPPER GUIDE/PAPER EXIT UNIT
[G]
[F]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[C]
B458R106.WMF
Front, rear, and top covers and front lower guide ( 1.1 Exterior)
[A]: Entrance upper guide ( x 2,
x 1)
[B]: Paddle gear spring
[C]: Paddle gear ( x 1)
[D]: Paddle gear holder
[E]: Bushing ( x 1)
[F]: Paper exit unit holder ( x 1)
[G]: Rear paper exit unit holder ( x 1)
[H]: Exit unit
NOTE: Keep the paper exit unit stays in
the upper position. Rotate the
paddle roller into the position
shown in the illustration [a]. Then,
insert the paddle gear, making
sure that the pawl on the gears
outer frame is resting on the
clutch link [b].
[a]
[b]
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458R107.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ENTRANCE LOWER GUIDE
[A]
[B]
[C]
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
B458R108.WMF
[C]
[B]
B458R109.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER UNIT
[A]
[B]
B458R115.WMF
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[B]
[A]
B458R110.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER EXIT SENSOR FEELER
B458R121.WMF
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
[A]
[B]
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458R113.WMF
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JOGGER MOTOR
[A]
B458R114.WMF
B458R112.WMF
[A]
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OUTPUT TRAY UNIT
[C]
[B]
B458R118.WMF
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
B458R117.WMF
[G]
[F]
B458R119.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
2.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
Mechanical Component Layout
9
8
7
10
5
B458D101.WMF
B458
1. Output tray
4. Jogger tray
9. Paddle roller
5. Reverse roller
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
Drive Layout
7
2
B458D103.WMF
SM
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
1. Main motor
7. Reverse roller
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
7
11
10
B458D102.WMF
B458
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
Sensors
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
Solenoids
SOL1
SOL2
Name
Function
Index No.
Main
Jogger
Output Tray
Stapler
6
9
12
16
Entrance
Exit
Stack height
Lever
Jogger home
position
Top cover
Tray upper limit
3
15
13
14
Stack near-limit
11
10
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
Symbols
Motors
M1
M2
M3
M4
Switches
SW1
SW2
18
17
PCBs
PCB1
Main control
SOL3
SM
13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
7
5
8
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
B458D104.WMF
Stack height detection lever [A]: Driven by stack height lever solenoid [B].
Two sensors detect the height of the stack in the output tray: the stack height [C]
and lever [D] sensors.
Stack height
sensor
Lever sensor
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Off
Status
The stack height is below the target. The output tray is
then lifted to the target position.
Target stack height position
The stack height is above the target. The output tray is
then lowered to the target position.
The stack height detection lever is at home position.
At the start of a print job, the solenoid turns off. The stack height detection lever
comes down, to detect the current stack level.
When a sheet of paper is being fed out, the solenoid turns on and the lever goes
back up to home position (inside the unit).
After paper has been fed out, the solenoid turns on again, and the lever detects the
level of the stack.
B458
14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
[D]
[E]
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
[B]
[A]
[C]
B458D105.WMF
Overview
The output tray motor gear [A] lifts/lowers the tray if the stack height is not at the
target position.
Gears [B] and [C] keep the angle of the tray constant at any tray position.
SM
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
[H]
[J]
[E]
[I]
[G]
[D]
[B]
[C]
[C]
B458D109.WMF
B458D106.WMF
Before the job, the exit unit [A] is up, and the exit unit gear solenoid [B] is on,
pulling lever [C] away from the exit unit gear [D].
At the start of the job, the stack height detection lever detects the top of the stack.
The tray moves up or down if the top of the stack is not at the correct level.
When the paper exit sensor in the main frame turns on, the finisher main motor
starts. It drives the exit unit gear [D] through idle gear [E]. The gear pulls paper exit
unit [A] down, using the paper exit link [F]. The link also moves the paper exit roller
[H] up through the exit roller drive gear [G].
When the motor starts, the solenoid switches off and a spring pushes lever [C] into
contact with the exit unit gear [D].
When a part of the exit unit gear without threads [I] faces the idle gear, the gear
stops turning (see the left-hand diagram). The lever [C] catches a peg on the exit
unit gear, to make sure that it stops at the correct position. The paper exit rollers
[H] now contact each other and the main motor feeds out the paper.
When the last page has been fed out, the solenoid turns on to pull the lever away
from the gear. The gear starts turning, to lift the exit unit to the standby position.
When the other part of the exit unit gear without threads [J] faces the idle gear, the
exit unit gear stops. Then, the main motor stops and the solenoid turns off.
B458
16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
[C]
[B]
[A]
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
B458D111.WMF
[E]
[F]
B458D113.WMF
At the start of the job, and for odd numbered sets of copies, the mechanism is the
same as the straight feed out mode. However, even numbered sets are fed back to
the jogger tray, which shifts the sets to one side before feeding them out.
This section describes what happens for even-numbered sets (sets 2, 4, 6 etc) of
the job.
A short time after the entrance sensor [A] detects the first page of the set, the
paper exit unit solenoid turns on to restart the rotation of the paper exit unit gear,
raising the paper exit unit to the standby position. It stays there until after the last
page of the set.
The paper cannot feed out (because the feed rollers are not contacting each other),
so it drops into the jogger tray [B]. The paddle roller solenoid [C] turns on and the
paddle roller [D] feeds the paper to the reverse roller [E]. The reverse roller feeds
the paper to the end fence [F] of the jogger tray.
SM
17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B458D107.WMF
After the paper reaches the end fence [A], the jogger fence [B] shifts the paper
across. The jogger motor [C] drives the jogger fence. The home position sensor [D]
detects when the jogger fence has returned to home position.
When the next set begins, the paper exit unit moves down, and the machine
operates the same way as straight feed out mode. At this time, the entire set in the
jogger tray is fed out at the same time as the first page of the next set. However,
the set coming from the jogger tray has been shifted to one side.
If the last set is an even-numbered set, the paper exit unit must be pulled down to
feed the final set out of the jogger tray. Then the exit unit moves back up to the
standby position.
The capacity of the jogger tray is 30 sheets. If the set contains more than 30 sheets,
the machine feeds out the first 30 from the jogger tray, then continues with the rest
of the set, using the jogger tray.
B458
18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
Stapling Mode
[B]
[D]
[F]
[E]
[C]
B458D112.WMF
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
[B]
B458D114.WMF
[A]
[G]
B458D106.WMF
The stapler is attached to the jogger tray, so all sets go to the jogger tray.
After all pages of a set have entered the jogger tray and been shifted across, the
paper exit link [A] pulls the paper exit unit [B] down until knob [C] on the exit unit
pushes the link lever [D] for the exit unit switch [E]. This turns on the exit unit switch.
When this switch is on, dc is supplied to the stapler unit [F] and the main motor is
turned off.
The exit unit switch is activated when the exit unit is pulled part-way down. After
stapling the set of prints, the paper exit unit is pulled down again until the unit
comes in contact with the paper exit roller [G], and the stapled set is fed out.
SM
19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
Sensors
Entrance
Exit
Conditions
Either the entrance or exit sensor detects
paper just after the unit is initialized.
The entrance sensor is not activated within a
certain period after the paper exit sensor
detects paper.
The entrance sensor is not de-activated after
paper is fed 1.3 times the length of the
paper.
The exit sensor is not activated within a
certain period after the entrance sensor
detects paper.
The exit sensor is not de-activated after
paper is fed for a certain period.
The exit sensor is de-activated during paper
shifting or stapling.
Exit
Exit
Jogger tray
Exit
Conditions
The jogger home position sensor does not shut off after the
jogger motor starts.
The jogger home position sensor does not turn on after
paper shifting.
The stapler home position sensor (inside the stapler unit)
does not turn on after stapling.
The tray upper limit sensor is activated.
The output tray is away from the target position for more
than 10 seconds.
The stack height detection lever does not return to its home
position before going to detect the stack height.
NOTE: The above errors are indicated as Finisher jam at the first occurrence.
If the same error happens again in the next job, finisher error is indicated.
B458
20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B480
1-BIN TRAY UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B480
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER SENSOR REMOVAL
: Clip ring
[A]
[B]
1-Bin Tray
Unit
B480
B480R101.WMF
1. 1-bin tray
2. 1-bin sorter unit [A]
3. Paper sensor [B] (
x 1)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B480
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
B480D500.WMF
6
5
B480D501.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B480
Exit Rollers
Junction Gate Gear
Drive Gear
Paper Tray
Paper Sensor
Junction Gate (Interchange Unit)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1
2
B480D004.WMF
1. Paper Sensor
2. 1-bin Sorter Exit Tray LED
(located in the copier)
Function
Index No.
Paper
LEDs
LED1
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B480
1-Bin Tray
Unit
B480
Symbol
Sensors
S1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BASIC OPERATION
[C]
[A]
B480D502.WMF
[C]
[D]
B480D004.WMF
At the appropriate time after the leading edge of the first sheet of copy paper
reaches the copiers registration roller, the junction gate solenoid [A] in the
interchange unit turns on to switch the junction gate to direct the paper to the tray
[B].
The junction gate solenoid turns off at the appropriate time after the paper is
directed to the tray. The main motor in the copier stops after the final sheet passes
the paper sensor [C] and arrives on the tray.
The paper sensor [C] turns on when there is paper in the tray, and the paper
indicator [D] turns on.
The tray can be opened for easier jam removal by swinging the tray to the left.
B480
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B481
INTERCHANGE UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B481
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
: Clip ring
Interchange
Unit
B481
[A]
[B]
B481R001.WMF
1. Interchange unit
2. Upper cover [A] of the interchange unit
3. Exit sensor [B] (
x 1)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B481
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
2
1
4
5
7
B481D001.WMF
B481
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT
5
4
Interchange
Unit
B481
B481D503.WMF
B481R554.WMF
4. Exit Roller
2. Exit Sensor
5. Drive Gear
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B481
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
B481D504.WMF
[F]
[E]
[A]
[G]
[B]
B481D003.WMF
[A]
B481D002.WMF
Depending on the selected mode, the copies are directed up, left, or right by the
exit junction gate [A] and the duplex junction gate [B]. These are controlled by the
exit junction gate solenoid [C] and the duplex junction gate solenoid [D].
To the Exit Tray or Bridge Unit (for the Upper Tray on top of the Bridge
Unit, or the Finisher)
The exit junction gate solenoid stays off and the paper is directed to the copier exit
or bridge unit [E].
B481
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B482
BRIDGE UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B482
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT
: Clip ring
[B]
[A]
B482R103.WMF
NOTE: When taking apart the bridge unit, first take the unit out of the copier.
1. Bridge unit ( Installation Procedure in the base copier manual)
2. Rear cover [A] ( x 2)
Bridge Unit
B482
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B482
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[C]
[B]
B482R104.WMF
[A]
B482R102.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
10
1
2
B482D500.WMF
3. Junction Gate
4. Cooling Fan
9. Relay Sensor
Bridge Unit
B482
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B482
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE LAYOUT
2
B482D502.WMF
B482
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
6
7
4
3
2
8
B482D501.WMF
6. Relay Sensor
Bridge Unit
B482
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B482
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Name
Function
Index No.
Cooling Fan
Drive Motor
5
7
Sensors
S1
S2
Tray Exit
Relay
4
6
Switches
SW2
SW3
Right Guide
Left Guide
2
1
Junction Gate
Solenoids
SOL1
PCBs
PCB1
B482
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
[D]
[B]
[C]
B482D104.WMF
The junction gate [B] directs any paper reaching the bridge unit to either the upper
tray (on top of the bridge unit) or to the finisher, depending on which has been
selected.
Bridge Unit
B482
If the junction gate solenoid [A] has been activated, the junction gate [B] points
downward and directs the paper to the upper tray [D] (dotted line path in
illustration). When the solenoid is off, the junction gate points upward and the
paper is fed out to the finisher [C] by the transport and left exit rollers (solid line).
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B482
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B490
BY-PASS TRAY UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B490
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PICKUP/FEED ROLLER
: Clip ring
[A]
[C]
[D]
[B]
B490R102.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B490
By-Pass Tray
Unit
B490
B490R101.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED CLUTCH
[B]
4. Gears [C][D]
[C]
[A]
B490R153.WMF
5. Clutch [E] ( x 1)
[E]
B490R104.WMF
[A]
Top of unit
[B]
B490R105.WMF
B490
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD
[A]
B490R001.WMF
[D]
[F]
[E]
B490R002.WMF
Reassembling
1. Move the side fences to the centermost positions [D].
2. Align the sensor-board position mark [E] with the side-fence position mark [F]
and install the sensor board.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B490
By-Pass Tray
Unit
B490
[C]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1
2
3
15
4
5
6
14
13
12
11
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B490
7
10
8
B490D101.WMF
9. Reverse roller
10. Paper path (optional paper tray)
11. Paper path (bypass tray)
12. Friction pad (copier)
13. Feed roller (copier)
14. Vertical transport roller (copier)
15. Registration sensor (copier)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
[B]
[F]
[C]
[E]
[D]
B490D103.WMF
Power Source
The paper feed motor [A] inside the copier drives all the rollers and gears in the
bypass tray unit by way of a timing belt and gears. The transport roller gear [F] (in
the copier) contacts the leftmost gear [B] (in the bypass unit).
An FRR (feed and reverse roller) feed mechanism is used ( Paper Feed
Methods). The pickup roller [D] and feed roller [E] turn only when the clutch [C]
transmits the drive power.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B490
By-Pass Tray
Unit
B490
Rollers
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
B490D104.WMF
B490
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER SIZE DETECTION
[A]
[B]
B490D554.WMF
The side fences [A] are mechanically linked with the gear on the paper size sensor
board [B]. The gear turns when the fences are moved. The gear has terminals
which make different electric circuits when the gear is turned, so the machine
determines the width of the paper in the by-pass tray by the signals from the paper
size sensor board.
By-Pass Tray
Unit
B490
The paper length is not detected by this sensor (see Original Size Detection in the
manual for the base copier).
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B490
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B509
DUPLEX UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW .................................................................................................. 3
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT........................................................ 4
DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................... 5
DUPLEX PAPER FEED ORDER.................................................................. 6
2.4.1 LONGER THAN A4/LT LEF................................................................. 6
2.4.2 UP TO A4/LT LEF................................................................................ 7
2.5 REVERSE MECHANISM ............................................................................. 8
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B509
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXTERIOR COVER
: Clip ring
[A]
B509R101.WMF
[A]
[B]
Entrance Sensor
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
[C]
Exit Sensor
4. Exit sensor [C] (
x 1)
B509R102.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B509
Duplex Unit
B509
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INVERTER MOTOR
[A]
B509R103.WMF
[A]
B509R104.WMF
[A]
B509R105.WMF
B509
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 OVERVIEW
3
5
8
Duplex Unit
B509
B509D101.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
SM
Interchange unit
Paper entrance
Inverter gate
Entrance sensor
5.
6.
7.
8.
Inverter roller
Inverter section
Exit sensor
Paper exit path
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B509
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
3
4
5
6
7
8
B509D102.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
B509
Entrance sensor
Duplex unit open switch
Inverter gate solenoid
Cover sensor
5.
6.
7.
8.
Inverter motor
Controller board
Transport motor
Exit sensor
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE LAYOUT
Duplex Unit
B509
B509D103.WMF
1. Inverter motor
2. Transport motor
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B509
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX PAPER FEED ORDER
[B]
B509D519.WMF
B509D518.WMF
B509
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX PAPER FEED ORDER
[B]
Duplex Unit
B509
B509D520.WMF
B509D517.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B509
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REVERSE MECHANISM
[D]
[E]
[F]
[A]
[G]
[C]
[H]
B509D104.WMF
The duplex unit starts when the entrance sensor [E] detects paper coming in.
1. Duplex junction gate [A] in the interchange unit
Directs the paper to the duplex unit (up to A3 SEF)
2. Inverter roller [B]
Sends the paper to the inverter section [C]
3. Entrance sensor [E]
Detects the trailing edge of the paper
4. Inverter gate solenoid (behind [D])
Activates the inverter gate [D]
5. Inverter gate [D]
Switches the paper path
6. Inverter roller [F]
Changes its rotation direction (sends the paper to the exit path [G])
7. Transport roller [H]
Sends the paper to the main unit registration roller
B509
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B510
SHIFT TRAY UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B510
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY COVER REPLACEMENT
: Clip ring
[D]
[E]
B510R151.WMF
2. Align the square [E] so that it fits into the groove in the underside of the tray
cover and does not interfere with the attachment of the cover.
3. Complete the attachment by inserting the left side pawls [B] into place.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B510
Shift Tray
Unit
B510
1. Fit the pawls [C] (just below the cover fin) around the thin bar [D] on the shift
tray.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[C]
B510R101.WMF
B510
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COMPONENT LAYOUT
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
3
4
B510D151.WMF
4
B510D102.WMF
Shift Tray
Unit
B510
5. Driver PCB
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B510
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BASIC OPERATION
B510D500.WMF
The shift tray allows copies to be sorted into separate piles on one tray.
From the left-right movement of the tray cover [A], the piles of copies are offset into
two positions, slightly overlapping one another.
B510
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRIMARY MECHANISMS
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
B510D101.WMF
As stated above, the shift tray [A] moves from left to right to create two possible
positions for the copies to stack up. This motion is driven by the tray motor [B],
which connects to the slip disc [C] via a small shaft. The shaft is connected at the
rotational center of the disc. However, there is an off-centered white square
attached to the top surface of the disc. When the tray cover is attached to the unit,
this square fits into a groove [D] (approximately equal to its width) that runs
lengthwise along the underside of the tray.
Shift Tray
Unit
B510
When the motor is running, the disc rotation causes the off-centered white square
to change position. The square only has freedom of movement along the groove
[D], so the only net motion of the tray is from left to right.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B510
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRIMARY MECHANISMS
[C]
[A]
[B]
B510D101.WMF
Half turn detection is performed through a combination of two components: the slip
disc [A] and half turn sensor [C].
The slip disc has a rim extending below the top surface. However, the rim only
extends 180 around the disc. The half turn sensor is below the edge of the disc,
opposite the tray motor. The sensor is positioned so that the rim of the disc passes
between the LED and the photodiode when the disc turns.
While the motor [B] is rotating the disc and moving the tray cover, the disc rim is
not between the diode and LED. After the disc has turned its maximum 180, the
rim passes between these two parts and blocks the signal to the LED, stopping the
motor. The tray stays in place until the motor is activated again to move the tray
across to receive another copy of the original.
B510
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
FAX OPTION TYPE 3232
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3. TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................18
3.1 ERROR CODES......................................................................................... 18
3.2 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES......................................... 30
3.3 FAX SC CODES......................................................................................... 33
3.3.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 33
3.3.2 SC1201.............................................................................................. 33
3.3.3 FAX SC CODE TABLE ...................................................................... 34
4. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................35
4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE..................................................................... 35
4.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION...................................... 35
Entering and Exiting SP Mode ............................................................... 35
SP Mode Button Summary .................................................................... 36
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ............ 37
Selecting the Program Number.............................................................. 37
4.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ............................................. 38
4.2 BIT SWITCHES .......................................................................................... 44
4.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES ........................................................................ 44
4.2.2 I-FAX SWITCHES.............................................................................. 54
4.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES ....................................................................... 60
4.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES........................................................ 66
4.2.5 G3 SWITCHES .................................................................................. 74
4.2.6 G3-2/3 SWITCHES............................................................................ 81
4.2.7 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES ............................................................... 87
4.2.8 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES........................................................... 87
4.2.9 IP FAX SWITCHES ........................................................................... 87
4.3 NCU PARAMETERS .................................................................................. 93
4.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS ....................................... 102
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ..................................................... 102
4.4.2 PARAMETERS ................................................................................ 103
4.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES.................................................................. 106
SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................134
1.
2.
3.
4.
B750
ii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT (B750)
Rev. 06/2005
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 FAX UNIT (B750)
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against this list.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Description
Fax key
Fax panel
Jack cover
G3 decal
Screws
Stamp
FCU
Speaker assembly
Operating Instructions Fax Basic
Features (Except EU model)
Operating Instructions Fax Advanced
Features (Except EU model)
Handset Bracket (NA only) (not shown)
Telephone Line (NA only)
FCC Decal (NA only)
Serial Number Decal
10
11
12
13
14
Qty
2
1
1
1
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
B750I100.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT (B750)
Installation Procedure
CAUTION
Before installing this fax unit,
1) Print out all data in the printer buffer.
2) Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the
network cable.
1. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x 1).
2. Remove the rear cover [B] ( x 2).
[B]
[A]
B750I102.WMF
[C]
[D]
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750I106.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
[A]
[B]
[C]
[B]
[B]
B750I103.WMF
[D]
[E]
B750I104.WMF
5. Remove the screw [A] ( x 1) and loosen the eight screws [B] ( x 8).
6. Move the controller box cover [C] to the right side and remove it.
7. Attach the FCU [D] to the BICU ( x 4).
8. Change the MBU battery jumper switch connector [E] from the "OFF" position
to the "ON" position.
9. Carefully push down the MBU.
NOTE: Make sure that the MBU is installed in the correct position. If not, an SC
occurs (SC819, SC672 etc.).
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT (B750)
[A]
[E]
B750I105.WMF
[B]
[C]
[D]
[F]
B750I101.WMF
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT (B750)
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
[B]
[A]
B502I006.WMF
[C]
[D]
B750I501.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT (B750)
Rev. 06/2005
[A]
B750I107.WMF
19. Put the power plug into the outlet and turn the main switch ON.
NOTE: Make sure that the outlet is grounded.
NOTE: SRAM has been formatted is displayed after you turn ON the main
switch. Turn the main switch OFF and ON to use the machine. If the
display reoccurs, check the battery on the MBU board (step 8) is in the
ON position and the MBU is seated correctly on the FCU board.
20. Make sure that the date and time are correctly set.
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
Rev. 06/2005
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
Description
Flat cable
Harness
Screws
Clamps
CCU drive board
Telephone line (NA only)
SG3 board unit
FCC Decal (NA only)
Qty
1
1
7
2
1
1
1
1
SM
6
B751I106.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
Installation Procedure
CAUTION
Before installing this optional unit,
1) Print out all data in the printer buffer.
2) Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the
network cable.
1. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x 1).
2. Remove the rear cover [B] ( x 2).
[B]
B751I102A.WMF
[A]
[D]
[C]
B751I107.WMF
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
B751I501.WMF
[B]
[B]
B751I103A.WMF
[F]
[H]
[G]
[E]
[I]
B751I101.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
Rev. 06/2005
[A]
Clamp Positions
[B]
B751I102.WMF
[C]
B751I103.WMF
B750
[D]
B751I502.WMF
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
From this point, the procedure for installation of one G3 port is different from
the installation of two G3 ports.
To install two G3 ports: First do the For Dual G3 Port Installation procedure.
Then do the For Single or Dual G3 Port Installation procedure.
[A]
B751I104.WMF
1. Attach the SG3 board unit [A] to the I/O board cover bracket ( x 3, x 1).
SM
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
B751I151.WMF
1. From the second G3 interface unit, remove the telephone jack bracket [A]
( x 2), then remove the telephone jack [B].
2. Remove the G3 interface unit cover bracket [C] ( x 4).
3. Remove the G3 interface board [D] ( x 2).
B750
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
[B]
[A]
[C]
[E]
[F]
[D]
[G]
B751I152.WMF
[H]
B751I104.WMF
4. From the first G3 interface unit, remove the telephone jack bracket, telephone
jack, and G3 interface unit cover bracket as shown in steps 1 and 2.
5. Attach the second G3 interface board [A] to the right-hand connector on the G3
interface unit bracket [B] ( x 2).
6. Install the telephone jack harnesses [C, D] as shown. Then attach the G3
interface unit cover bracket [E] ( x 4).
7. Attach the telephone jack [F] to the telephone jack bracket [G].
8. Attach the telephone jack bracket [G] to the G3 interface unit cover bracket [E]
( x 2).
9. Attach the dual-SG3-board unit [H] to the I/O board cover bracket
( x 2, x 1).
SM
13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
B751I105.WMF
1. Attach the speaker assembly [A] to the I/O board cover bracket ( x 3, x 2).
2. Hold the harnesses with clamps [B].
3. Reattach the controller box cover.
NOTE: When reassembling, use caution not to damage harnesses and
electrical circuits.
4. Reattach the rear cover ( x 2).
5. Connect the telephone line/s to the
jack/s [C]
For a single G3 interface unit: LINE 2
For a dual G3 interface unit:
LINE 2 and 3
[C]
B751I107A.WMF
14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
Rev. 06/2005
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
[B]
[A]
SM
B750I109.WMF
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
1.2.3 HANDSET
NOTE: The optional handset is available for the U.S. version only.
[E]
[D]
[A]
[C]
[B]
[F]
B750I108.WMF
B750
16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NOTES FOR FCU BOARD REPLACEMENT
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
SM
17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
3.1 ERROR CODES
If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to
fix the problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the
error code display and on the service report.
Code
0-00
Meaning
DIS/NSF not detected within
40 s of Start being pressed
0-01
0-03
0-04
0-05
B750
Suggested Cause/Action
Check the line connection.
Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
The machine at the other end may be
incompatible.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.
If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad line.
The other party is out of paper or has a jammed
printer.
The other party pressed Stop during
communication.
The other terminal is incompatible.
Check the line connection.
Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
Try changing the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
Replace the FCU or NCU.
The other terminal may be faulty; try sending to
another machine.
If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may be
a bad line.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4
Check the line connection.
Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer.
Replace the FCU or NCU.
Check for line problems.
Cross reference
See error code 0-04.
18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Code
0-06
Meaning
The other terminal did not
reply to DCS
0-07
No post-message response
from the other end after a
page was sent
0-08
0-14
SM
Suggested Cause/Action
Check the line connection.
Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
The other end may be defective or incompatible;
try sending to another machine.
Check for line problems.
Cross reference
See error code 0-04.
Check the line connection.
Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
The other end may have jammed or run out of
paper.
The other end user may have disconnected the
call.
Check for a bad line.
The other end may be defective; try sending to
another machine.
Check the line connection.
Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
The other end may have jammed, or run out of
paper or memory space.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
The other end may have a defective
modem/NCU/FCU; try sending to another
machine.
Check for line problems and noise.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4
Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try
sending to another machine.
Noisy line: resend.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
Cross reference
See error code 0-08.
19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
ERROR CODES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Code
0-15
Meaning
The other terminal is not
capable of specific
functions.
0-16
0-20
0-21
0-22
B750
Suggested Cause/Action
The other terminal is not capable of accepting the
following functions, or the other terminals memory
is full.
Confidential rx
Transfer function
SEP/SUB/PWD/SID
Check the line connection.
Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
The other end may have disconnected, or it may
be defective; try calling another machine.
If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a line
problem.
Cross reference
See error code 0-08.
Check the line connection.
Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
Check for line problems.
Try calling another fax machine.
Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first
line and/or rx cable equalizer setting.
Cross reference
Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6
Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Check the connections between the FCU, NCU, &
line.
Check for line noise or other line problems.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
The remote machine may be defective or may
have disconnected.
Cross reference
Maximum interval between EOLs and between
ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4
Check the line connection.
Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
Defective remote terminal.
Check for line noise or other line problems.
Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
Cross reference
Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch
0A, bits 0 and 1
20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Code
0-23
Meaning
Too many errors during
reception
0-30
0-32
0-52
0-55
0-56
0-70
0-74
0-75
SM
Suggested Cause/Action
Check the line connection.
Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
Defective remote terminal.
Check for line noise or other line problems.
Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/or
rx error criteria.
Cross reference
Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits 0
and 1
Check the line connection.
Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
The other terminal may not be compatible.
Cross reference
Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4
Check the protocol dump list.
Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
ERROR CODES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Code
0-76
0-77
0-79
0-80
0-81
0-82
0-83
0-84
0-85
0-86
0-87
0-88
B750
Meaning
The calling terminal fell back
to T.30 mode, because it
could not detect a JM in
response to a CM
(CM timeout).
The called terminal fell back
to T.30 mode, because it
could not detect a CJ in
response to JM
(JM timeout).
The called terminal detected
CI while waiting for a V.21
signal.
The line was disconnected
due to a timeout in V.34
phase 2 line probing.
The line was disconnected
due to a timeout in V.34
phase 3 equalizer training.
The line was disconnected
due to a timeout in the V.34
phase 4 control channel
start-up.
The line was disconnected
due to a timeout in the V.34
control channel restart
sequence.
The line was disconnected
due to abnormal signaling in
V.34 phase 4 control
channel start-up.
The line was disconnected
due to abnormal signaling in
V.34 control channel restart.
The line was disconnected
because the other terminal
requested a data rate using
MPh that was not available
in the currently selected
symbol rate.
The control channel started
after an unsuccessful
primary channel.
The line was disconnected
because PPR was
transmitted/received 9
(default) times within the
same ECM frame.
Suggested Cause/Action
The called terminal could not detect a CM due to
noise, etc.
Check the line connection and condition.
Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
The calling terminal could not detect a JM due to
noise, etc.
A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot pass
JM to the other end.
Check the line connection and condition.
Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
Check for line noise or other line problems.
If this error occurs, the called terminal falls back to
T.30 mode.
The guard timer expired while starting these
phases. Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or low
signal level can cause these errors.
If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal:
Try making a call at a later time.
Try using V.17 or a slower modem using
dedicated tx parameters.
Try increasing the tx level.
Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting.
If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting.
Try increasing the tx level.
Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the same
error is frequent when receiving from multiple
senders.
The signal did not stop within 10 s.
Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
2-12
2-13
Meaning
Only one V.21 connection
flag was received
Modem clock irregularity
Modem initialization error
Suggested Cause/Action
Replace the FCU.
2-23
JBIG compression or
reconstruction error
2-24
2-25
2-26
2-27
2-28
2-29
2-50
2-51
2-53
4-01
4-10
5-10
5-20
5-21
Communication failed
because of an ID Code
mismatch (Closed Network)
or Tel. No./CSI mismatch
(Protection against Wrong
Connections)
DCR timer expired
Storage impossible because
of a lack of memory
Memory overflow
5-23
5-25
SM
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
Code
2-11
FCU defective
Check the destination device.
If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the
FCU.
If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the
FCU.
23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Code
6-00
6-01
6-02
6-04
Meaning
G3 ECM - T1 time out
during reception of facsimile
data
G3 ECM - no V.21 signal
was received
G3 ECM - EOR was
received
G3 ECM - RTC not detected
6-05
6-06
G3 ECM - coding/decoding
error
6-08
6-09
6-10
6-21
6-22
6-99
13-17
13-18
B750
Suggested Cause/Action
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.
Replace the FCU or NCU.
24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Code
14-00
Meaning
SMTP Send Error
14-01
14-02
No Service by SMTP
Service (421)
Access to SMTP Server
Denied (450)
14-03
14-04
14-05
14-06
14-07
14-08
14-09
14-10
14-11
Buffer Full
14-12
14-13
Send Cancelled
SM
Suggested Cause/Action
Error occurred during sending to the SMTP server.
Occurs for any error other than 14-01 to 16. For
example, the mail address of the system
administrator is not registered.
Failed to connect to the SMTP server (timeout)
because the server could not be found.
The IP address for the SMTP server is not stored
in the machine.
The DNS IP address is not registered.
Network not operating correctly.
Defective PC that does file transfer
SMTP server operating incorrectly.
Failed to access the SMTP server because the
access is denied.
SMTP server operating incorrectly
Defective PC that does file transfer
SMTP server operating incorrectly
Failed to access the SMTP server because the HDD
is full.
SMTP Server hard disk full.
Insufficient HDD space in the PC that does file
transfer
The user does not exist locally.
Failed to access the SMTP server because the
transmission fails.
SMTP server operating incorrectly
Defective PC that does file transfer
Failed to access the SMTP server because the
transmission fails.
SMTP server operating incorrectly
Defective PC that does file transfer
POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP authorization failed.
Incorrect setting for file transfer
Number of broadcast addresses exceeded the limit
for the SMTP server.
The send buffer is full so the transmission could not
be completed. Buffer is full due to using Scan-toEmail while the buffer is being used send mail at the
same time.
Transmission was cancelled because the detected
size of the file was too large.
Processing is interrupted because the user pressed
Stop.
25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
ERROR CODES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Code
14-30
Meaning
MCS File Creation Failed
14-31
14-32
14-33
14-50
14-51
14-60
14-61
15-01
15-02
15-03
15-10
15-11
15-12
Authorization Error
B750
Suggested Cause/Action
Failed to create the MCS file because:
The number of files created with other
applications on the Document Server has
exceeded the limit.
HDD is full or not operating correctly.
Software error.
UFS file could not be created:
Not enough space in UFS area to handle both
Scan-to-Email and IFAX transmission.
HDD full or not operating correctly.
Software error.
Error detected with NFAX and send was cancelled
due to a software error.
Neither the mail address of the machine nor the mail
address of the network administrator is registered.
Due to an FCU mail job task error, the send was
cancelled:
Address book was being edited during creation of
the notification mail.
Software error.
Not even one return notification can be downloaded:
The address book was being edited.
The number for the specified destination does not
exist (it was deleted or edited after the job was
created).
The cancel operation by the user failed to cancel the
send operation.
All addresses for return notification mail failed.
At startup, the system detected that the IP address
of the POP3/IMAP4 server has not been registered
in the machine.
The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has not been
registered.
The mail address has not been registered.
Error other than 15-11 to 15-18.
The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server could not be
found:
The IP address for DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server is
not stored in the machine.
The DNS IP address is not registered.
Network not operating correctly.
POP3/IMAP4 send authorization failed:
Incorrect IFAX user name or password.
Access was attempted by another device, such as
the PC.
POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect.
26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Code
15-13
Meaning
Receive Buffer Full
15-14
15-15
15-16
15-17
15-18
15-31
15-39
15-41
15-42
15-43
15-44
Addresses Over
15-61
15-62
15-63
15-64
SM
Suggested Cause/Action
Occurs only during manual reception. Transmission
cannot be received due to insufficient buffer space.
The buffer is being used for mail send or Scan-toEmail.
The mail header is not standard format. For
example, the Date line description is incorrect.
The e-mail is not in standard format. There is no
boundary between parts of the e-mail, including the
header.
The mail cannot be received because it is too large.
May occur during manual receiving only because
the network is not operating correctly.
Only one portion of the mail was received.
The format of the final destination for the transfer
request was incorrect.
The transmission cannot be delivered to the final
destination:
Destination file format is incorrect.
Could not create the destination for the file
transmission.
Reception rejected because the transaction
exceeded the limit for the Auth. E-mail RX setting.
The delivery destination address was specified with
Off Ramp Gateway OFF.
Format error in the address of the Off Ramp
Gateway.
The number of addresses for the Off Ramp
Gateway exceeded the limit of 30.
The attached file is not TIFF format.
Could not receive transmission due to:
Resolution error
Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi without
extended memory.
Resolution is not supported.
Page size error
The page size was larger than A3.
Compression error
File was compressed with other than MH, MR, or
MMR.
The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not be
received because the TIFF header is incorrect:
The TIFF file attachment is a type not supported.
The TIFF file attachment is corrupted.
Software error.
The file received as an attachment caused the TIFF
decompression error:
The TIFF format of the attachment is corrupted.
Software error.
27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
ERROR CODES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Code
15-71
Meaning
Not Binary Image Data
15-73
15-74
15-80
15-81
Repeated Destination
Registration Error
15-91
15-92
Memory Overflow
15-93
15-94
Incorrect ID Code
15-95
22-00
22-01
22-02
22-04
B750
Suggested Cause/Action
The file could not be received because the
attachment was not binary image data.
Could not find the Disposition line in the header of
the Return Receipt, or there is a problem with the
firmware.
Could not find the Original Message ID line in the
header of the Return Receipt, or there is a problem
with the firmware.
Could not receive the transmission because the
destination buffer is full and the destination could
not be created (this error may occur when receiving
a transfer request or a request for notification of
reception).
Could not repeat receive the transmission because
the destination buffer is full and the destination
could not be created (this error may occur when
receiving a transfer request or a request for
notification of reception).
Could not receive the file for transfer to the final
destination:
The format of the final destination or the transfer
destination is incorrect.
Destinations are full so the final and transfer
destinations could not be created.
Transmission could not be received because
memory overflowed during the transaction.
Transaction could not complete due to a malfunction
of SAF memory.
The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for
transfer request, because the ID code in the
incoming e-mail did not match the ID code
registered in the machine.
The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for
transfer because the transfer function was
unavailable.
Divide the original into more than one page.
Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower the
scan resolution if possible.
Add optional page memory.
Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.
Delete unnecessary files from memory.
Transfer the substitute reception files to an another
fax machine, if the machines printer is busy or out
of order.
Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk.
The job started normally but did not finish normally;
data may or may not have been received fully.
Restart the machine.
Update the ROM
Replace the FCU.
28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
23-00
25-00
F0-xx
F6-xx
SM
Meaning
No G3 parameter
confirmation answer
Data read timeout during
construction
The machine software
resets itself after a fatal
transmission error occurred
V.34 modem error
SG3-V34 modem error
Suggested Cause/Action
Defective FCU board or firmware.
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
Code
22-05
29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Item
Action
Remarks
General LAN
Between IFAX
and PC
Between
machine and email server
B750
30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Communication
Route
Item
2. E-mail account on
the server
Between
machine and email server
3. E-mail server
1. E-mail account on
the Server
2. E-mail server
Between e-mail
server and
internet
3. Destination e-mail
address
SM
Action
Make sure that the
machine can log into
the e-mail server.
Check that the
account and
password stored in
the server are the
same as in the
machine.
Make sure that the
client devices which
have an account in
the server can
send/receive e-mail.
Remarks
Ask the administrator
to check.
31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Communication
Route
Item
4. Router settings
Between e-mail
server and
internet
Between e-mail
server and
internet
B750
1. Error message by
e-mail from the
network of the
destination.
Action
Remarks
32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.3.2 SC1201
When the FCU detects an unrecoverable error in the SRAM, which requires a
complete SRAM initialization, the fax unit displays this SC Code and stops.
There is no way to recover from this error condition without a complete SRAM
initialization (all the user and service programmed data will be erased).
The possible causes are:
SRAM backup battery defect, or SW1 on the MBU is at the OFF position.
The SRAM on the MBU has a physical defect.
SD card connection was loose.
SM
33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
FAX SC CODES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX SC CODES
Description
1001
FCU error
1201
1299
1305
1310
1311
1312
1401
1405
B750
Suggested
Action
Initialize the fax unit.
(See section 3.3.1.for
the initialization
procedure)
Refer to section 3.3.2.
Initialize the fax unit.
Sys Switch
1F bit 7 = 0
Automatic
reset
Sys Switch
1F bit 7 = 1
SC Code
display
Service Call
display
Automatic
reset
34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4. SERVICE TABLES
CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power
switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then
switch the main power switch off.
NOTE: The main power LED (
1.
3.
Fax SP
4.
5.
Exit
SM
35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B750S500.WMF
Press twice to leave the SP mode return to the copy window to resume normal operation.
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next line, line by line.
B750
Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
Not used for the Fax SP mode.
Enter the SP mode directly with the number keys if you know the SP number and then
press . (SP Mode must be highlighted before you can enter the number. Just press SP
Mode if it is not highlighted.)
Press any Group number to open a list of SP modes and titles for that group. For
example, to open the SP mode list for SP1-nnn , press Group1. If an SP has sublevels,
click the appropriate button to expand the list.
Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display
(page).
Press to move to the highlight to the previous or next selection in the list on the left.
36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750S501.WMF
NOTE: Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings. ( 4.1.2)
1. To enter a setting
Press to toggle between plus and minus and then use the keypad to enter
the appropriate number. The number you enter write over the previous
setting.
Press to enter the setting. (If you enter a number that is out of range, the
key pressed is ignored.)
When you are prompted to complete the selection, press Yes.
2. When you are finished, press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
SM
37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
111
Mode No.
System Switch
001 032
00 1F
Function
Change the bit switches for system settings
for the fax option
Section 4.2 Bit Switches
Ifax Switch
001 016
00 0F
Printer Switch
001 016
00 0F
Communication Switch
001 032
00 1F
G3-1 Switch
001 016
00 0F
G3-2 Switch
001 016
00 0F
G3-3 Switch
001 016
00 0F
G4 Internal Switch
001 032
00 1F
G4 Parameter Switch
001 016
00 0F
IP fax Switch
001 016
00 0F
102
B750
Mode No.
RAM Read/Write
001
Function
Change RAM data for the fax board directly.
Section 4.5 Service RAM Addresses
Memory Dump
001
G3-1 Memory Dump
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
102
103
104
105
002
Mode No.
G3-2 Memory Dump
003
004
G4 Memory Dump
Function
Print out RAM data for the optional SG3
board.
Print out RAM data for the optional SG3
board.
Print out RAM data for the SiG4 board.
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
102
103
104
SM
Mode No.
Service Station
001
Fax Number
002
Select Line
Serial Number
000
PSTN-1 Port Settings
001
Select Line
002
003
Memory Lock
Disabled
Function
Enter the fax number of the service station.
Select the line type.
Enter the fax units serial number.
Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line.
If the machine is installed on a PABX line,
select PABX, PABX(GND) or
PABX(FLASH).
Enter the PSTN access number for the
G3-1 line.
If the customer does not want to receive
transmissions using Memory Lock on this
line, turn this SP on.
Select the line setting for the G3-2 line. If
the machine is installed on a PABX line,
select PABX, PABX(GND) or
PABX(FLASH).
Enter the PSTN access number for the G32 line.
002
003
Memory Lock
Disabled
004
Transmission
Disabled
39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
3
105
Mode No.
Function
002
003
Memory Lock
Disabled
004
106
107
201
Transmission
Disabled
ISDN Port Settings
001
Select Line
002
PSTN Access Number
003
Memory Lock
Disabled
004
Transmission
Disabled
IPFAX Port Settings
001
H323 Port
002
SIP Port
003
RAS Port
004
Gatekeeper port
005
T.38 Port
006
SIP Server Port
007
IPFAX Protocol
Priority
FAX SW
001 032 00 1F
B750
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
Mode No.
FCU ROM Version
Error Codes
G3-1 ROM Version
G3-2 ROM Version
G3-3 ROM Version
G4 ROM Version
Charge ROM Version
Function
Displays the FCU ROM version.
Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.
Displays the G3-1 modem version.
Displays the G3-2 modem version.
Displays the G3-3 modem version.
Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP5-XXX (Initializing)
5
101
102
103
104
Mode No.
Initialize SRAM
000
Erase All Files
000
Reset Bit Switches
000
Function
Initializes the bit switches and user
parameters, user data in the SRAM, files in
the SAF memory, and clock.
Erases all files stored in the SAF memory.
Resets the bit switches and user
parameters.
Factory setting
000
SP6-XXX (Reports)
6
101
102
103
103
104
SM
Mode No.
System Parameter List
000
Service Monitor Report
000
G3 Protocol Dump List
001
G3 All
Communications
002
G3-1 (All
Communications)
003
G3-1
(1 Communication)
004
G3-2
(All Communications)
005
G3-2
(1 Communication)
006
G3-3
(All Communications)
007
G3-3
(1 Communication)
G4 Protocol Dump List
001
Dch + Bch 1
002
Dch
003
Bch 1 Link Layer
004
Dch Link Layer
005
Dch +Bch 2
006
Bch 2 Link Layer
Function
Touch the ON button to print the system
parameter list.
Touch the ON button to print the service
monitor report.
Prints the protocol dump list of all
communications for all G3 lines.
Prints the protocol dump list of all
communications for the G3-1 line.
Prints the protocol dump list of the last
communication for the G3-1 line.
Prints the protocol dump list of all
communications for the G3-2 line.
Prints the protocol dump list of the last
communication for the G3-2 line.
Prints the protocol dump list of all
communications for the G3-3 line.
Prints the protocol dump list of the last
communication for the G3-3 line.
Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
6
105
106
Mode No.
All Files print out
000
108
Specified Date
B750
107
Function
1 Communication
42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
7
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
Function
G3-1 Modem Tests
G3-1 DTMF Tests
Ringer Test
G3-1 V34 (S2400baud)
G3-1 V34 (S2800baud)
G3-1 V34 (S3000baud)
G3-1 V34 (S3200baud)
G3-1 V34 (S3429baud)
Recorded Message Test
G3-2 Modem Tests
G3-2 DTMF Tests
G3-2 V34 (S2400baud)
G3-2 V34 (S2800baud)
G3-2 V34 (S3000baud)
G3-2 V34 (S3200baud)
G3-2 V34 (S3429baud)
G3-3 Modem Tests
G3-3 DTMF Tests
G3-3 V34 (S2400baud)
G3-3 V34 (S2800baud)
G3-3 V34 (S3000baud)
G3-3 V34 (S3200baud)
G3-3 V34 (S3429baud)
IG3-1 Modem Tests - Not used
IG3-1 DTMF Tests - Not used
IG3-1 V34 (S2400baud) - Not used
IG3-1 V34 (S2800baud) - Not used
IG3-1 V34 (S3000baud) - Not used
IG3-1 V34 (S3200baud) - Not used
IG3-1 V34 (S3429baud) - Not used
IG3-2 Modem Tests - Not used
IG3-2 DTMF Tests - Not used
IG3-2 V34 (S2400baud) - Not used
IG3-2 V34 (S2800baud) - Not used
IG3-2 V34 (S3000baud) - Not used
IG3-2 V34 (S3200baud) - Not used
IG3-2 V34 (S3429baud) - Not used
SM
Mode No.
Design Switch DFU
Function
43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
SP No. 1-101-001
COMMENTS
Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated
transmission parameters.
Reset this bit to 0 after programming dedicated
transmission parameters.
1: Confidential RX messages can be printed out
without the password. Use this bit if the customer
forgot the password for the confidential messages.
Reset this bit to 0 after printing confidential RX
messages.
1: Instead of the personal name, the following data
are listed on the Journal for each G3
communication.
B750
44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
System Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
2
Rx level calculation
SP No. 1-101-001
COMMENTS
3
4
5
G3 Communication Parameters
Modem rate
Resolution
Compression mode
Communication
mode
SM
45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Width and
reduction
I/O rate
System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0-3 Not used
4
File retention time
0: Depends on User Parameter
24 [18(H)]
1: No limit
5
Not used
6-7 Memory read/write by RDS
Bit 7 6
Setting
0
0
Always disabled
0
1
User selectable
1
0
User selectable
1
1
Always enabled
System Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0
Length of time that RDS is
to temporarily switched on when
7
bits 6 and 7 of System Switch
02 are set to User selectable
System Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
0-2 Not used
3
Printing dedicated tx
parameters on Quick/Speed
Dial Lists
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
B750
SP No. 1-101-003
COMMENTS
Do not change these settings.
1: A file that had a communication error will not be
erased unless the communication is successful.
46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
System Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
4-7 Not used
SP No. 1-101-005
COMMENTS
Do not change these settings.
System Switch 05 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
0
Margin setting for Create
to Margin Transmission
7
SP No. 1-101-007
COMMENTS
71 to 99 (BCD) %. This setting determines the
reduction ratio when the user uses the Create
Margin Transmission feature.
Default setting:1001 0011 (93%)
System Switch 07 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 08 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 09
No
FUNCTION
0
Addition of image data from
confidential transmissions on
the transmission result report
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1
Inclusion of communications on
the Journal when no image
data was exchanged.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
2
4
5
SM
SP No. 1-101-010
COMMENTS
If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first
page of confidential messages will be printed on
transmission result reports.
0: Communications that reached phase C (message
tx/rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
1: Communications that reached phase A (call
setup) of T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
This will include telephone calls.
0: Error reports will not be printed.
1: Error reports will be printed automatically after
failed communications.
1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.
47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 09
No
FUNCTION
7
Priority given to various types
of remote terminal ID when
printing reports
0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel.
number
1: Dial label > Tel. number >
RTI > CSI
System Switch 0A
No
FUNCTION
0
Automatic port selection
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
1-2 Not used
3
Continuous polling reception
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
On hook dial
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
Not used
6-7
SP No. 1-101-010
COMMENTS
This bit determines which set of priorities the
machine uses when listing remote terminal names
on reports.
Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for the
Quick/Speed Dial number.
SP No. 1-101-011
COMMENTS
When "1" is selected, a suitable port is automatically
selected if the selected port is not used.
Do not change these settings.
This feature allows a series of stations to be polled
in a continuous cycle. This will continue until the
polling reception file is erased.
The dialing interval is the same as memory
transmission.
0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the
external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting when
the external telephone is not by the machine, or if a
wireless telephone is connected as an external
telephone.
1: The user can dial on the machines ten-key pad
when the handset is off-hook.
0: On hook dial is disabled.
Do not change the factory settings
System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0E
No
FUNCTION
0-2 Not used
3
Action when the external
handset goes off-hook
0: Manual tx and rx operation
1: Memory tx and rx operation
(the display remains the same)
4-7
B750
Not used
SP No. 1-101-015
COMMENTS
Do not change the settings.
0: Manual tx and rx are possible while the external
handset is off-hook. However, memory tx is not
possible.
1: The display stays in standby mode even when
the external handset is used, so that other people
can use the machine for memory tx operation.
Note that manual tx and rx are not possible with this
setting.
Do not change these settings.
48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
System Switch 0F
No
FUNCTION
0
Country/area code for
to functional settings (Hex)
7
00: France 11: USA
01: Germany 12: Asia
02: UK
13: Japan
03: Italy
14: Hong Kong
04: Austria 15: South Africa
05: Belgium 16: Australia
06: Denmark 17: New Zealand
07: Finland 18: Singapore
08: Ireland
19: Malaysia
09: Norway 1A: China
0A: Sweden 1B: Taiwan
0B: Switz.
1C: Korea
0C: Portugal 20: Turkey
0D: Holland 21: Greece
0E: Spain
22: Hungary
0F: Israel
23: Czech
10: Canada 24: Poland
System Switch 10
No
FUNCTION
0
Threshold memory level for
to parallel memory transmission
7
System Switch 11
No
FUNCTION
0
TTI printing position
0: Superimposed on the page
data
1: Printed before the data
leading edge
1
TSI (G3) printing position
0: Superimposed on the page
data
1: Printed before the data
leading edge
2
Not used
3
TTI used for broadcasting
0: The TTIs selected for each
Quick/Speed dial are used
1: The same TTI is used for all
destinations
SM
SP No. 1-101-016
COMMENTS
This country/area code determines the factory
settings of bit switches and RAM addresses.
However, it has no effect on the NCU parameter
settings and communication parameter RAM
addresses.
Cross reference
NCU country code:
SP No. 2-103-001 for G3-1
SP No. 2-104-001 for G3-2
SP No. 2-105-001 for G3-3
SP No. 1-101-017
COMMENTS
Threshold = N x 128 KB + 256 KB
N can be between 00 - FF(H)
Default setting: 02(H) = 512 KB
SP No. 1-101-018
COMMENTS
Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints information
that the customer considers to be important (G3
transmissions).
49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 11
No
FUNCTION
4
Type of TTI used for
transmission using the ten-key
pad
0: TTI_1
1: TTI_2
5-7 Not used
SP No. 1-101-018
COMMENTS
1: The machine uses TTI_2 when the user dials the
destination using the ten-key pad. It is also used for
polling transmission and manual transmission using
the handset.
System Switch 12
No
FUNCTION
0
TTI printing position in the main
to scan direction
7
SP No. 1-101-019
COMMENTS
TTI: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm
Input even numbers only.
This setting determines the print start position for
the TTI from the left edge of the paper. If the TTI is
moved too far to the right, it may overwrite the file
number which is on the top right of the page. On an
A4 page, if the TTI is moved over by more than 50
mm, it may overwrite the page number.
B750
SP No. 1-101-022
COMMENTS
Do not change the settings.
1: The machine will restart from the Energy Saver
mode quickly, because the +5V power supply is
active even in the Energy Saver mode.
Do not change these settings.
If there is a file waiting for transmission, the machine
does not go to Energy Saver mode during the
selected period.
After transmitting the file, if there is no file waiting for
transmission, the machine goes to the Energy Saver
mode.
50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
System Switch 16
No
FUNCTION
0
Parallel Broadcasting
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
Priority setting for the G3 line.
0: PSTN-1 > PSTN-2 or 3
1: PSTN-2 or 3 > PSTN-1
2-7 Not used
SP No. 1-101-023
COMMENTS
1: The machine sends messages simultaneously
using all available ports during broadcasting.
This function allows the user to select the default G3
line type. The optional SG3 unit(s) are required to
use the PSTN-2 or 3 setting.
Do not change these settings.
SP No. 1-101-026
COMMENTS
Do not change the settings.
0: After installing the memory expansion option, the
scanner page memory is extended to 4 MB from 2
MB.
1: If this bit is set to 1 after installing the memory
expansion option, the scanner page memory is
extended to 12 MB. But the SAF memory decreases
to 18 MB.
1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a form
or letterhead which has a colored or printed
background, change this bit to 1. Original 1 and
Original 2 can be selected in addition to the Text,
Text/Photo and Photo modes.
SM
SP No. 1-101-030
COMMENTS
1: RTI/CSI/CPS is displayed on the top line of the
LCD panel during communication.
Do not change this setting.
When "1" is selected, the destination telephone
number display is limited and redial is disabled.
Do not change these settings.
51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 1E
No
FUNCTION
0
Communication after the
Journal data storage area has
become full
0: Impossible
1: Possible
6-7
B750
SP No. 1-101-031
COMMENTS
This setting is effective only when Automatic Journal
printout is enabled but the machine cannot print the
report (e.g., no paper).
0: If the buffer memory of the communication
records for the Journal has become full, fax
communications will become impossible, to prevent
overwriting the communication records before the
machine prints them out.
1: If the buffer memory of the communication
records for the Journal is full, fax communications
are still possible. But the machine will overwrite the
oldest communication records.
Cross Reference
Automatic Journal output - User switch 03 bit 7
Number of communication records for the
Journal:
200 records (standard)
1000 records (with the Function Upgrade unit
installed)
0: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,
the successfully scanned pages are transmitted.
1: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,
the file is erased and no pages are transmitted.
This bit switch is ignored for parallel memory
transmission.
This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is
displayed on the LCD while the machine is
communicating in G3 non-standard mode.
1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.
If authorized reception is enabled but the user has
stored no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs, the
machine will not be able to receive any fax
messages.
If the customer wishes to receive messages from
any sender that includes an RTI or CSI, and to block
messages from senders that do not include an RTI
or CSI, change this bit to 1, then enable
Authorized Reception.
Otherwise, keep this bit at 0 (default setting).
0: When the machine has both RTI/CSI and the
telephone number information, the machine displays
RTI/CSI.
1: The machine always displays the telephone
number.
Do not change the settings
52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
System Switch 1F
No
FUNCTION
0
Not used
1
Report printout after an original
jam during SAF storage or if
the SAF memory fills up
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
2
3
4-6
7
Not used
Received fax print start timing
(G3 reception)
0: After receiving each page
1: After receiving all pages
Not used
Action when a fax SC has
occurred
0: Automatic reset
1: Fax unit stops
SP No. 1-101-032
COMMENTS
Do not change the settings.
0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory
overflows during scanning, a report will be printed.
Change this bit to 1 if the customer does not want
to have a report in these cases.
Memory tx Memory storage report
Parallel memory tx Transmission result report
Do not change the settings.
0: The machine prints each page immediately after
the machine receives it.
1: The machine prints the complete message after
the machine receives all the pages in the memory.
Do not change the factory settings.
0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other
than SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit automatically
resets itself.
1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, the
fax unit stops.
Cross Reference
Fax SC codes - See Troubleshooting
SM
53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
SP No. 1-102-001
COMMENTS
This setting sets the maximum size of the original
that the destination can receive. (Bits 3~7 are
reserved for future use or not used.)
0: On, 1: Off
NOTE: If more than one of these three bits is set to
1, the larger size has priority. For example,
if both Bit 2 and Bit 1 are set to 1 then the
maximum size is A3 (Bit 2).
A4
B4
A3
Reserved
Not used
I-fax Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
Original Line Resolution of TX
Attachment File
0
200x100 Standard
200x200 Detail
200x400 Fine
Reserved
5-6
SP No. 1-102-002
COMMENTS
This setting sets the maximum resolution of the
original that the destination can receive.
Reserved
B750
54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
I-fax Switch 01
7
mm/inch
This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission.
0: Off (No conversion), 1: On (Conversion)
SP No. 1-102-002
When on (set to 1), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail.
There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters.
NOTE: Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver
to determine the setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; the
mm/inch selection is determined by the sender fax.
When this switch is Off (0):
Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
Images scanned in mm are sent in mm.
Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are transmitted in mm.
When this switch is On (1):
Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
Images scanned in mm are converted to inches.
Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are converted to inches.
I-fax Switch 02
SP No. 1-102-003
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
RX Text Mail Header Processing
This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mails
when they are received.
0: Prints only text mail.
1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail.
When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the From address and
Subject address are printed as header information.
When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), this
setting is ignored and no header is printed.
SM
55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
I-fax Switch 02
SP No. 1-102-003
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
2-3 Text String for Return Receipt
This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms the
transmission was received normally at the destination.
5-6
7
B750
00: Dispatched
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with
dispatched in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched
The dispatched string is included in the Subject string.
01: Displayed
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with
displayed in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed
The displayed string is included in the Subject string.
10: Reserved
11: Reserved
NOTE: A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to
00 (for dispatched) received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error.
If any setting other than displayed (01) causes a problem, change the setting
to 01 to enable normal sending of the Return Receipt.
Media accept feature
This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail to
confirm a reception.
0: Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail
1: Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail.
NOTE: Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answer
mail, which contains the media accept feature field.
Not Used
Image Resolution of RX Text Mail
This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail.
0: 200 x 200
1: 400 x 400
NOTE: The 1 setting requires installation of the Function Upgrade Card in order to
have enough SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x
400 resolution.
56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
I-fax Switch 03
SP No. 1-102-004
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
Original Output at Transfer Station
This setting determines whether the original is output at the transfer station when it is
received from the sender that initiated the transfer transmission. This feature is the
same as for G3 transfer transmissions.
0: Received original not output at the transfer station.
1: Received original output. The original is printed after the transfer station has
transferred it to the destinations, so its output confirms that the original has been
transferred.
1
Transfer Result Report
This setting determines when a Transfer Result Report is generated and returned to
the transfer requestor.
0: Returns the report after each transfer.
1: Returns the report only if an error occurred during transfer.
4-7
SM
57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
I-fax Switch 04
SP No. 1-102-005
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer
This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the RTI/CSI
of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents.
0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the RTI
or CSI is used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line.
1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line.
1-7
When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in the
Subject line that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to determine
automatically the destination folder for each e-mail.
Not Used
I-fax Switch 05
SP No. 1-102-006
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients
Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receive
transmissions broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal.
For example:
"1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9" in the Journal indicates a broadcast
to 9 destinations.
0: Not recorded
1: Recorded
1-7 Not Used
I-fax Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings)
SP No. 1-102-007
SP No. 1-102-008
I-fax Switch 08
SP No. 1-102-009
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0-7 Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception
This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF stores
fax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location, and also holds
incoming messages if they cannot be printed.) When the amount of SAF memory
available falls below this setting, mail can no longer be received; received mail is then
stored on the mail server.
00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX)
NOTE: The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the
amount of memory.
B750
58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
I-fax Switch 09
No
FUNCTION
0-3 Not used
4-7 Restrict TX Retries
SP No. 1-102-010
COMMENTS
Do not change the settings
This setting determines the number of retries when
connection and transmission fails due to errors.
01-F (1-15 Hex)
SP No. 1-102-011
SP No. 1-102-012
SP No. 1-102-013
SP No. 1-102-014
SP No. 1-102-015
I-fax Switch 0F
SP No. 1-102-016
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files
This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered or
output immediately.
0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery.
1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations.
1-7 Not used
SM
59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
SP No. 1-103-001
3-7
Not used
Printer Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
0-2 Not used
3-4 Maximum print width used in
the setup protocol
Bit 4 3
Setting
0 0
Not used
0 1
A3
1 0
B4
1 1
A4
5-6 Not used
7
Received message width
restriction in the protocol signal
to the sender
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
B750
COMMENTS
0: No marks are printed.
1: If a received page has to be printed out on two
sheets, an asterisk inside square brackets is printed
at the bottom right hand corner of the first sheet,
and a 2 inside a small box is printed at the top right
hand corner of the second sheet. This helps the
user to identify pages that have been split.
0: The next page continues from where the previous
page left off.
1: The final few mm of the previous page are
repeated at the top of the next page. The amount of
repeated data depends on printer switch 04, bits 5
and 6.
This switch is only effective when user parameter 02
- bit 2 (printing the received date and time on
received fax messages) is enabled.
1: The machine prints the received and printed date
and time at the bottom of each received page.
Do not change the settings.
SP No. 1-103-002
COMMENTS
Do not change the settings.
These bits are only effective when bit 7 of printer
switch 01 is 1.
60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Relationship between available paper sizes and printer width used in the
setup protocol
Available Paper Size
A4 or 8.5" x 11"
B5
A5 or 8.5" x 5.5"
No paper available (Paper end)
Printer Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0
1st paper feed station usage for
fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
1
2nd paper feed station usage
for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
2
3rd paper feed station usage
for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
3
4th paper feed station usage
for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
4
LCT usage for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
5-7 Not used
SM
61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Printer Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0
Length reduction of received
data
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1-3
4
to
7
SP No. 1-103-004
COMMENTS
0: Incoming pages are printed without length
reduction.
(Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03, bits 4
to 7)
1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing.
(Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches 04,
bits 0 to 4)
Not used
Do not change the settings
Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled with switch 03-0 above)
If the incoming page is up to x mm longer than the length of copy paper, the excess
portion will not be printed. If the incoming page is more than x mm longer than the
length of copy paper, the excess portion will be printed on the next page.
The value of x is determined by these four bits.
Hex value of bits 4 to 7 x (mm)
0
0
1
1
and so on until
F
15
Default setting: 6 mm
Cross reference
Length reduction On/Off: Printer Switch 03, Bit 0
Printer Switch 04
SP No. 1-103-005
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0 above.
to <Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + (N x 5mm)
4
N is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4.
Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 mm
0 0 0 0 1 5 mm
0 0 1 0 0 20 mm (default setting)
1 1 1 1 1 155 mm
5
6
0
1
0
1
=4 mm, =10 mm, =15 mm, = Not used
0
0
1
1
7
B750
Not used.
62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP No. 1-103-007
COMMENTS
Cross reference
Just size printing on/off User switch 05, bit 5
SM
63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Printer Switch 0E
No
FUNCTION
0
Paper size selection priority
0: Width
1: Length
1
3
to
4
5-6
7
B750
SP No. 1-103-015
COMMENTS
0: A paper size that has the same width as the
received data is selected first.
1: A paper size which has enough length to print all
the received lines without reduction is selected first.
This switch determines which paper size is selected
for printing A4 width fax data, when the machine has
both A4 and 8.5" x 11" size paper.
1: If all paper sizes in the machine require page
separation to print a received fax message, the
machine does not print the message (Substitute
Reception is used).
After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, the
machine automatically prints the fax message.
Same size means the sample image is printed at
100%, even if page separation occurs.
User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set to
0 to enable this switch.
Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more on
this feature.
64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Printer Switch 0F
No
FUNCTION
0
Smoothing feature
to Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
1
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Disabled
1
0
Enabled
1
1
Not used
2
Duplex printing
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3
Binding direction for Duplex
printing
0: Left binding
1: Top binding
4
Printing fax messages in user
code mode
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
5-7
SM
Not used
SP No. 1-103-016
COMMENTS
(0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine
receives halftone images from other manufacturers
fax machines frequently.
65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
B750
SP No. 1-104-001
COMMENTS
These bits determine the compression capabilities
to be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30
protocol.
66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Communication Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
0
ECM
0: Off 1: On
1
2
to
3
4-5
6
to
7
Not used
Wrong connection prevention
method
Bit 3 Bit 2
Setting
0
0
None
0
1
8 digit CSI
1
0
4 digit CSI
1
1
CSI/RTI
Not used
Maximum printable page length
available
Bit 7 6 Setting
0
0 No limit
0
1 B4 (364 mm)
1
0 A4 (297 mm)
1
1 Not used
Communication Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0
Burst error threshold
0: Low 1: High
1
2
SM
SP No. 1-104-002
COMMENTS
If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all
communications.
In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression are
switched off automatically.
Do not change the setting.
(0,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without
sending a fax message, if the last 8 digits of the
received CSI do not match the last 8 digits of the
dialed telephone number. This does not work when
manually dialed.
(1,0) - The same as above, except that only the last
4 digits are compared.
(1,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without
sending a fax message, if the other end does not
identify itself with an RTI or CSI.
(0,0) - Nothing is checked; transmission will always
go ahead.
Note: This function does not work when dialing is
done from the external telephone.
Do not change the setting.
The setting determined by these bits is informed to
the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
SP No. 1-104-003
COMMENTS
If there are more consecutive error lines in the
received page than the threshold, the machine will
send a negative response.
The Low and High threshold values depend on the
sub-scan resolution, and are as follows.
Resolution 100 dpi200 dpi
400 dpi
3.85 l/mm 7.7 l/mm
15.4 l/mm
Low settings 6
12
24
High settings 12
24
48
If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the
acceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end.
0: Pages received with errors are not printed.
67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
3
Hang-up decision when a
negative code (RTN or PIN) is
received during G3 immediate
transmission
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up
4-7
SP No. 1-104-003
COMMENTS
0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is
received.
1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it
receives RTN or PIN.
This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if
ECM is being used.
Do not change the settings.
Not used
Communication Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0
Maximum number of page
to retransmissions in a G3
7
memory transmission
SP No. 1-104-004
COMMENTS
00 - FF (Hex) times.
This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.
Default setting - 03(H)
B750
SP No. 1-104-011
COMMENTS
0: The transmission begins from the page where
transmission failed the previous time.
1: Transmission begins from the first page, using
normal memory transmission.
Do not change the settings.
If this bit is at 1, the machine will not allow you to
dial 999 at the auto-dialer. This is a PTT
requirement in the Hong Kong.
68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Communication Switch 0B
No
FUNCTION
0
Use of Economy Transmission
during a Transfer operation to
end receivers
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1
Use of Economy Transmission
during a Transfer operation to
the Next Transfer Stations
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
2
Use of Label Insertion for the
End Receivers in a Transfer
operation
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
3
Conditions required for
Transfer Result Report
transmission
0: Always transmitted
1: Only transmitted if there was
an error
4
6-7
SM
Not used
SP No. 1-104-012
COMMENTS
These bits determine whether the machine uses the
Economy Transmission feature when it is carrying
out a Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.
69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 0C
No
FUNCTION
0
Number of digits compared to
to find the requesters fax number
4
from the programmed
Quick/Speed Dials when acting
as a Transfer Station
5-7
Not used
Communication Switch 0D
No
FUNCTION
0
The available memory
to threshold, below which ringing
7
detection (and therefore
reception into memory) is
disabled
Communication Switch 0E
No
FUNCTION
0
Minimum interval between
to automatic dialing attempts
7
SP No. 1-104-013
COMMENTS
00 - 1F (0 to 31 digits)
After the machine receives a transfer request, the
machine compares the own telephone number sent
from the Requesting Terminal with all Quick/Speed
Dials programmed in the machine, starting from
Quick Dial 01 to the end of the Speed Dials.
This number determines how many digits from the
end of the telephone numbers the machine
compares.
If it is set to 00, the machine will send the report to
the first Quick/Speed Dial that the machine
compared. If Quick Dial 01 is programmed, the
machine will send the report to Quick 01. If Quick
Dial 01 through 04 are not programmed and Quick
Dial 05 is programmed, the machine will send the
report to Quick 05.
Default setting - 05(H) = 5 digits
Do not change the settings.
SP No. 1-104-014
COMMENTS
00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes
(e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes)
One page is about 24 kbytes.
The machine refers to this setting before each fax
reception. If the amount of remaining memory is
below this threshold, the machine cannot receive
any fax messages.
If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect
ringing signals and go into receive mode even if
there is no memory available. This will result in
communication failure.
SP No. 1-104-015
COMMENTS
06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s
(e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)
This value is the minimum time that the machine
waits before it dials the next destination.
B750
70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Communication Switch 10
No
FUNCTION
0
Memory transmission:
to Maximum number of dialing
7
attempts to the same
destination
SP No. 1-104-017
COMMENTS
01 - FE (Hex) times
SP No. 1-104-019
COMMENTS
01 - FF (Hex) minutes
1-5
6
to
7
Not used
Available unit of resolution in
which fax messages are
received
Bit 7 Bit 6
Unit
0
0
mm
0
1
inch
1
0
mm and inch
(default)
1
1
Not used
SP No. 1-104-021
COMMENTS
0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inch
format are transmitted without conversion.
In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF
memory in mm format are transmitted without
conversion.
Note: When storing the scanned data into SAF
memory, the fax unit always converts the data into
mm format.
1: The machine converts the scanned data or stored
data in the SAF memory to the format which was
specified in the set-up protocol (DIS/NSF) before
transmission.
Do not change the factory settings.
For the best performance, do not change the factory
settings.
The setting determined by these bits is informed to
the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
SM
71
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 16
No
FUNCTION
0
Standard G3 unit
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Japan Only)
4
5
6
Communication Switch 17
No
FUNCTION
0
SEP reception
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
SUB reception
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2
PWD reception
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3-6 Not used
7
Action when there is no box
with an F-code that matches
the received SUB code
0: Disconnect the line
1: Receive the message
(using normal reception mode)
SP No. 1-104-023
COMMENTS
Set this bit to 0 if the user wants to use only the
ISDN line (option G4 unit), even for G3
communications. However, for ISDN on hook
dialing, bit 7 of user parameter 30 must be set to 1.
Note: If the optional G4 unit is not installed, but this
bit is changed to disabled, no document can be
transmitted.
Change this bit to 1 when installing the first optional
G3 unit.
Change this bit to 1 when installing the optional
ISDN unit.
Change this bit to 1 when installing the second
optional G3 unit.
Do not change the setting.
Do not change the setting.
Change this bit to 1 when the customer requires.
B750
72
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Communication Switch 1B
No
FUNCTION
0
Extension access code (0 to 7)
to to turn V.8 protocol On/Off
7
0: On
1: Off
Communication Switch 1C
No
FUNCTION
0
Extension access code (8 and
to 9) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off
1
0: On
1: Off
2-7
Not used
SP No. 1-104-028
COMMENTS
If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol
procedure, set this bit to 1 to disable V.8.
Example: If 0 is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
to 1. When the machine detects 0 as the first
dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (Alternatively, if 3 is the PSTN access
code, set bit 3 to 1.)
SP No. 1-104-029
COMMENTS
Refer to communication switch 1B.
Example: If 8 is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
to 1. When the machine detects 8 as the first
dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (If 9 is the PSTN access code, use bit 1.)
Do not change the settings.
SM
73
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.5 G3 SWITCHES
G3 Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0
Monitor speaker during
1
communication (tx and rx)
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Up to Phase B
1
0
All the time
1
1
Not used
2
Monitor speaker during
memory transmission
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
3-7 Not used
G3 Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
0-3 Not used
4
DIS frame length
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes
5
6
Not used
CED/ANSam transmission
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Not used
G3 Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0
G3 protocol mode used
0: Standard and non-standard
1: Standard only
1-4
5
Not used
Use of modem rate history for
transmission using
Quick/Speed Dials
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
B750
SP No. 1-105-001
COMMENTS
(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
the communication.
(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
the T.30 protocol.
(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
all through the communication. Make sure that you
reset these bits after testing.
1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
transmission.
Do not change the settings.
SP No. 1-105-002
COMMENTS
Do not change the settings.
1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will
not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
Do not change the setting.
Do not change this setting, unless the
communication problem is caused by the
CED/ANSam transmission.
Do not change the setting.
SP No. 1-105-003
COMMENTS
Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
only communicate with machines that send T.30standard frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
Do not change the settings.
0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials always
start from the highest modem rate.
1: The machine refers to the modem rate history for
communications with the same machine when
determining the most suitable rate for the current
communication.
Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
Manual for details about AI Short Protocol.
Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
Manual for details about Short Preamble.
74
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3 Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0
DIS detection number
(Echo countermeasure)
0: 1
1: 2
1
V.8 protocol in manual
reception
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2
V.8 protocol
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
G3 Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
0
Training error detection
to threshold
3
4-7
SM
Not used
SP No. 1-105-004
COMMENTS
0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same
DIS frame twice.
1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the
second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
0: The machine sends CED instead of ANSam
when starting a manual reception.
1: The machine sends ANSam during manual
reception.
0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
Note:
Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always
bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps
or lower.
Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.
75
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 05
No
FUNCTION
0
Initial Tx modem rate
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)
3
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
Other settings - Not used
4
Initial modem type for 9.6 k or
to 7.2 kbps.
5
Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
0
0
V.29
0
1
V.17
1
0
V.34
1
1
Not used
6-7 Not used
SP No. 1-105-006
COMMENTS
These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
transmission.
G3 Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
0
Initial Rx modem rate
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)
3
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
Other settings - Not used
SP No. 1-105-007
B750
These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2
kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
COMMENTS
These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
reception.
Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems
during reception.
If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8
protocol should be disabled manually.
Cross reference
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
76
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3 Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
4
Modem types available for
to reception
7
Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29
V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V.33
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V33,
V.34
Other settings - Not used
G3 Switch 07
No
FUNCTION
0 PSTN cable equalizer
to (tx mode: Internal)
1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High
2
to
3
5
67
SM
SP No. 1-105-007
COMMENTS
The setting of these bits is used to inform the
transmitting terminal of the available modem type for
the machine in receive mode.
If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be
disabled manually.
Cross reference
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
SP No. 1-105-008
COMMENTS
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
frequencies because of the length of wire between
the modem and the telephone exchange.
Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
specific receivers.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
Note: This setting is not effective in V.34
communications.
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
frequencies because of the length of wire between
the modem and the telephone exchange.
77
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Not used
Reconstruction time for the first
line in receive mode
0: 6 s 1: 12 s
Not used
B750
SP No. 1-105-011
COMMENTS
These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
frequent.
78
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3 Switch 0B
No
FUNCTION
0
Protocol requirements: Europe
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1
Protocol requirements: Spain
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
2
Protocol requirements:
Germany
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
3
Protocol requirements: France
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
4
PTT requirements: Germany
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
5
PTT requirements: France
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
6
Not used
7
DTS requirements : Germany
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
G3 Switch 0C
No
FUNCTION
0
Pulse dialing method
1
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Normal(P=N)
0
1
Oslo (P=10 - N)
1
0
Sweden
(N+1)
1
1
Not used
2-7 Not used
G3 Switch 0D
No
FUNCTION
0-1 Not used
2
Data rate threshold during V.34
to reception
5
Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting
0 0 0 0 Normal
0 1 1 1 Lower by
one step
1 1 1 1 Lower by
two steps
6
Not used
7
B signal detection time for V.34
polling transmission
0: 75 ms (default setting)
1: 65 ms
SP No. 1-105-012
COMMENTS
The machine does not automatically reset these bits
for each country after a country code (System
Switch 0F) is programmed.
Change the required bits manually at installation.
SP No. 1-105-013
COMMENTS
P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed.
79
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 0F
No
FUNCTION
0
Alarm when an error occurred
in Phase C or later
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
Alarm when the handset is offhook at the end of
communication
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2-7 Not used
B750
SP No. 1-105-016
COMMENTS
If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each
error communication, change this bit to 1.
80
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP No. 1-106-001
COMMENTS
(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
the communication.
(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
the T.30 protocol.
(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
all through the communication. Make sure that you
reset these bits after testing.
1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
transmission.
G3-2 Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
0-3 Not used
4
DIS frame length
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes
SP No. 1-106-002
COMMENTS
Do not change the settings.
1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will
not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
Do not change the setting.
Do not change this setting, unless the
communication problem is caused by the
CED/ANSam transmission.
Do not change the setting.
5
6
Not used
CED/ANSam transmission
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Not used
G3-2 Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0
G3 protocol mode used
0: Standard and non-standard
1: Standard only
1-4
5
Not used
Use of modem rate history for
transmission using
Quick/Speed Dials
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SM
SP No. 1-106-003
COMMENTS
Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
only communicate with machines that send T.30standard frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
Do not change the settings.
0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials always
start from the highest modem rate.
1: The machine refers to the modem rate history for
communications with the same machine when
determining the most suitable rate for the current
communication.
Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
Manual for details about AI Short Protocol.
Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
Manual for details about Short Preamble.
81
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0
DIS detection number
(Echo countermeasure)
0: 1
1: 2
1
Not used
2
V.8 protocol
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SP No. 1-106-004
COMMENTS
0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same
DIS frame twice.
1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the
second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
Do not change the settings.
0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
Note:
Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always
bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps
or lower.
Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.
6
7
G3-2 Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
0
Training error detection
to threshold
3
4-7
B750
Not used
82
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3-2 Switch 05
No
FUNCTION
0
Initial Tx modem rate
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)
3
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
Other settings - Not used
4
Initial modem type for 9.6 k or
to 7.2 kbps.
5
Bit 5 Bit 4
Setting
0
0
V.29
0
1
V.17
1
0
V.34
1
1
Not used
6-7 Not used
SP No. 1-106-006
COMMENTS
These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
transmission.
G3-2 Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
0
Initial Rx modem rate
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)
3
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
Other settings - Not used
SP No. 1-106-007
SM
These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2
kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
COMMENTS
These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
reception.
Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems
during reception.
If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8
protocol should be disabled manually.
Cross reference
V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit2
83
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
4
Modem types available for
to reception
7
Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29
V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V.33
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V33,
V.34
Other settings - Not used
G3-2 Switch 07
No
FUNCTION
0
PSTN cable equalizer
to (tx mode: Internal)
1
Bit 1 Bit 0
Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High
2
to
3
5
6-7
B750
SP No. 1-106-007
COMMENTS
The setting of these bits is used to inform the
transmitting terminal of the available modem type for
the machine in receive mode.
If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be
disabled manually.
Cross reference
V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit2
SP No. 1-106-008
COMMENTS
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
frequencies because of the length of wire between
the modem and the telephone exchange.
Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
specific receivers.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
Note: This setting is not effective in V.34
communications.
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
frequencies because of the length of wire between
the modem and the telephone exchange.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
Note: This setting is not effective in V.34
communications.
Keep this bit at 1.
84
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
Not used
Reconstruction time for the first
line in receive mode
0: 6 s 1: 12 s
Not used
SM
SP No. 1-106-011
COMMENTS
These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
frequent.
85
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 0B
No
FUNCTION
0
Protocol requirements: Europe
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1
Protocol requirements: Spain
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
2
Protocol requirements:
Germany
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
3
Protocol requirements: France
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
4
PTT requirements: Germany
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
5
PTT requirements: France
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
6
Not used
7
Not used
G3-2 Switch 0C
No
FUNCTION
0
Pulse dialing method
1
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Normal(P=N)
0
1
Oslo (P=10 - N)
1
0
Sweden
(N+1)
1
1
Not used
2-7 Not used
SP No. 1-106-012
COMMENTS
The machine does not automatically reset these bits
for each country after a country code (System
Switch 0F) is programmed.
Change the required bits manually at installation.
B750
86
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
SP No. 1-111-001
COMMENTS
Do not change this setting.
87
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
IP Fax Switch 01
No.
FUNCTION
IP Fax delay level setting
Selects the acceptable delay level.
Level 0 is the highest quality
0-3 Default is "0000" (level 0).
4-7
SP No. 1-111-002
COMMENTS
Bit 3
0
0
0
0
Bit 2
0
0
0
0
Bit 1
0
0
1
1
Bit 0
0
1
0
1
Level 0
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
IP Fax Switch 02
No.
FUNCTION
0
IP Fax bit signal reverse setting
0: Maker code setting
1: Internal bit switch setting
3-7
B750
SP No. 1-111-003
COMMENTS
When "0" is selected, the bit signal reverse
method is decided by the maker code.
When "1" is selected, the bit signal reverse
method is decided by the internal bit switch.
NOTE: When communicating between IP Fax
devices, LSB first is selected.)
Selects the transmit speed for IP Fax
communication.
This bit switch sets the transport that has
priority for receiving IP Fax data.
This function is activated only when the
sender has both TCP and UDP.
Do not change these settings.
88
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IP Fax Switch 03
No.
FUNCTION
0
Effective field limitation for G3
standard function information
0: OFF, 1: 4byte (DIS)
1
Switching between G3 standard
and G3 non standard
0: Enable switching
1: G3 standard only
2
AI modem rate function
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)
3
ECM frame size selection at
transmitting
0: 256byte, 1: 64byte
4
DIS detection times for echo
prevention
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times
5
CTC transmission selection
0: PPRx1
1: PPRx4
6
IP Fax Switch 04
No.
FUNCTION
TCF error threshold
0
1
2
3
4-7 Not used
SM
SP No. 1-111-004
COMMENTS
89
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
IP Fax Switch 05
SP No. 1-111-006
No.
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Modem bit rate setting for transmission
Sets the modem bit rate for transmission. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
0-3
Bit 3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 2
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Bit 1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
Bit 0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
12.0K bps
14.4K bps
16.8K bps
19.2K bps
21.6K bps
24.0K bps
26.4K bps
28.8K bps
31.2K bps
33.6K bps
Bit 5
0
0
1
1
4-5
6-7
B750
Not used
Bit 4
0
1
0
1
V29
V17
V34
Not used
90
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IP Fax Switch 06
SP No. 1-111-007
No.
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Modem bit rate setting for reception
Sets the modem bit rate for reception. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
0-3
Bit 3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 2
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Bit 1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
Bit 0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
12.0K bps
14.4K bps
16.8K bps
19.2K bps
21.6K bps
24.0K bps
26.4K bps
28.8K bps
31.2K bps
33.6K bps
4-7
Bit 7
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 6
0
0
0
1
1
Bit 5
0
1
1
0
0
Bit 4
1
0
1
0
1
V27ter
V27ter, V29
V27ter, V29, V33 (invalid)
V27ter, V29, V17
V27ter, V29, V17, V34
IP Fax Switch 07
No.
FUNCTION
0
TSI information
0: Not added, 1: Added
1
DCN transmission setting at T1
timeout
0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted
2
Not used
3
Hang up setting at DIS reception
disabled
0: No hang up
1: Hang up after transmitting DCN
4
Number of times for training
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times
5
Space CSI transmission setting at
no CSI registration
0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted
6-7 Not used
SM
SP No. 1-111-008
COMMENTS
Adds or does not add TSI information to
NSS(S).
Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1
timeout.
Do not change this setting.
91
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
IP Fax Switch 03
No.
FUNCTION
0-1 T1 timer adjustment
Adjusts the T1 timer.
The default is "00" (35 seconds).
2-3
4-5
SP No. 1-111-004
COMMENTS
T4 timer adjustment
Adjust the T4 timer.
The default is "00" (3 seconds).
Bit 1
0
0
1
1
Bit 0
0
1
0
1
35 sec
40 sec
50 sec
60 sec
Bit 3
0
0
1
1
Bit 2
0
1
0
1
3 sec
3.5 sec
4 sec
5 sec
T0 timer adjustment
Bit 5 Bit 4
0
0
75 sec
0
1
120 sec
1
0
180 sec
1
1
240 sec
Adjusts the fail safe timer. This timer sets the interval between "setup" data
transmission and T.38 phase decision.
If your destination return is late on the network or G3 fax return is late, adjust the
longer interval timer.
The default is "00" (75 seconds).
6-7
B750
Not used
92
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
93
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
NCU PARAMETERS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
Address
680500
Function
Unit
Remarks
Country/Area code for NCU
parameters
Use the Hex value to program the country/area code directly into this address, or
use the decimal value to program it using SP2-103-001
Country/Area
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Decimal Hex
00
00
01
01
02
02
03
03
04
04
05
05
06
06
07
07
08
08
09
09
10
0A
11
0B
12
0C
13
0D
14
0E
15
0F
17
11
18
12
Hong Kong 20
South Africa 21
Australia
22
New Zealand 23
Singapore 24
Malaysia
25
China
26
Taiwan
27
Korea
28
Greece
33
Hungary
34
Czech
35
Poland
36
680501
680502
680503
20 ms
680504
Hz (BCD)
680508
680509
68050A
68050B
68050C
68050D
68050E
68050F
680510
680505
680506
680507
B750
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
21
22
23
24
Hz (BCD)
20 ms
20 ms
Detection is disabled if
this contains FF.
20 ms
94
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
680512
680513
680514
680515
680516
680517
680518
680519
Function
PSTN detection time for silent period
after ring-back tone detected (LOW)
PSTN detection time for silent period
after ring-back tone detected (HIGH)
PSTN busy tone frequency upper
limit (high byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency upper
limit (low byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency lower
limit (high byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency lower
limit (low byte)
PABX dial tone frequency upper limit
(high byte)
PABX dial tone frequency upper limit
(low byte)
PABX dial tone frequency lower limit
(high byte)
68051A
68051B
68051C
68051D
68051E
68051F
680520
680521
680522
680523
680524
680525
680526
680527
680528
680529
68052A
68052B
68052C
68052D
68052E
SM
Unit
20 ms
Remarks
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
Address
680511
20 ms
Hz (BCD)
Hz (BCD)
Hz (BCD)
Hz (BCD)
20 ms
20 ms
20 ms
20 ms
20 ms
Hz (BCD)
Hz (BCD)
20 ms
95
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
Address
68052F
680530
680531
680532
680533
Function
Unit
Remarks
Busy tone OFF time: range 3
20 ms
Busy tone ON time: range 4
Busy tone OFF time: range 4
Busy tone continuous tone detection
time
Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles
required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFF-ONOFF must be detected twice).
Tolerance ()
Bit
1 0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
680534
680535
680536
680537
680538
680539
68053A
68053B
68053C
68053D
68053E
68053F
680540
680541
680542
680543
680544
680545
680546
B750
96
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
68054B
Function
Country dial tone permissible drop
time
Country dial wait interval (LOW)
Country dial wait interval (HIGH)
Time between opening or closing the
DO relay and opening the OHDI
relay
Break time for pulse dialing
68054C
1 ms
68054D
1 ms
68054E
20 ms
680550
680551
680552
-N x 0.5 3.5
dBm
680553
-dBm x 0.5
680554
-N x 0.5 3.5
dBm
-dBm x 0.5
1 ms
680558
680559
20 ms
68055A
1 ms
680548
680549
68054A
68054F
680555
680556
680557
SM
Unit
20 ms
1 ms
1 ms
1 ms
97
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Remarks
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
Address
680547
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
Address
68055B
68055C
Function
International dial access code (High)
International dial access code (Low)
68055D
68055E
68055F
to
680564
680565
680566
Not used
BCD
BCD
680567
to
680571
680572
Not used
For a code of 0:
680565 - FF
680566 - F0
Do not change the
settings.
1000/ N
(Hz).
680577
20 ms
680578
20 ms
SP2-103-003 (parameter
02).
SP2-103-004 (parameter
03).
SP2-103-005 (parameter
04).
SP2-103-006 (parameter
05).
SP2-103-007 (parameter
06).
The setting must not be
zero.
See Note 4.
SP2-103-008 (parameter
07).
SP2-103-009 (parameter
08).
SP2-103-010 (parameter
09).
SP2-103-011 (parameter
10).
680573
680574
680575
680576
680579
68057A
B750
Unit
BCD
Remarks
For a code of 100:
68055B - F1
68055C - 00
20 ms
This time is waited for
each pause input after
the PSTN access code. If
this address contains
FF[H], the pause time
stored in address 68054F
is used.
Do not set a number
more than 7 in the UK.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 dBm
0 0 0 -25.0
0 0 1 -35.0
0 1 0 -30.0
1 0 0 -40.0
1 1 0 -49.0
20 ms
98
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Address
68057B
to
680580
680581
680582
Function
Unit
Not used
Interval between dialing the last digit 20 ms
and switching the Oh relay over to
the external telephone when dialing
from the operation panel in handset
mode.
Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time
Bit
1 0 Setting
0 0 200 ms
0 1 800 ms
Other Not used
Remarks
Do not change the
settings.
Factory setting: 500 ms
6805AB
6805AC
6805AD
CNG on time
CNG off time
Number of CNG cycles required for
detection
6805AE
Not used
SM
BCD (Hz)
BCD (Hz)
20 ms
20 ms
BCD (Hz)
BCD (Hz)
20 ms
20 ms
99
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
NCU PARAMETERS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
Address
6805AF
6805B0
6805B1
6805B2
6805B3
6805B4
6805B5
6805B6
6805B7
6805B8
6805B9
6805BD
6805BE
to
6805C6
6805C7
6805C8
to
6805D9
6805DA
6805E0
bit 3
6805E5
B750
Rev. 03/2006
Function
Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency upper
limit (high byte)
Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency upper
limit (low byte)
Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (high byte)
Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (low byte)
Detection time for 800 Hz AI short
protocol tone
PSTN: Tx level from the modem
PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmission
level
PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmission
level
PABX: Tx level from the modem
PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission
level
PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission
level
Modem turn-on level (incoming
signal detection level)
Not used
Unit
Hz (BCD)
Remarks
If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
Hz(BCD)
20 ms
-N 3 dBm
SP2-103-002 (parameter
01).
- N 6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B5 3.5 (dB)
See Note 7.
- N6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B6 3 (dB)
See Note 7.
- dBm
- N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB)
- N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB)
-37-0.5N
(dBm)
Do not change the
settings.
1s
0: 12 s
1: 30 s
80h: Auto
Edge
81h or 83h:
Fixed Edge
100
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
NCU PARAMETERS
NOTES
1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.
2. Italy and Belgium only
RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.
Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)
If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are
changed.
680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state
duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address
680533.
68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10
pps. If 20 pps is used, the machine automatically compensates.
4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time
specified by this parameter.
5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.
The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:
High frequency tone: 0.5 x N680552/6805543.5 dBm
0.5 x N680555 dBm
Low frequency tone: 0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) 3.5 dBm
0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm
NOTE: N680552, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H)
6. 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds
closing and Di opening
68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds
opening and Di closing
7. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI
short protocol) refer to the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higher
than 1500Hz refer to the setting at 6805B6h.
8. 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the
sum of the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and
68054E.
SM
101
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
B750S105.WMF
B750
102
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.4.2 PARAMETERS
The initial settings of the following parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are
disabled.
Switch 01
FUNCTION AND COMMENTS
ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)
If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting,
adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1
second.
Range:
0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)
FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.
Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.
Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0
Tx level
to Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting
4
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 -1
0 0 0 1 0 -2
0 0 0 1 1 -3
0 0 1 0 0 -4
:
:
0 1 1 1 1 -15
1 1 1 1 1 Disabled
5
Cable equalizer
to Bit 7 6 5 Setting
7
0 0 0 None
0 0 1 Low
0 1 0 Medium
0 1 1 High
1 1 1 Disabled
COMMENTS
If communication with a particular remote terminal
often contains errors, the signal level may be
inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level for
communications with that terminal until the results
are better.
If the setting is Disabled, the NCU parameter 01
setting is used.
Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the
left.
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
frequencies because of the length of wire between
the modem and the telephone exchange when
calling the number stored in this Quick/Speed Dial.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the
left.
If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
used.
SM
103
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0
Initial Tx modem rate
to Bit3
2 1 0 Setting (bps)
3
0 0 0 0 Not used
0 0 0 1 2,400
0 0 1 0 4,800
0 0 1 1 7,200
0 1 0 0 9,600
0 1 0 1 12,000
0 1 1 0 14,400
0 1 1 1 16,800
1 0 0 0 19,200
1 0 0 1 21,600
1 0 1 0 24,000
1 0 1 1 26,400
1 1 0 0 28,800
1 1 0 1 31,200
1 1 1 0 33,600
1 1 1 1 Disabled
4-5
6
Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
0
Inch-mm conversion before tx
1
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Inch-mm
conversion
available
0
1
Inch only
1
0
Not used
1
1
Disabled
2
DIS/NSF detection method
to Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
3
0
0
First DIS or
NSF
0
1
Second DIS or
NSF
1
0
Not used
1
1
Disabled
B750
COMMENTS
If training with a particular remote terminal always
takes too long, the initial modem rate may be too
high. Reduce the initial Tx modem rate using these
bits.
For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch 04 bit 4
must be changed to 0.
Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the
left.
If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
used.
COMMENTS
The machine uses inch-based resolutions for
scanning. If inch only is selected, the printed copy
may be slightly distorted at the other end if that
machine uses mm-based resolutions.
If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
used.
(0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are
interfering with the set-up protocol at the start of
transmission. The machine will then wait for the
second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.
If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
used.
104
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
4
V.8 protocol
0: Off
1: Disabled
6
7
COMMENTS
If transmissions to a specific destination always end
at a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower),
disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol.
0: V.34 communication will not be possible.
If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
used.
This bit determines the capabilities that are informed
to the other terminal during transmission.
If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
used.
For example, if ECM is switched on but is not
wanted when sending to a particular terminal, use
the (0, 0) setting.
Note that V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression
are automatically disabled if ECM is disabled.
If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
used.
SM
105
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
106
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
107
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
B750
108
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
SM
109
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
110
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
SM
111
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
112
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
113
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
B750
114
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
MBU
to BICU
CCUDRV
Memory DIMM
GWFCU3
CCUIF
SG3
SG3
B750D501.WMF
The basic fax unit consists of two PCBs: an FCU and an MBU.
The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation with
the controller board. The MBU contains the ROM and SRAM. Also, the FCU has an
NCU circuit.
Fax Options:
1. Extra G3 Interface option: This provides one more analog line interface. This
allows full dual access. Two extra G3 interface options can be installed.
2. Memory Expansion: This expands the SAF memory and the page memory
(used for image rotation); without this expansion, the page memory is not big
enough for image rotation at 400 dpi, so transmission at 400 dpi is not possible.
SM
115
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARDS
10 February 2005
5.2 BOARDS
5.2.1 FCU
SAF
BACKUP
SDRAM
(16MB)
DIMM
(32 MB)
FCU
BICU
FCUIF
DMA BUS
PCI BUS
FACE3
CPU BUS
SRAM
(256kB)
MBU
v.34
MODEM
FROM
(3MB)
Speaker
Drive
BACKUP
& RESET
CCUIF
G3
NCU
Circuit
Line
TEL
CCUDRV
G3
Speaker
B750D502.WMF
The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interface
to the base copiers engine, and all the fax options.
B750
116
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARDS
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
DRAM
The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows.
SAF memory
: 4MB
Working memory : 8MB
Page memory
: 4MB
The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery.
Memory back-up
A Rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory (DRAM) for 1 hour.
5.2.2 MBU
On this board, the flash ROM contains the FCU firmware, and the SRAM contains
the system data and user parameters. Even if the FCU is changed, the system
data and user parameters are kept on the MBU board.
ROM
3MB flash ROMs for system software storage
2MB (16bit x 1MB) + 1MB (16bit x 512K)
SRAM
The 256 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a
lithium battery.
Memory back-up
A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in
the SRAM, in case the base copier's main switch is turned off.
Switches
Item
SW1
SM
Description
Switches the SRAM backup battery on/off.
117
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARDS
10 February 2005
CPU
(Ru30)
SDRAM
(8MB)
DPRAM
DMAC
FCU
DCR
Line
JBIG
CODEC
DSP
(modem)
+5V
REG
AFE
NCU
+3.3V
B750D902.WMF
FROM
1Mbyte flash ROM for SG3 software storage and modem software storage
SDRAM
8Mbyte DRAM shared between ECM buffer, line buffer, and working memory
AFE (Analog Front End)
Analog processing
CODEC (COder-DECoder)
A/D & D/A conversions for modem
REG
Generates +3.3 V from the +5V from the FCU
B750
118
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
VIDEO DATA PATH
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
5.3
5.3.1 TRANSMISSION
SCANNER
BICU
FCU
FBI
FACE3
Page Memory
DCR
SAF
SG3
DCR
QM-CODER
DCR
QM-CODER
Modem
Modem
NCU
NCU
Analog G3
Analog G3
NCCP
B750D511.WMF
SM
119
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
VIDEO DATA PATH
10 February 2005
Immediate Transmission
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the resolution agreed with the
receiving terminal. The BICU video processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
NOTE: When scanning a fax original, the BICU uses the MTF, independent dot
erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax units
scanner bit switches, not the copier's SP modes.
Then the FCU stores the data in page memory, and compresses the data for
transmission. The NCU transmits the data to the line.
JBIG Transmission
Memory transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes
from the DCR to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line.
When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the line
type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the PSTN-2 line.
Immediate transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes
from the page memory to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the
line. When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the
line type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the PSTN-2 line.
Adjustments
Priority for the line used for G3 transmissions (PSTN 1/PSTN 2 or 3): System
switch 16 bit 1
B750
120
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
VIDEO DATA PATH
Analog G3
Analog G3
NCU
NCU
Modem
Modem
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
5.3.2 RECEPTION
QM-CODER
SAF
CCD (DCR)
DCR
DCR
QM-CODER
NCCP
Page Memory
FACE3
SG3
FBI
FCU
BICU
Printer
B750D512.WMF
First, the FCU stores the incoming data from either an analog line to the SAF
memory. (The data goes to the FACE3 at the same time, and is checked for error
lines/frames.)
The FCU then decompresses the data and transfers it to page memory. If image
rotation will be done, the image is rotated in the page memory. The data is
transferred to the BICU.
If the optional G3 unit is installed, the line that the message comes in on depends
on the telephone number dialled by the other party (the optional G3 unit has a
different telephone number from the main fax board).
JBIG Reception
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-1 (the standard analog line),
the data is sent to the QM-CODER for decompression. Then the data is stored in
the page memory, and transferred to the BICU.
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-2 (optional extra analog
line), the data is sent to the QM-CODER on the SG3 board for decompression.
SM
121
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
10 February 2005
Standard only
Extra G3 Interface Unit (single)
Extra G3 Interface Unit (double)
PSTN
PSTN + PSTN
PSTN + PSTN +PSTN
B750
122
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Available protocol
Combinations
G3
G3 + G3
G3 + G3 +G3
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
Scanner
BICU
Controller
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
Page
Memory
HDD
FCU
FBI
FACE3
DCR
Modem
NCU
To
PSTN
DATA/ADDRESS BUS
B750D514.WMF
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution. The BICU
video processes the data and transfers it to the controller board.
Then the controller stores the data in the page memory for the copier function, and
compresses the data in MMR (by software) to store it in the HDD. If image rotation
will be done, the image is rotated in the page memory before compression.
For transmission, the stored image data is transferred to the FCU. The FCU
decompresses the image data, then recompresses and/or reduces the data if
necessary for transmission. the NCU transmits the data to the line.
The documents can be stored in the HDD (Document Server) from the fax
application. The stored documents in the document sever can be used for the fax
transmission in many times. More than one document and the scanned document
can be combined into one file and then the file can be transmitted.
When using the document server, the SAF memory is not used.
The document is compressed with MMR and stored.
Up to 9,000 pages can be stored. (1 file: Up to 1,000 pages) from the fax
application.
Only stored documents from the fax application can be transmitted.
Scanned documents are given a name automatically, such as FAX001. But it is
possible to change the file name, user name and password.
Up to 30 files can be selected at once.
NOTE: 1) The compression method of the fax application is different from the copy
application. The storing time is longer than the copier storing.
2) When selecting Print 1st page, the stored document will be reduced to
A4 size.
SM
123
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
10 February 2005
Data Formats
The scanned data is converted into a TIFF-F formatted file (only MH compression
can be used).
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field
From
Reply To
To
Bcc
Subject
Content Type
Content Transfer Encoding
Message Body
Content
Mail address of the sender
Destination requested for reply
Mail address of the destination
Backup mail address
From CSI or RTI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Multipart/mixed
Attached files: image/tiff
Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
MIME-converted TIFF-F (MIME standards specify how files
are attached to e-mail messages)
Selectable Options
These options are available for selection:
With the default settings, the scan resolution can be either standard or detail.
Inch-mm conversion before TX depends on IFAX SW01 Bit 7. Detail resolution
will be used if Super Fine resolution is selected, unless Fine resolution is enabled
with IFAX SW01.
The requirements for originals (document size, scan width, and memory
capacity) are the same as for G3 fax memory tx.
The default compression is TIFF-F format.
IFAX SW00: Acceptable paper widths for sending
IFAX SW09: Maximum number of attempts to the same destination
B750
124
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mail Reception
This machine supports three types of e-mail reception:
POP3 (Post Office Protocol Ver. 3.)
IMAP4 (Internet Messaging Access Protocol)
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
For details: Core Technology Manual Facsimile Processes Faxing from a PC
Internet/LAN Fax Boards Mail Reception
SMTP Reception
The IFAX must be registered as an SMTP server in the MX record of the DNS
server, and the address of the received mail must specify the IFAX.
Enable SMTP reception:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
Even if the MX record on the DNS server includes the IFAX, mail cannot be
received with SMTP until SMTP reception is enabled:
However, if SMTP reception is selected and the machine is not registered in the
MX record of the DNS server, then either IMAP4 or POP3 is used, depending on
the setting:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
SM
125
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
10 February 2005
Auth. E-mail RX
In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX, the addresses of senders must
be limited using the Access Limit Entry. Only one entry can be registered.
1) Access Limit Entry
For example, to limit access to @IFAX.ricoh.co.jp:
gts@IFAX.ricoh.co.jp
gts@IFAX.abcde.co.jp
IFAX@ricoh.co.jp
2) Conditions
The length of the Access Limit Entry is limited to 127 characters.
If the Access Limit Entry address and the mail address of the incoming
mail do not match, the incoming mail is discarded and not delivered, and
the SMTP server responds with an error. However, in this case an error
report is not output.
If the Access Limit Entry address is not registered, and if the incoming
mail specifies a delivery destination, then the mail is delivered
unconditionally.
B750
126
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Supported Types
Multipart/mixed, text/plain, message/rfc822 Image/tiff
US-ASCII, ISO 8859 X. Other types cannot be handled,
and some garbage may appear in the data.
Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
SM
127
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
10 February 2005
Transfer Request
For details: Core Technology Manual Facsimile Processes Faxing from a PC
Internet/LAN Fax Boards Transfer Request
Request by Mail
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field
From
To
Bcc
Subject
Content-Type
Content-Transfer-Encoding
Mail body (text part)
Message body
B750
Content
E-mail address of the requesting terminal
Destination address (Transfer Station address)
Backup mail address
From TSI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Multipart/mixed
Text/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff (for attached files)
Base 64, 7-Bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
RELAY-ID-: xxxx (xxxx: 4 digits for an ID code)
RELAY: #01#*X#**01.
MIME-converted TIFF-F.
128
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
---
No Subject
Entry
Confirmation
of Reception
Mail delivery,
memory
transfer,
SMTP
receiving and
delivery
Entry Condition
1. CSI (RTI)
2. RTI
3. CSI
4. None
1. CSI (RTI)
2. RTI
3. CSI
4. None
From
From
RTI or CSI of
the station
designated for
delivery
RTI or CSI of
sender
Mail address
of sender
Mail address
of sender
Mail error
notification
---
Mail delivery
Mail sending from G3
memory
Memory sending
SMTP receiving and
delivery (Off Ramp
Gateway)
IFAXD919.WMF
SM
129
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
10 February 2005
E-mail Messages
After entering the subject, you can enter a message with:
Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
An e-mail message (up to 5 lines) can be pre-registered with:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Program/Change/Delete E-mail
Message
Limitations on Entries
Item
Number of Lines
Line Length
Name Length
B750
Maximum
5 lines
80 characters
20 characters
130
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
Normal reception:
Error:
131
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
10 February 2005
Handling Reports
1. Sending a Request for a Return Receipt by Mail
After the mail sender transmits a request for a return receipt, the mail senders
journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and a Q in the
Mode column.
2. Mail Receipt (Request for Receipt Confirmation) and Sending Mail Receipt
Response
After the mail receiver sends a response to the request for a return receipt, the
mail receivers journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column
and an A in the Mode column.
3. Receiving the Return Receipt Mail
After the mail sender receives a return receipt, the information in the mail
senders journal about the receipt request is replaced, i.e. the journal is
annotated with OK in the Result column.
When the return receipt reports an error, the journal is annotated with an E
in the Result column.
The arrival of the return receipt is not recorded in the journal as a separate
communication. Its arrival is only reported by the presence of OK or E in
the Result column.
If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing list (i.e., a Group
destination; the machine sends the mail to more than one location. See How
to set up Mail Delivery), the Result column of the Journal is updated every
time a return receipt is received. For example, if the mailing list was to 5
destinations, the Result column indicates the result of the communication
with the 5th destination only. The results of the communications to the first 4
destinations are not shown.
Exceptions:
If one of the communications had an error, the Result column will indicate E,
even if subsequent communications were OK.
If two of the communications had an error, the Journal will indicate the
destination for the first error only.
Report Sample
DATE
MAY. 5
TIME
ADDRESS
MODE
TIME
PAGE
RESULT
10:15
Mail SM
0'09"
--
10:16
--
10:17
OK
10:19
--
IFAXD921.WMF
B750
132
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.5 IP-FAX
What is IP-FAX?
For details: Core Technology Manual Facsimile Processes Faxing from a PC
Internet/LAN Fax Boards IP-FAX
4-7
Not used.
COMMENTS
Raise the level by selecting a higher setting if too
many transmission errors are occurring on the
network.
If TCP/UDP is enabled on the network, raise this
setting on the T.30 machine. Increasing the delay
time allows the recovery of more lost packets.
If only UDP is enabled, increase the number of
redundant packets.
Level 1~2: 3 Redundant packets
Level 3:
4 Redundant packets
Do not change these settings.
Settings
User parameter switch 32 (20[H]), bit 0
IP-Fax Gate Keeper usage
0: No, 1: Yes
LAN switches 10 to 12: Various IP-FAX settings (see the bit switch table)
SM
133
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
IP-FAX
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Type:
Circuit:
Connection:
Direct couple
Original Size:
Scanning Method:
Resolution:
G3
8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard)
8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Detail)
8 x 15.4 line/mm (Fine) Note1
16 x15.4 line/mm (Super Fine) See Note 1
Transmission Time:
Data Compression:
Protocol:
Modulation:
Data Rate:
G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/
19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
Automatic fallback
I/O Rate:
B750
134
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Memory Capacity:
ECM: 128 KB
SAF
Standard: 4 MB
With optional Expansion Memory: 28 MB (4 MB+ 24 MB)
Page Memory
Standard: 4 MB (Print: 2 MB + Scanner: 2 MB)
With optional Expansion Memory: 12 MB (4 MB + 8 MB)
(Print 8 MB + Scanner: 4 MB)
Standard
2000
100
500
100
100
6
200
30
The following table shows how the capabilities of the document memory will
change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit and the Expansion Memory
are installed.
Memory Transmission
file
Maximum number of
page for memory
transmission
Memory capacity for
memory transmission
(
Note1)
Without the
Expansion Memory
400
400
1000
1000
320
2240
NOTE: Measured using an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at the standard
resolution, the auto image density mode and the Text mode.
SM
135
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
SPECIFICATIONS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
3. IFAX SPECIFICATIONS
Connectivity
Local area network
Ethernet 100base-Tx/10base-T
IEEE1394 (IP over 1394)
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)
Protocol
Transmission:
SMTP, TCP/IP
Reception:
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP
Resolution
Main scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi
Sub scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi, 100 dpi
NOTE: To use 400 dpi, IFAX SW01 Bit
4 must be set to 1.
Data rate
100 Mbps(100base-Tx)
10 Mbps (10base-T)
Transmission Time
1 s (through a LAN to the server)
Condition: ITU-T #1 test document
(Selerexe Letter)
MTF correction: OFF
TTI: None
Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi
Communication speed: 10 Mbps
Correspondent device: E-mail server
Line conditions: No terminal access
Authentication method
SMTP-AUTH
POP before SMTP
A-POP
Remark
The machine must be set up as an email client before installation. Any
client PCs connected to the machine
through a LAN must also be e-mail
clients, or some features will not work
(e.g. Autorouting).
Document Size
Maximum message width is A4/LT.
Note: To use B4 and A3 width, IFAX
SW00 Bit 1 (B4) and/or Bit 2 (A3)
must be set to 1.
E-mail File Format
Single/multi-part
MIME conversion
Image: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR)
B750
136
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
4.
Network:
Original size:
Transmission protocol:
Compatible machines:
IP-Fax transmission
function:
SM
137
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
MACHINE CONFIGURATION
1
4
13
5
6
12
7
11
No.
1, 3
2, 4, 6
5
7
8
Description
SG3-D board
Modular jack
CCU interface board
Expansion memory
MBU board
Item
Fax Option Type 3232
G3 Interface Unit Type
3232
Handset Type 1018
Expansion Memory
Marker Type 30
B750
10
Machine Code
B750
B751
9
No.
9
10
11
12
13
Description
FCU board
FCU interface board
Controller board
CCU drive board
Speaker
No.
6, 8, 9, 10, 13
1, 2, 5, 12
B433
G578
H903
B750V101.WMF
Remarks
When using the dual G3 port
unit, this has 3, 4, 5, 12.
USA only
7
Refill ink for stamp
138
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................25
3.1 DIP SWITCHES.......................................................................................... 25
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
: Clip ring
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
B386R506.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL FEED UNIT
[A]
B386R500.WMF
[B]
[A]
B386R507.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PICK-UP ROLLER
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
B386R501.WMF
B386R204.WMF
[C]
[B]
B386R205.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SEPARATION ROLLER
[C]
[B]
B386R502.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B386R201.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS, TRAILING EDGE SENSOR
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
[A]
[B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
B386R503.WMF
B386R504.WMF
B386R505.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE
[A]
[C]
[D]
B386R202.WMF
[E]
First remove the rear cover. Then follow the instructions below for each part
replacement:
DF Feed Clutch
1. DF feed clutch [A] ( x 1, x 1)
Pick-up Solenoid
1. Pick-up solenoid [B] ( x 3, x 1, x 1)
Transport Motor
1. Bracket [C] ( x 2)
2. Transport motor [E] ( x 2, x 1)
DF Feed Motor
1. Bracket [C] ( x 2)
2. DF feed motor [D] ( x 2, x 1)
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REGISTRATION SENSOR
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
[B]
[A]
B386R508.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR
[B]
[C]
B386R509.WMF
[D]
B386R203.WMF
1. Rear cover ( x 1)
2. Upper cover and the exit tray
3. Open the exit guide plate [A]. Detach the unit by inserting a screwdriver into
one of the small openings [B] on either side of the guide plate holder and
pushing firmly.
4. Stamp solenoid [C] ( x 1)
5. Original exit sensor [D] ( x 1)
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
3
19
B386D201.WMF
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
1. Separation Roller
3. Pick-up Roller
15. Stamp
9. Original Table
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
16
6
7
15
8
14
13
9
10
12
11
B386D202.WMF
1. DF Feed Clutch
5. DF Pick-up Solenoid
8. DF Drive PCB
9. DF Position Sensor
B810
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Name
DF Feed
DF Transport
Sensors
S1
DF Position
Registration
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
Original Trailing
Edge
Original Reverse
Sensor
Solenoids
DF Pick-up
SOL1
SOL2
SOL3
Stamp
Junction Gate
Magnetic Clutches
DF Feed
MC1
Function
Drives the feed belt, separation, pick-up, and
reverse table rollers.
Drives the transport and exit rollers
Index No.
10
11
9
17
2
3
4
6
15
12
14
16
5
13
7
PCBs
DF Drive
PCB1
SM
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE LAYOUT
1
10
9
8
B386D203.WMF
1. Separation Roller
6. DF Feed Motor
3. Pick-up Roller
4. DF Feed Clutch
9. Exit Roller
5. DF Transport Motor
DF Feed Motor: Drives the feed belt, separation, pick-up, and reverse table rollers
DF Transport Motor: Drives the transport and exit rollers
B810
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
[A]
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
[B]
[C]
B386D503.WMF
The original size detection mechanism consists of the original width sensor board
[A] and two original length sensors-1 [B] and -2 [C]. Based on the combined output
of the length sensors and the width sensor board, the machine can detect the size
of the original. This integrated detection mechanism is detailed in the table on the
next page.
Note that the width sensors terminal plate is attached to the original guide, so the
widths of the originals must all be the same.
SM
13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
A3 (297 x 420)
B4 (257 x 364)
A4 (Lengthwise)
(210 x 297)
A4 (297 x 210)
(Sideways)
B5 (182 x 257)
(Lengthwise)
B5 (257 x 182)
(Sideways)
A5 (148 x 210)
(Lengthwise)
A5 (210 x 148)
(Sideways)
11" x 17" (DLT)
11" x 15"
10" x 14"
8.5" x 14" (LG)
8.5" x 13" (F4)
8" x 13" (F)
8.5" x 11"
(Lengthwise)
8.5" x 11"
(Sideways)
10" x 8"
(Lengthwise)
5.5" x 8.5"
(Lengthwise)
(HLT)
5.5" x 8.5"
(Sideways) (HLT)
NA
EU
Original
Width-1
Original
Width-2
P
P
L
L
L
H
Original Width-3
P4
P3
P2
P1
ON
ON
Original
Length-1
Original
Length-2
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
L
L
L
H
H
H
L
L
H
L
L
L
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Key
: No, P: Yes
ON: Paper present
NA: North America, EU: Europe
NOTE: 1) P1-P4 represent the four positions on the width sensor board. ON
indicates the presence of the terminal plate in a given position. Original
Width-1 and Original Width-2 are the outputs from the sensor board to
the DF main board. The state of these outputs (L or H) depends on the
position of the terminal plate on the sensor board (P1, P2, P3, or P4).
For example, if the terminal plate is at P4, both outputs are L.
2) A reading of L on either of the width sensor outputs indicates that the
terminal plate is connecting the GND pattern with the width sensor
output signal line.
3) The machine cannot detect more than one size of originals in the same
job.
B810
14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
Original Side
Guide Position
P4
P3
P2
P1
A3/A4S
B4/B5S
A4L/A5S
B5L/A5L
The signal is "L" when the terminal plate is connected to the GND pattern.
B386D501.WMF
SM
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE
B810
16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PICK-UP AND SEPARATION
[A]
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
[B]
B386D504.WMF
[F]
[G]
B386D505.WMF
The original is set with the image facing up. The original pushes actuator [A] and
the original set sensor [E] is activated.
After pressing the start button, the pick-up solenoid [D] is activated and the lift plate
[C] lifts the original up until it comes in contact with the pick-up roller [B]. The pickup roller then feeds the top sheet of paper.
After being fed from the pick-up roller, the topmost sheet is separated from the
stack by the separation roller and sent to the first transport roller.
The mechanism is an FRR system, consisting of the original feed belt [F] and
separation roller [G].
SM
17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT
[E]
[F]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B386D506.WMF
The DF feed motor feeds the separated original to the first transport roller [A] at
maximum speed. When the registration sensor [B] detects the leading edge, the
motor stops for a short while. Then the feed and transport motors turn on again,
and feed the original through scanning area at a lower speed (the scanning area
contains the original exposure guide [D] and DF exposure glass [C]). After
scanning, the original is fed out by the second transport roller [E] and exit roller [F].
B810
18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT
[G]
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
[E]
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
B386D204.WMF
[A]
[E]
[D]
[F]
B386D205.WMF
When the registration sensor [B] detects the leading edge of the original, the DF
feed motor (which drives the feed roller) and transport motor (which drives the
transport roller) both switch off. After a brief interval, the transport motor alone
reactivates to drive the first [A] and second transport roller [G] and the exit roller
[F]. The front side of the original is then scanned.
When the original exit sensor [C] detects the leading edge of the original, the
junction gate solenoid is activated and the junction gate [D] opens. The original is
then transported towards the reverse table [H].
Soon after the trailing edge of the original passes the exit sensor [C], the junction
gate solenoid switches off and the junction gate [D] is closed. When the original
has been fed onto the reverse table, the DF feed motor switches on in reverse. The
original is then fed by the reverse roller [E] and then by the exit roller [F] and first
transport roller [A] to the scanning area (where the reverse side will be scanned).
SM
19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT
[H]
[I]
B386D206.WMF
[J]
B386D207.WMF
The original is then sent to the reverse table [H] a second time to be turned over.
This is done so that the duplex copies will be properly stacked front side down in
the exit tray [J] in the correct order.
B810
20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAMP
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
2.9 STAMP
[C]
[A]
[B]
B386D507.WMF
SM
21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
TIMING CHART
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Original Feed
Exit Sensor
Original Set
Sensor
Stamp
Solenoid
Rreverse
Solenoid
DF Pick-up
Solenoid
DF Feed
Clutch
Transport
Motor
Feed Motor
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
MAX
READ
OFF
MAX
READ
OFF
1000ms
Original Scan Start
JAM 1A, 1B
JAM 3
JAM 8
JAM 2
JAM 4
Feed Completion
Original Size
Original Set Size Code
Next Original Check Stamp Stop Position
Reverse
Sensor
ON
OFF
TXD
Trailing Edge
Sensor
ON
OFF
ENABLE
DISABLE
Feed Completion
Original Size
Exit Completion Original Not Set
Stamp Stop Position
Next Original
Check
Feed motor turns if sub-scan
is 238mm or more.
Original Stop
JAM 5
Original Stop
Exit Completion
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
22
B810
Registration
Sensor
FGATE
B386D101.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
If the registration sensor does not turn off within 1260 mm x 1.1 since the
feed motor started (1.1 times the distance between the paper stop
position at registration and the maximum original length).
JAM 3:
If the original exit sensor does not turn on within 92 mm x 1.5 since the
feed motor started (1.5 times the distance between registration sensor
and exit sensor)
JAM 4:
If the original exit sensor does not turn off within original length + 120
mm since the transport motor started after the exit sensor turns on
JAM 5:
Duplex mode only: If the original reverse sensor does not turn on within
161 mm x 1.4 since the feed motor started (1.4 times the distance
between the original reverse position and the registration sensor).
JAM 6:
JAM 7:
If the cover is opened or the ADF is lifted while the ADF is in operation.
JAM 8:
JAM 9:
SM
23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT
Main
Frame
Interface
ADF Control
CPU
DF Feed Motor
Driver
DF Transport
Motor
Registration Sensor
Original Set Sensor
DF Position Sensor
Feed Cover Open Sensor
Original Width Sensor Board
Original Length Sensor 1
Original Length Sensor 2
Original Trailing Edge Sensor
Original Exit Sensor
Original Reverse Sensor
DF Feed Clutch
Junction Gate
Solenoid
Driver
DF Pick-up
Solenoid
Stamp Solenoid
B386D500.WMF
B810
24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DIP SWITCHES
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCHES
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SM
SW100
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
4
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Description
Normal operating mode (Default)
No function
Free run with two-sided original 100%
DF feed clutch operates
Free run with one-sided original 32.6%
DF pick-up solenoid operates
Motors rotate
No function
Free run with one-sided original 100%
Junction gate solenoid operates
Free run without two-sided original 100%
No function
Free run without one-sided original 100%
Stamp solenoid operates
Free run with two-sided original 32.6%
Free run without two-sided original 100%
25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810